manualshive.com logo in svg

Mitsubishi Electric FR-A820-00046 (0.4K), Instruction Manual

The Mitsubishi Electric FR-A820-00046 (0.4K) Instruction Manual is a valuable resource for users of this versatile product. Easily downloadable and completely free, it provides clear and concise instructions for operating and maintaining your Mitsubishi Electric FR-A820-00046 (0.4K) unit. Get your copy now from manualshive.com.

Share
Download
background image

System configuration for Ethernet communication  (FR-A800-E)

Installation and wiring

2 - 112

●

Hub

Use a hub that supports transmission speed of the Ethernet.

●

Ethernet cable wiring precautions

–

Do not touch the conductors of the cable or the connector on the inverter. Keep the conduc-
tors free of dust or dirt. Handling the conductors with oily hands or dust/dirt adhesion to the
conductors may cause transmission losses and impair normal data link operation.

–

Check the Ethernet cable for the following points before use:

앫

The cable is not broken.

앫

The cable does not have a short circuit.

앫

The connector is properly installed.

–

Do not use an Ethernet cable with a broken latch. Doing so may cause the cable to come off
or malfunction.

–

Do not connect the Ethernet cable to the PU connector. The product could be damaged due
to differences in electrical specifications.

–

The maximum distance between stations is specified as 100 m. However, the maximum
distance may be shorter depending on the environment. For details of the cable, contact your
cable manufacturer.

●

Connecting and disconnecting of the Ethernet cable

Hold the cable connector when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable. Pulling a cable
connected to the inverter may damage the inverter or cable, or result in malfunction due to poor
contact.

●

Network configuration

Check the network configuration before wiring, and perform correct wiring.

Summary of Contents for FR-A820-00046 (0.4K)

Page 1: ...MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FR A800 Inverter Instruction Manual FR A820 00046 0 4K to 04750 90K E FR A840 00023 0 4K to 06830 280K E FR A842 07700 315K to 12120 500K E FR A846 00023 0 4K to 03610 132K E Art no 274661 01 06 2017 Version G Version check ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...0 4K to 00170 5 5K FR A846 00620 22K to 03610 132K F 08 2016 pdp rw akl Additions Changes 앫 Parameters Pr 394 395 606 635 638 673 674 679 683 851 852 855 862 863 876 1015 1016 1018 1298 1299 앫 Signals X48 X94 X95 X96 Y55 Y67 앫 Second droop control 앫 Cumulative pulse monitor 앫 Slip amount when replacing the motor SF JR to SF PR 앫 PM motor with a resolver 앫 Options FR A8TP FR A8APR FR A8AZ 앫 Paramet...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...el who meets all the conditions below A person who took a proper engineering training Such training may be available at your local Mitsubishi Electric office Contact your local sales office for schedules and locations A personwho can accessoperating manuals fortheprotectivedevices e g light curtain connect ed to the safety control system A person who has read and familiarized himself herself with ...

Page 6: ...rwise you may get an electric shock or be injured If your application requires by installation standards an RCD residual current device as up stream protection please select according to DIN VDE 0100 530 as following Single phase inverter type A or B Three phase inverter only type B Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock Other wise you may get an electr...

Page 7: ...rminals P N This could cause a fire and destroy the inverter The surface temperature of braking resistors can far exceed 100 C for brief periods Make sure that there is adequate protection against accidental contact and a safe distance is maintained to other units and system parts Be sure to perform daily and periodic inspections as specified in the Instruction Manual If a product is used without ...

Page 8: ...ductive bodies such as screws and metal fragments or other flammable substance such as oil from entering the inverter As the inverter is a precision instrument do not drop or subject it to impact If halogen based materials fluorine chlorine bromine iodine etc infiltrate into a Mitsub ishi Electric product the product will be damaged Halogen based materials are often in cludedinfumigant whichisused...

Page 9: ... motor suddenly Do not use a PM motor for an application where the PM motor is driven by its load and runs at a speed higher than the maximum motor speed Performing pre excitation LX signal and X13 signal under torque control Real sensorless vector control may start the motor running at a low speed even when the start command STF or STR is not input The motor may run also at a low speed when the s...

Page 10: ...r can be easily set for high speed operation Before changing its setting fully examine the performances of the motor and machine The DC braking function of the frequency inverter is not designed to continuously hold a load Use an electro mechanical holding brake on the motor for this purpose Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period always perform inspec tion and test oper...

Page 11: ... confirm and adjust the parameters A failure to do so may cause some machines to make unexpected motions E CAUTION Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips check for the wiring fault short circuit damage to internal parts of the inverter etc Ide...

Page 12: ...ng instructions Handling instructions are steps that must be carried out in their exact sequence during startup op eration maintenance and similar operations They are numbered consecutively black numbers in white circles Text Text Text Use of footnotes in tables Instructionsintablesareexplainedinfootnotesunderneaththetables insuperscript Thereisafoot note character at the appropriate position in t...

Page 13: ...g the heatsink through a panel 2 19 2 4 Terminal connection diagrams 2 21 2 4 1 CA type 2 21 2 4 2 FM type 2 23 2 4 3 CA type FR A800 E 2 25 2 4 4 FM type FR A800 E 2 27 2 4 5 CA type FR A800 GF 2 29 2 4 6 FM type FR A800 GF 2 31 2 5 Main circuit terminals 2 33 2 5 1 Details on the main circuit terminals 2 33 2 5 2 Terminal layout of the main circuit terminals wiring of power supply and the motor ...

Page 14: ...A800 GF 2 103 2 11 1 System configuration example 2 103 2 11 2 Network configuration 2 104 2 11 3 Network components 2 105 2 11 4 Component names of the CC Link IE Field Network communication circuit board 2 106 2 11 5 Wiring method 2 106 2 11 6 Operation status LEDs 2 109 2 12 System configuration for Ethernet communication FR A800 E 2 110 2 12 1 Ethernet communication overview 2 110 2 12 2 Ether...

Page 15: ... analog signal current input 4 20 4 6 Basic operation procedure External operation 4 22 4 6 1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel 4 22 4 6 2 Setting the frequency with switches multi speed setting 4 24 4 6 3 Setting the frequency using an analog signal voltage input 4 26 4 6 4 Changing the frequency 60 Hz initial value at the maximum voltage input 5 V initial value 4 27 4 6 5 Setting the ...

Page 16: ... 153 5 5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control 5 155 5 5 1 About position control 5 155 5 5 2 Setting procedure of vector control position control 5 158 5 5 3 Set the procedure of PM sensorless vector control position control 5 159 5 5 4 Simple positioning function by parameters 5 160 5 5 5 Position control by inverter pulse train input 5 177 5 5 6 Pulse monitor 5 ...

Page 17: ...nd source during communication operation 5 282 5 9 4 Reverse rotation prevention selection 5 291 5 9 5 Frequency setting via pulse train input 5 292 5 9 6 JOG operation 5 296 5 9 7 Operation by multi speed setting 5 299 5 10 H Protective function parameter 5 302 5 10 1 Motor overheat protection electronic thermal O L relay 5 303 5 10 2 Fault definition 5 313 5 10 3 Cooling fan operation selection ...

Page 18: ...X9 5 445 5 12 11 Start signal operation selection 5 447 5 13 C Motor constant parameters 5 451 5 13 1 Applied motor 5 451 5 13 2 Offline auto tuning 5 457 5 13 3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor motor constant tuning 5 471 5 13 4 Online auto tuning 5 482 5 13 5 Signal loss detection of encoder signals 5 486 5 14 A Application parameters 5 487 5 14 1 Electronic bypass function 5 488 5 14 2 Self p...

Page 19: ...oints V F 5 698 5 16 6 SF PR slip amount adjustment mode 5 700 5 16 7 DC injection brake zero speed control and servo lock 5 701 5 16 8 Output stop function 5 709 5 16 9 Stop selection 5 711 5 16 10 Regenerative brake selection and DC feeding mode 5 713 5 16 11 Regeneration avoidance function 5 723 5 16 12 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration 5 727 5 16 13 Slip compensation 5 729 5 16 14 Enc...

Page 20: ...e actions 6 10 6 5 1 Error message 6 10 6 5 2 Warning 6 14 6 5 3 Alarm 6 18 6 5 4 Fault 6 19 6 5 5 Other messages 6 39 6 6 Check first when you have a trouble 6 40 6 6 1 Motor does not start 6 40 6 6 2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise 6 43 6 6 3 Inverter generates abnormal noise 6 44 6 6 4 Motor generates heat abnormally 6 44 6 6 5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction 6 44 6 6...

Page 21: ... 4 Use of CT and transducer 7 18 7 2 5 Measurement of inverter input power factor 7 18 7 2 6 Measurement of converter output voltage across terminals P and N 7 18 7 2 7 Measurement of inverter output frequency 7 18 7 2 8 Insulation resistance test using megger 7 19 7 2 9 Pressure test 7 19 8 Specifications 8 1 Inverter rating 8 1 8 1 1 200 V class 8 1 8 1 2 400 V class 8 2 8 2 Motor rating 8 5 8 2...

Page 22: ...odes under different control methods A 5 A 4 Ethernet communication parameters functions and instruction codes under different control methods A 40 A 5 For customers using HMS network options A 42 A 5 1 List of inverter monitored items A 42 A 5 2 Direct command mode for position control A 45 A 6 Plug in option compatibility A 47 A 6 1 FR A8NF A 47 A 6 2 FR A8NS A 47 A 7 EC Declarations of Conformi...

Page 23: ...l compatible option FR A8AP FR A8APR plug in option FR A8TP control terminal option Ethernet board Ethernet communication board FR A8ETH Pr Parameter number Number assigned to function PU operation Operation using the PU operation panel parameter unit External operation Operation using the control circuit signals Combined operation Combined operation using the PU and External operation SF JR Mitsu...

Page 24: ... are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual ConnectiondiagramsinthisInstructionManualappearwiththecontrollogicoftheinputterminal as source logic unless otherwise specified For the control logic refer to page 2 49 Harmonic Suppression Guidelines All the models of the inverters used by specific consumers are covered by the...

Page 25: ...train output Terminal AM analog voltage output 0 to 10 V DC OFF Sink logic 60 Hz 9999 same as the power supply voltage CA terminal CA equipped model Terminal CA analog current output 0 to 20 mA DC Terminal AM analog voltage output 0 to 10 V DC ON Source logic 50 Hz 8888 95 of the power supply voltage Tab 1 1 Differences between the types F R A 8 4 0 00023 1 Symbol Voltage class Symbol Structure fu...

Page 26: ...The inverter model name used in this Instruction Manual consists of the inverter model e g FR A840 00023 2 60 and the applicable motor capacity in brackets specified in kW This approach helps for better understanding and for choosing the right motor For further specifica tion details like capacity current or overload current rating refer to chapter 8 For selecting the right frequency inverter you ...

Page 27: ...Introduction Component names FR A800 1 5 1 3 Component names Component names are shown below I002341E_F Fig 1 2 Appearance and structure ...

Page 28: ...lects between voltage and current for the terminal 2 and 4 inputs 5 406 Control circuit terminal block Connects cables for the control circuit 2 44 EMC filter ON OFF connector Turns ON OFF the EMC filter 3 9 Main circuit terminal block Connects cables for the main circuit 2 33 Charge lamp Stays ON while the power is supplied to the main circuit 2 34 Wiring cover This cover is removable without unp...

Page 29: ... How to give a frequency command Set from the PU PU External External Change frequency with ON OFF switches connected to terminals multi speed setting Perform frequency setting by a current output device Connection across terminals 4 and 5 Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device Connection across terminals 2 and 5 Set from the PU PU External External External Change of frequency with ...

Page 30: ...ernal PU combined operation mode 2 4 20 Inputs to terminal STF and STR give a start command and the PU gives a frequency command External PU combined operation mode 1 4 22 Inputs to terminal STF and STR give a start command and inputs to terminal RH RM and RL give a frequency command External operation mode 4 24 Inputs to terminal STF and STR give a start command and voltage input to terminal 2 gi...

Page 31: ...ces I002343E_B Fig 2 1 System configuration overview R L1 S L2 T L3 P1 P N P P P3 PR P P PR PR U V W U V W Personal computer FR Configurator2 USB IM connection PM connection Earth Ground Earth Ground Earth Ground USB device Mini B connector Install these options as required USB host A connector Communication status indicator LED USB host ...

Page 32: ...ermissible range This must be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an enclosure Incorrect wiring may lead to damage of the inverter The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main circuit lines to protect them from noise The built in EMC filter can reduce the noise 2 12 2 21 3 9 Three phase AC power supply Must be within the permissible power supply specifications of t...

Page 33: ...brake resistor FR ABR Improves the braking capability of the inverter built in brake Remove the jumper across the terminals PR and PX to connect this 7 5K or lower Always install a thermal relay when using a brake resistor whose capacity is 11K or higher 2 87 Noise filter ferrite core FR BSF01 FR BLF Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter The noise filter is e...

Page 34: ...n the inverter output side for commercial power supply operation switching using a general purpose motor select an MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038 AC 3 class rated current Motor output kW Applicable inverter model Moldedcasecircuitbreaker MCCB or Earth leakage circuit breaker ELB NF NV type Input side magnetic contactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Power factor improving...

Page 35: ...netic contactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Power factor improving AC or DC reactor Without With Without With 0 4 FR A840 00023 0 4K 5A 5A S T10 S T10 0 75 FR A840 00038 0 75K 5A 5A S T10 S T10 1 5 FR A840 00052 1 5K 10A 10A S T10 S T10 2 2 FR A840 00083 2 2K 10A 10A S T10 S T10 3 7 FR A840 00126 3 7K 20A 15A S T10 S T10 5 5 FR A840 00170 5 5K 30A 20A S T21 S T12 7 5 FR A840 00250 7 5K...

Page 36: ... class rated current When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial power supply operation switching using a general purpose motor select an MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038 AC 3 class rated current Fig 2 3 Installation of the breakers I002770E NOTES The above shows a selection example for the ND rating For selecting the SLD rating LD rating or HD rating refer to the Te...

Page 37: ...n the operation panel These screws cannot be removed Press the upper edge of the operation panel while pulling out the operation panel To reinstall the operation panel align its connector on the back with the PU connector of the inverter and insert the operation panel After confirming that the operation panel is fit securely tighten the screws Tightening torque 0 40 to 0 45 Nm I002344E I002345E Fi...

Page 38: ...s can be performed Removal of the front cover upper side FR A820 01540 30K or lower FR A840 00770 30K or lower Withthe frontcover lowerside removed loosen themountingscrew s onthe front cover upper side The screw s cannot be removed FR A820 00340 5 5K to FR A820 01540 30K and FR A840 00170 5 5K to FR A840 00770 30K have two mounting screws Holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sid...

Page 39: ...er into place Tighten the mounting screw s at the lower part of the front cover upper side FR A820 00340 5 5K to FR A820 01540 30K and FR A840 00170 5 5K to FR A840 00770 30K have two mounting screws Install the front cover lower side by inserting the upper hook into the socket of the front cover upper side Tighten the mounting screws at the lower part of the front cover lower side I002348E Fig 2 ...

Page 40: ...cover upper side FR A820 01870 37K or higher FR A840 00930 37K or higher With the front cover lower side removed loosen the mounting screws on the front cover upper side These screws cannot be removed Holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the front cover upper side pull out the cover using its upper side as a support With the front cover upper side removed wiring of the R...

Page 41: ...ockets of the inverter Securely install the front cover upper side to the inverter by fixing the hooks on the sides of the cover into place Tighten the mounting screw s at the lower part of the front cover upper side Fasten the front cover lower side with the mounting screws I002351E Fig 2 10 Reinstallation of the front covers NOTE Fully make sure that the front covers are installed securely Alway...

Page 42: ...llation at an altitude above 1 000 m up to 2 500 m derate the rated current 3 per 500 m 2 9 m s or less for the FR A840 04320 160K or higher Temperature Thepermissiblesurroundingairtemperatureoftheinverterisbetween 10 Cand 50 C 10 Cand 40 CattheSLDrating ThepermissiblesurroundingairtemperatureoftheFR A800 GFisbetween 0 and 50 C 0 and 40 C for the SLD rating Always operate the inverter within this ...

Page 43: ...se problems of reduced insulation and metal corrosion On the other hand too low humidity may cause a spatial electrical breakdown The insulation distance defined in JEM1103 Control Equipment Insulator is humidity of 45 to 85 Measures against high humidity Make the enclosure enclosed and provide it with a hygroscopic agent Provide dry air into the enclosure from outside Provide a space heater in th...

Page 44: ...sure Inplaces where explosion may be caused by explosive gas dust or dirt an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurallycomplieswiththeguidelines andhaspassedthespecified tests This makestheenclosure itselfexpensive includingthe testcharges The bestwayis toavoidinstallationin such placesandin stall the inverter in a non hazardous place High altitude Use the inverter at an altitude of within 10...

Page 45: ...oler etc Cooling system Enclosure structure Comment Natural cooling Natural ventilation enclosed open type I001000E This system is low in cost and generally used but the enclosure size increases as the inverter capacity increases This system is for relatively small capacities Natural ventilation totally enclosed type I001001E Being a totally enclosed type this system is the most appropriate for ho...

Page 46: ...crews Leave enough clearances and take cooling measures Avoid places where the inverter is subjected to direct sunlight high temperature and high humidity Install the inverter on a nonflammable wall surface When encasing multiple inverters install them in parallel as a cooling measure Fig 2 11 Installation on the panel I002353E Fixsix positions for the FR A840 04320 160K or higher ...

Page 47: ...he SLD ratedinverter side by sideinstallation 0 cm clearance is available For replacing the cooling fan of the FR A840 04320 160K or higher 30 cm of space is necessary in front of the inverter Refer to page 7 7 for fan replacement Installation orientation of the inverter Install the inverter on a wall as specified Do not mount it horizontally or any other way Above the inverter Heat is blown up fr...

Page 48: ...the permissible value by providing ventilation and increasing the enclosure size Arrangement of the ventilation fan and inverter Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of the unit as warm air by the cooling fan When installing a ventilation fan for that heat determine the place of ventilation fan installation after fully considering an air flow Air passes through areas of low r...

Page 49: ... outside the enclosure using a panel through attachment FR A8CN For the FR A840 04320 160K or higher attachment is not necessary when the heatsink is to be protruded For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the panel through attachment FR A8CN to the inverter refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR A8CN Protrusion of heatsink of the FR A840 04320 160K or higher Panel cu...

Page 50: ...t and removal of a rear side installation frame I002802E I002803E Fig 2 16 Installation on the control cabinet wall NOTES Having a cooling fan the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water drops oil mist dust etc Be careful not to drop screws dust etc into the inverter and cooling fan section Shift Upper installation frames Shift Lower installation...

Page 51: ...tting signal analog Auxiliary input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Analog sig...

Page 52: ...kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently Remove the jumper between PR and PX to connect the brake resistor FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower and FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower Connect a brake resistor across terminals P P3 and PR The terminal PR is equipped in the FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of dischar...

Page 53: ...nalog Auxiliary input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Indicator Frequency mete...

Page 54: ...tween PR and PX to connect the brake resistor FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower and FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower Connect a brake resistor across terminals P P3 and PR The terminal PR is equipped in the FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors Refer to page 2 87 Do not connect the DC power supply under DC f...

Page 55: ...y setting signal analog Auxiliary input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Analog...

Page 56: ...or FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower and FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower Connect a brake resistor across terminals P P3 and PR The terminal PR is equipped in the FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors Refer to page 2 87 Do not connect the DC power supply under DC feeding mode to terminal P3 The function of ...

Page 57: ...quency setting signal analog Auxiliary input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC PU connector Connector for plug in option connection Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common I...

Page 58: ...resistor across terminals P P3 and PR The terminal PR is equipped in the FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors Refer to page 2 87 Do not connect the DC power supply under DC feeding mode to terminal P3 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment Pr 195 Pr 19...

Page 59: ...liary input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC PU connector Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Analog signal output 0 to 10 V DC RS 485 terminals Data transmission Data ...

Page 60: ... kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently Remove the jumper between PR and PX to connect the brake resistor FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower and FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower Connect a brake resistor across terminals P P3 and PR The terminal PR is equipped in the FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discha...

Page 61: ...ry input Terminal 4 input Current input 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC Safety stop signal Relay output 1 Fault output Relay output 2 Running Instantaneous power failure Up to frequency Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Sink source common Indicator Frequency meter etc Analog signal output 0 to 10 V DC RS 485 terminals Data tran...

Page 62: ...tween PR and PX to connect the brake resistor FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower and FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower Connect a brake resistor across terminals P P3 and PR The terminal PR is equipped in the FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors Refer to page 2 87 Do not connect the DC power supply under DC f...

Page 63: ...P3 and PR Connecting a brake resistor increases the regenerative braking capability P N Brake unit connection FR A820 00630 11K or lower FR A840 00380 15K or lower Connect the brake unit FR BU2 FR BU BU power regeneration common converter FR CV power regeneration converter MT RC high power factor converter FR HC2 or DC power supply under DC feeding mode When connecting multiple inverters FR A820 0...

Page 64: ... A820 01250 22K FR A840 00470 18 5K FR A840 00620 22K FR A820 01540 30K FR A840 00770 30K I002361E I002362E Tab 2 8 Terminal layout and wiring 1 R L1 S L2 T L3 N P PR PX R1 L11 S1 L21 Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper M R L1S L2 T L3 N P PR R1 L11 S1 L21 PX Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper M N P PR PX R1 L11 S1 L21 R L1 S L2 T L3 Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper ...

Page 65: ...0 90K FR A840 05470 220K to FR A840 06830 280K I002367E I002804E Tab 2 8 Terminal layout and wiring 2 R L1S L2T L3 N P P1 R1 L11 S1 L21 Jumper CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply Jumper M R L1 S L2 T L3 N P P3 PR R1 L11 S1 L21 Jumper CHARGE lamp Power supply M Jumper R L1 S L2 T L3 N P P R1 L11 S1 L21 CHARGE lamp Motor Power supply M DC reactor For option Jumper R L1 S L2 T L3 N P P1 R1 L11 S1 L21 CHAR...

Page 66: ...he inverter Doing so will damage the inverter Connect the motor to U V and W The phase need to be matched When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the FR A840 05470 220K or higher tighten a nut from the right side of the conductor When wiring two wires place wires on both sides of the conductor Refer to the drawing For wiring use bolts nuts provided with the inverter I000999E Fig 2 23 Co...

Page 67: ... R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W Earthing ground ing cable 00046 0 4K to 00167 2 2K M4 1 5 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2 5 2 5 2 5 00250 3 7K M4 1 5 5 5 4 5 5 4 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 12 12 4 4 4 00340 5 5K M5 M4 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 6 6 6 00490 7 5K M5 M4 2 5 14 5 8 5 14 8 14 5 5 6 8 16 10 16 00630 11K M5 2 5 14 5 14 5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16 00770 15K M6 4 4 22 6 22 6 22 22 22 14 4...

Page 68: ... 01800 55K or higher it is the gauge of a cable with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90 C XLPE cable It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40 C or lower and in enclosure wiring Selection example for use mainly in Europe Applicable inverter model FR A840 첸 Terminal screw size Tighten ing torque Nm Crimping terminal Cable gauge HIV cables etc mm AWG MCM PVC cables etc mm R L1...

Page 69: ...ge drop can be calculated by the following formula Usea largerdiameter cablewhenthewiring distanceis long orwhenit is desired to decreasethevolt age drop torque reduction in the low speed range Line voltage drop V 3 wire resistance mΩ m wiring distance m x current A 1000 NOTES The above shows a selection example for the ND rating For selecting the SLD rating LD rating or HD rating refer to the Tec...

Page 70: ...e FR A840 02160 75K or higher connect a sine wave filter MT BSL BSC at the output side of the inverter With PM motor The wiring length should be 100 m or shorter when connecting a PM motor Use one PM motor for one inverter Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter When the wiring length exceeds 50 m for a 400 V class motor driven by an inverter under PM sensor less vector control set 9...

Page 71: ...ter output side If the fast response current limit function malfunctions disable this function Refer to Pr 156 Stall prevention operation selection on page 5 325 A surge voltage suppression filter FR ASF H FR BMF H can be used under V F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control A sine wave filter MT BSL BSC can be used under V F control Do not use the filters under different control method...

Page 72: ...earthing grounding for the inverter If independent earthing grounding I is not available use II common earthing grounding in the figure below where the inverter is connected with the other equipment at an earthing grounding point Donotusetheotherequipment searthing grounding cabletoearth ground the inverter as shown in III A leakage current containing many high frequency components flows into the ...

Page 73: ...rthing the drive NOTE To be compliant with the EU Directive Low Voltage Directive refer to the Installation Guideline I Independent earthing Good II Common earthing Good III Common earthing cable Not allowed Inverter Other equipment Inverter Other equipment Inverter Other equipment ...

Page 74: ...e second function such as second torque boost and second V F base frequency is set turning ON the RT signal enables the selected function Input resistance 4 7 kΩ Voltage when contacts are open 21 to 27 V DC When contacts are short circuited 4 to 6 mA DC 5 445 MRS Output stop Turn ON the MRS signal 20 ms or more to stop the inverter output Use this signal to shut off the inverter output when stoppi...

Page 75: ...sition to select current input 0 to 20 mA When voltage is input Input resistance 10 kΩ 1 kΩ Maximum permissiblevoltage 20 V DC When current is input Input resistance 245 Ω 5 Ω Permissible maximum current 30 mA 5 406 4 Frequency setting current Inputting 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V provides the maximum output frequency at 20 mA and makes input and output proportional This input signal is va...

Page 76: ...0 OL Overload warning Switched to LOW when stall prevention is activated by the stall prevention function Switched to HIGH when stall prevention is cancelled 5 339 IPF Instantaneouspower failure Switched to LOW when an instantaneous power failure occurs or when the undervoltage protection is activated 5 581 5 599 FU Frequency detection Switched to LOW when the inverter output frequency is equal to...

Page 77: ...munication by RS 485 앫 Conforming standard EIA 485 RS 485 앫 Transmission format Multidrop link 앫 Communication speed 300 to 115200 bps 앫 Overall length 500 m 5 622 TXD RXD Inverter reception terminal RXD GND SG Earthing grounding USB USB A connector 앫 A connector receptacle 앫 A USB memory device enables parameter copies and the trace function 앫 Interface Conforms to USB1 1 USB2 0 full speed compat...

Page 78: ... 7 kΩ Input current 4 to 6 mA DC with 24 V DC input 2 63 S2 Safety stop input Channel 2 SIC Safety stop input terminal common Common terminal for terminals S1 and S2 SO Safetymonitoroutput open collector output Indicates the safety stop input signal status Switched to LOW when the status is other than the internal safety circuit failure Switched to HIGH during the internal safety circuit failure s...

Page 79: ...to the source logic SOURCE for the CA type The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper con nector position I002370E Fig 2 26 Changing the control logic NOTES Make sure that the jumper connector is installed correctly Never change the control logic while power is ON To change the control logic for the FR A800 GF remove the control circuit terminal b...

Page 80: ...lows from the corresponding signal input terminal Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals I001029E_G Fig 2 27 Changing the control logic RUN RUN TB1 TB1 TB17 TB18 Current flow concerning the input output signals when source logic is selected Current flow concerning the input output signals when sink logic is selected Current Cur...

Page 81: ...wn below Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with the terminal 0 V of the external power supply When using terminals PC SD as a 24 V DC power supply do not install an external power supply in parallel with the inverter Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents Fig 2 28 Using an external power supply in connection with the outputs of a PLC source logic I002...

Page 82: ...ert the blade terminal or the single wire into a socket of the terminal Strip off the sheath for the below length If the length of the sheath peeled is too long a short circuit may occur with neighbouring wires If the length is too short wires might come off Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose In addition do not solder it I002373E Fig 2 30 Terminal layout I0...

Page 83: ...rt the wires into a socket I002396E Fig 2 32 Crimped wire end sleeves Cable gauge mm Blade terminal model Crimping tool With insulation sleeve Without insulation sleeve For UL wire 0 3 AI 0 34 10TQ CRIMPFOX 6 0 5 AI 0 5 10WH AI 0 5 10WH GB 0 75 AI 0 75 10GY A 0 75 10 AI 0 75 10GY GB 1 AI 1 10RD A 1 10 AI 1 10RD 1000GB 1 25 1 5 AI 1 5 10BK A 1 5 10 AI 1 5 10BK 1000GB 0 75 for two wires AI TWIN 2 0 ...

Page 84: ...to the open close button In case the blade tip slips it may cause an inverter damage or injury Fig 2 35 Wire removal I002400E NOTES Pulling out the wire forcefully without pushing the open close button all the way down may dam age the terminal block Use a small flathead screwdriver tip thickness 0 4 mm tip width 2 5 mm If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used terminal block may be damag...

Page 85: ...MRS RES AU CS Every contact input terminal is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the frequency setting terminals 2 1 or 4 and the analog outputterminals AM CA Itshouldbeprotectedfromexternalnoiseusingashieldedortwisted cable Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminals RUN SU OL IPF FU The contact input circuit...

Page 86: ...mon terminal of the connected control circuit terminal When connecting an external power supply to the terminal PC however connect the shield of the power supply cable to the negative side of the external power supply Do not directly earth ground the shield to the enclosure etc Alwaysapplyavoltagetothefaultoutputterminals A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 viaarelaycoil lamp etc For the FR A820 03160 55K or higher...

Page 87: ...minals R1 L11andS1 L21areprovidedtoholdafaultsignal Inthiscase connectthepowersupplyterminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 of the control circuit to the input side of the MC Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals Doing so may damage the inverter FR A820 00250 3 7K or lower FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower Remove the upper screws Remove the lower screws Remove the jumper Connect the separate power s...

Page 88: ... 5 5K to FR A840 00380 15K Remove the upper screws Remove the lower screws Remove the jumper Connect the separate power supply cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals R1 L11 S1 L21 I002847E Fig 2 41 Detailed view of the terminals T L3 S L2 R L1 S1 L21 R1 L11 Main circuit terminal block ...

Page 89: ...wer is supplied from other than the input side of the MC The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1 L11 and S1 L21 differs according to the inverter capacity If the main circuit power is switched OFF for 0 1 s or more then ON again the inverter is reset and a fault output will not be held R1 L11 S1 L21 R L1 S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 MC Main power supply FR A820 00770 15K to...

Page 90: ...hile supplying 24 V external power starts the 24 V external power supply operation Turning ON the main circuit power stops the 24 V external power supply operation and enables the normal operation Item Rated specification Input voltage 23 to 25 5 V DC Input current 1 4 A or less Tab 2 20 Specification of the applicable 24 V external power supply Model Manufacturer S8JX N05024C Specifications Capac...

Page 91: ... supply operation can be confirmed even when the operation panel is removed During the 24 V external power supply operation the 24 V external power supply operation signal EV isoutput TousetheEVsignal set 68 positivelogic or 168 negativelogic inoneofPr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign function to an output terminal I002380E Fig 2 43 Confirming the 24 V external power supp...

Page 92: ... supply specification may flow at power ON Confirm that the power supply and other devices are not affected by the inrush cur rent and the voltage drop caused by it Depending on the power supply the inrush current pro tection may be activated to disable the power supply Select the power supply and capacity carefully When the wiring length between the external power supply and the inverter is long ...

Page 93: ...the faults shown on page 2 65 Terminal symbol Terminal function description S1 For input of the safety stop channel 1 Between S1 and SIC S2 and SIC Open In safety stop mode Short Other than the safety stop mode S2 For input of the safety stop channel 2 SIC Common terminal for S1 and S2 SO Outputs when an alarm or failure is detected The signal is output when no internal safety circuit failure exis...

Page 94: ... across the terminals SO and SOC The reset button acts as the feedback input for the safety relay module or the safety programmable controller I002381E_F Fig 2 44 Connecting the Safety relay module R L1S L2 T L3 U V W SO SOC S1 S2 G G SIC SD PC 24V RESET Logic CPU Fuse ASIC Gate Driver Gate Driver IGBTs Emergency stop button Safety relay module Safety programmable controller 24 V DC M Frequency In...

Page 95: ...1 S2 SO SAFE E SAF SA OFF OFF OFF Output shutoff Safe state Not displayed Not displayed ON Normal ON ON ON OFF Drive enabled Not displayed Not displayed Normal ON OFF OFF OFF Output shutoff Safe state Displayed Displayed Normal OFF ON OFF OFF Output shutoff Safe state Displayed Displayed Normal OFF OFF ON ON Output shutoff Safe state Not displayed Displayed Fault ON ON OFF OFF Output shutoff Safe ...

Page 96: ...g table and assign the function by Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection The use of the SAFE signal has not been certified for compliance with safety standards For more details refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual Find a PDF copy of this manual in the CD ROM enclosed with the product Output signal Pr 190 to Pr 196 settings Positive logic Negative logic SAFE 80 180 ...

Page 97: ... from a personal computer etc When the PU connector is connected with a personal FA or other computer by a communication cable a user program can run to monitor the inverter or read and write parameters Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol computer link operation For the details refer to page 5 620 I002382E_F Fig 2 45 Connecting a parameter unit or the operation pan...

Page 98: ... device 앫 The parameter setting data copied in the USB memory device can be copied to other inverters This function is useful in backing up the parameter setting or for sharing the parameter setting among multiple inverters 앫 The parameter setting file can be copied onto a personal computer from the USB memory device and edited using FR Configurator2 5 742 Trace 앫 The monitored data and output sta...

Page 99: ... setting and monitoring can be performed by FR Configurator2 LED display status Operating status OFF No USB connection ON The communication is established between the inverter and the USB device Flickering rapidly The USB memory device is being accessed Do not remove the USB memory device Flickering slowly Error in the USB connection Tab 2 27 Operating status of the USB host NOTES Do not connect d...

Page 100: ...col For the details refer to page 5 622 Item Specification Conforming standard EIA 485 RS 485 Transmission format Multidrop link Communication speed Maximum 115200 bps Overall length 500 m Connection cable Twisted pair cable 4 pairs Tab 2 29 Specifications of the RS 485 terminal block I002384E Fig 2 47 RS 485 terminal block NOTE Upon delivery the FR A800 E inverter models are not equipped with the...

Page 101: ... page Mounting hole Used for installation to the inverter Terminal block Connected with the encoder 2 77 Encoder type selection switch SW3 Switches the encoder type differential line driver complementary 2 74 CON2 connector Used for extension Terminating resistor selection switch SW1 Switches ON or OFF the internal terminating resistor 2 74 Switch for manufacturer setting SW2 Do not change from th...

Page 102: ...nal Input terminal for the encoder power supply Connect the external power supply 5 V 12 V 15 V 24 V and the encoder power cable When the encoder output is the differential line driver type only 5 V can be input Make the voltage of the external power supply same as the encoder output voltage Check the encoder specification SD Encoder power supply ground terminal PIN Not used PO Tab 2 31 Terminals ...

Page 103: ...ential line driver and set to OFF when complementary ON with internal terminating resistor initial status OFF without internal terminating resistor Fig 2 49 Encoder specification selection switch I002386E Fig 2 50 Terminating resistor selection switch I002387E NOTES Set all switches to the same setting ON OFF Set the switch OFF when sharing an encoder with another unit NC computerized numerical co...

Page 104: ...que motor with encoder SF JRCA Differential ON 5 V SF HRCA Differential ON 5 V Other Vector control dedicated motor SF V5RU Complementary OFF 12 V Other manufacturer s motor with encoder Tab 2 32 Motor used and switch setting NOTE The SW2 switch is for manufacturer setting Do not change the setting Item Encoder for SF JR Encoder for SF V5RU Resolution 1024 pulses rev 2048 pulses rev Power supply v...

Page 105: ...able Approx 140 mm 60 mm F DPEVSB 12P 0 2 mm 11 mm PZ2 PZ1 PB2 PB1 PA2 PA1 PG SD P B N A R C H K PLG A B C D E K F G H J L M S N R P T FR A800 FR A8AP Positioning keyway D MS3106B20 29S As viewed from wiring side 2 mm L D MS3106B20 29S D MS3057 12A A P clip for earthing grounding a shielded cable is provided Model Length L m FR V7CBL5 5 FR V7CBL15 15 FR V7CBL30 30 Earth cable 60 mm Inverter side E...

Page 106: ...ition do not solder it I002397E Fig 2 51 Preparation of the cable NOTES Information on blade terminals Commercially available products as of February 2015 Phoenix Contact Co Ltd NICHIFU Co Ltd When using a blade terminal without insulation sleeve take caution that the twisted wires do not come out Cable stripping size 5 mm Terminal screw size Cable gauge mm Blade terminal model Crimping tool name ...

Page 107: ...o this PZR PG PG 5E SD SD AG2 Tab 2 35 Connection terminal compatibility table I002427E_G Fig 2 52 Standard motor with encoder SF JR 5 V differential line driver MCCB MC R L1 S L2 T L3 U V W U V W E C R PA1 FR A8AP PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG SD SD A N B P H K STF STR PC 10 2 2 3 1 1 5 Three phase AC power supply Forward rotation start Frequency command Frequency setting potentiometer 1 2 W 1kΩ Torq...

Page 108: ...ary PA1 FR A8AP PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG SD SD SF V5RU SF THY U V W U A B C V W E G1 G2 A MCCB MC B PA1 PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG SD SD C D F G S R RH OH PC SD Inverter Earth Ground Differential Compli mentary Terminat ing resis tor ON 12 V DC power supply OFF IM FAN Three phase AC power supply OCR PLG External thermal relay input Thermal protector 2 W 1 kΩ ...

Page 109: ...rotation start Speed limit command Frequency setting potentiometer 1 2 W 1kΩ Torque command 10V Inverter SF JR motor with encoder Earth Ground 5 V DC power supply Differential Compli mentary Terminat ing resis tor ON OFF PLG Contact input common Reverse rotation start IM PA1 FR A8AP PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG SD SD SF V5RU SF THY U V W U A B C V W E G1 G2 A MCCB MC B PA1 PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2 PG PG S...

Page 110: ... Recommended product MOS2C102J 2W1kΩ by KOA Corporation Insert the input line and the resistor to a 2 wire blade terminal and connect the blade terminal to the terminal OH For the recommended 2 wire blade terminals refer to page 2 53 Insulate the lead wire of the resistor for example by applying a contraction tube and shape the wires so that the resistor and its lead wire will not touch other cabl...

Page 111: ...f noise such as the main circuit and power supply voltage When differential line driver is set and a wiring length is 30 m or more The wiring length can be extended to 100 m by increasing the 5 V power supply approximately to 5 5 V while using six or more 0 2 mm gauge cables in parallel or a 1 25 mm or larger gauge cable The voltage applied must be within power supply specifications of encoder Fig...

Page 112: ... connected as shown below In this case the wiring length between FR A8AP and CNC should be as short as possible within 5 m Fig 2 59 Earthing grounding example using a P clip I001448E Fig 2 60 Wiring of the encoder with inverter and CNC I002807E NOTES For the details of the optional encoder dedicated cable FR JCBL FR V7CBL refer to page 2 75 The FR V7CBL is provided with a P clip for earthing groun...

Page 113: ... is clockwise CW viewed from the shaft Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less 100 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz 1 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation encoder is counterclockwise CCW viewed from the shaft Set for the operation at 120 Hz or less 101 Set for the operation at a frequency higher than 120 Hz 369 C140 851 C240 Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 4096 ...

Page 114: ... SF JRCA 4P Rated motor current 1 Motor capacity 4 1 1024 SF HRCA Rated motor current 50 Motor capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024 Others Rated motor current 1 13 Motor capacity Number of motor poles Vectorcontrol dedicated motor SF V5RU 1500 r min series 0 30 Motor capacity 4 1 2048 SF V5RU except for 1500 r min series 0 1 13 Motor capacity 4 1 2048 SF THY 0 30 33 Motor capacity 4 1 2048 Other ...

Page 115: ... Inverter model FR A820 첸 Motor frame number Motor model Inverter model FR A840 첸 1 5 kW 90L SF V5RU1K 00167 2 2K 90L SF V5RUH1K 00083 2 2K 2 2 kW 100L SF V5RU2K 00250 3 7K 100L SF V5RUH2K 00083 2 2K 3 7 kW 112M SF V5RU3K 00340 5 5K 112M SF V5RUH3K 00126 3 7K 5 5 kW 132S SF V5RU5K 00490 7 5K 132S SF V5RUH5K 00250 7 5K 7 5 kW 132M SF V5RU7K 00630 11K 132M SF V5RUH7K 00310 11K 11 kW 160M SF V5RU11K ...

Page 116: ...12M SF V5RU1K3 Y 00167 2 2K 132M SF V5RU1K4 Y 00167 2 2K 2 2 kW 112M SF V5RU2K1 Y 00250 3 7K 132S SF V5RU2K3 Y 00250 3 7K 160M SF V5RU2K4 Y 00250 3 7K 3 7 kW 132S SF V5RU3K1 Y 00340 5 5K 132M SF V5RU3K3 Y 00340 5 5K 160L SF V5RU3K4 00340 5 5K 5 5 kW 132M SF V5RU5K1 Y 00490 7 5K 160M SF V5RU5K3 Y 00490 7 5K 180L SF V5RU5K4 Y 00490 7 5K 7 5 kW 160M SF V5RU7K1 Y 00630 11K 160L SF V5RU7K3 Y 00630 11K ...

Page 117: ... install an external brake resistor At this time remove the jumper from across terminals PR and PX and connect the brake resistor across terminals P and PR For the locations of terminal P and PR refer to the terminal block layout page 2 34 Removing jumpers across terminals PR and PX disables the plug in brake resistor power is not supplied The plug in brake resistor can be left connected to the in...

Page 118: ...ts high power factor converters and power regeneration converters Tab 2 44 Connection of the external brake resistor 2 Terminal P Terminal PR Brake resistor Terminal PX Terminal PR Jumper Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper Connect the brake resistor across terminals P and PR The jumper should remain disconnected Brake resistor Terminal P Terminal PR Jumper Connect the b...

Page 119: ...rotective circuit Power supply voltage High duty brake resistorbrakeresistor Thermal relay type Mitsubishi product Contact rating 200 V FR ABR 0 4K TH N20CXHZ 0 7A 110 V AC 5A 220 V AC 2A AC11 class 110 V DC 0 5A 220 V DC 0 25A DC11 class FR ABR 0 75K TH N20CXHZ 1 3A FR ABR 2 2K TH N20CXHZ 2 1A FR ABR 3 7K TH N20CXHZ 3 6A FR ABR 5 5K TH N20CXHZ 5A FR ABR 7 5K TH N20CXHZ 6 6A FR ABR 11K TH N20CXHZ ...

Page 120: ...3 Inverter Minimum resistance Ω Power consumption kW Inverter Minimum resistance Ω Power consumption kW FR A820 00046 0 4K 100 1 44 FR A840 00023 0 4K 371 1 66 FR A820 00077 0 75K 80 1 81 FR A840 00038 0 75K 236 2 61 FR A820 00105 1 5K 50 2 89 FR A840 00052 1 5K 190 3 24 FR A820 00167 2 2K 33 4 38 FR A840 00083 2 2K 130 4 74 FR A820 00250 3 7K 30 4 81 FR A840 00126 3 7K 83 7 42 FR A820 00340 5 5K ...

Page 121: ...not provided with the PX terminal a jumper needs not to be removed I002406E I002407E Fig 2 62 Protective circuit E CAUTION If the resistor selection is incorrect overcurrent may damage the inverter built in brake transistor Besides the resistor may be burned due to overheat If the selection of the thermal relay is incorrect the resistor may be burned due to overheat R PX PR P P3 S L2 T L3 R L1 MC ...

Page 122: ...vent overheat of the discharging resistor For the connection method of the discharging resistor refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR BU2 I002408E Fig 2 63 Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor Brake unit Discharging resistor Recommended external thermal relay FR BU2 1 5K GZG 300W 50Ω one TH N20CXHZ 1 3A FR BU2 3 7K GRZG 200 10Ω three in series TH N20CXHZ 3 6A FR BU2 7 5K ...

Page 123: ...of FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit FR BU2 and between the brake unit FR BU2 andresistorunit FR BR mustbewithin 5meach Even when thewireistwisted thecable length must be within 10 m The contact between TH1 and TH2 is closed in the normal status and is open at a fault I002409E Fig 2 64 Connection example with the FR BR H...

Page 124: ...the inverter and brake unit FR BU2 and between the brake unit FR BU2 and resistor unit MT BR5 must be within 5 m each Even when the wire is twisted the cable length must be within 10 m The contact between TH1 and TH2 is open in the normal status and is closed at a fault The CN8 connector used with the MT BU5 type brake unit is not used I002410E Fig 2 65 Connection example with the MT BR5 type resi...

Page 125: ... 7 5K or lower and FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit FR BU2 and between the brake unit FR BU and discharging resistor unit FR BR must be within 5 m each Even when the cable is twisted the wiring length must be within 10 m I001640E Fig 2 66 Connection with the brake unit FR BU NOTES If the tran...

Page 126: ...PR and PX I002411E Fig 2 67 Connection with the brake unit BU NOTES The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit BU type and between the brake unit BU type and discharging resistor must be within 2 m each Even when the cable is twisted the wiring length must be within 5 m If the transistors in the brake unit should becomes faulty the resistor will overheat and result in a fire Install a...

Page 127: ...peration mode at the time of an instantaneous power failure Assign the IPF signal to an FR HC2 terminal Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR HC2 Always connect the FR HC2 terminal RDY to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned in the inverter Always connect the FR HC2 terminal SE to the inverter terminal SD Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR HC2 Always connect the ...

Page 128: ...als R L1 S L2 and T L3 and the voltage phases of terminals R4 L14 S4 L24 and T4 L34 must be matched The control logic sink logic source logic of the high power factor converter and the inverter must be matched Refer to page 2 49 Do not connect a DC reactor FR HEL to the inverter when FR HC2 is connected ...

Page 129: ... between N L and N Connecting the opposite polarity of terminals N and P will damage the inverter Use Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the terminals used for the X10 signal Refer to page 5 439 BesuretoconnectthepowersupplyandterminalsR L11 S L21 andT MC1 Operatingtheinverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter Always connect termi...

Page 130: ...T RC NOTES When using the inverter with the MT RC install a magnetic contactor MC at the input side of the inverter so that power is supplied to the inverter after 1 s or more has elapsed after powering ON the MT RC When power is supplied to the inverter prior to the MT RC the inverter and the MT RC may be damaged or the MCCB may trip or be damaged When connecting the power coordination reactor an...

Page 131: ...75 kW or higher motor is used always connect a DC reactor Since theDC reactor FR HEL is electrically connected to the enclosure through mounting screws the DC reactor is earthed grounded by being securely mounted to the enclosure However if the DC reactor is not earthed grounded securely enough an earthing grounding cable may be used When using an earthing grounding cable for FR HEL H 55K or lower...

Page 132: ...ounting screw tightening torque 0 33 Nm to 0 40 Nm Fix the left part of the communication option securely with the option mounting screw and place anotherterminaloftheearthing grounding cableon therightpartoftheoption andfixthecable terminal and the option with the option mounting screw tightening torque 0 33 Nm to 0 40 Nm If the screws are not tightened properly the connector may not be inserted ...

Page 133: ...mmable controller master station to the inverter with an Ethernet cable I003072E Fig 2 74 CC Link IE Field Network System configuration NOTE Refer to the instruction manuals regarding the CC Link IE Field Network master station RJ71EN71 type RJ71GF11 T2 type MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application QJ71GF11 T2 type MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s ...

Page 134: ...cing CC Link IE Field Network devices For star topology slave stations can be replaced without powering off the whole system Network topology Description Star topology Modules are configured into a star using a switching hub and Ethernet cables Slave stations can be easily added in a star topology If an error occurs data link continues among normally operating stations in a star topology Line topo...

Page 135: ...on function Switching hub layer 2 switch a repeater hub is not available Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs do not meet these conditions Industrial switching hub Ethernet cable Connector Type Category 5e or higher Double shielded STP Straight cable RJ 45 The following conditioning cables 앫 IEEE802 3 1000BASE T 앫 ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e Model Manufacturer SC E5EW series Mitsubishi Elect...

Page 136: ...e communication connector until it clicks When removing the Ethernet cable from the communication connector hold down the latch on the Ethernet cable connector and pull out the cable while holding the latch I003073E Fig 2 75 Component names of the CC Link IE Field Network communication circuit board NOTE Do not remove the CC Link IE Field Network communication circuit board or the earth plate Fig ...

Page 137: ...er Check the instructions on page 2 104 before wiring and perform correct wiring Whentheoperationslistedbelowareperformed allstationsonthenetworkmaybereconnected At that time a data link error may momentarily occur in all the stations and the communication error E OP1 may occur in the connected inverters NOTE PORT1 and PORT2 do not need to be distinguished When only one connector is used in star t...

Page 138: ...pology when adding a slave station Line topology ring topology 앫 Simultaneously powering ON OFF multiple stations 앫 Simultaneously connecting disconnecting Ethernet cables to from multiple stations When a data link faulty station returns a data link error will occur in all the stations 앫 Disconnecting ten stations or more or disconnecting half the number of slave stations in the system or more 앫 C...

Page 139: ...upply or reset etc Fig 2 77 CC Link IE Field Network operation status LEDs at inverter I003077E LED name Description ON OFF RUN Operation status Normal operation normal 5 V internal voltage Hardware failure SD Transmission status Data transmitting No data transmitting RD Reception status Data receiving No data receiving D LINK Cyclic communication status Cyclic transmitting No cyclic transmitting ...

Page 140: ...or on the Ethernet board Precautions for Ethernet communication In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems via network take security measures including firewall settings Depending on the network environment the inverter may not operate as intended due to delays or disconnection in communication Carefully consider the conditions and safety for th...

Page 141: ...th 100 m between the hub and the inverter Number of cascade connection stages Up to 2 100BASE TX up to 4 10BASE T Interface RJ 45 Number of interfaces available 1 IP version IPv4 Tab 2 50 Specifications I003105E Fig 2 79 Ethernet connector position Communication speed Cable Connector Standard 100 Mbps Category 5 or higher STP shielded twisted pair straight cable RJ 45 connector 100BASE TX 10 Mbps ...

Page 142: ... is properly installed Do not use an Ethernet cable with a broken latch Doing so may cause the cable to come off or malfunction Do not connect the Ethernet cable to the PU connector The product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications The maximum distance between stations is specified as 100 m However the maximum distance may be shorter depending on the environment For deta...

Page 143: ...e Removetheinverterfront cover Fordetailsonhowto removethefrontcover refertosection2 2 Remove the three mounting screws to remove the Ethernet board earth plate and the Ethernet board I003106E Fig 2 80 Removal of the Ethernet board NOTES For reinstalling the Ethernet board to the inverter remove the plug in option installed to the option connector 2 and install the Ethernet board and its earth pla...

Page 144: ...System configuration for Ethernet communication FR A800 E Installation and wiring 2 114 ...

Page 145: ... relays unnecessarily Suppression technique If the carrier frequency setting is high decrease the Pr 72 PWM frequency selection setting Note that motor noise increases Selecting Pr 240 Soft PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter s own line and other line operation can be performed with ...

Page 146: ...according to the inverter input side power factor which depends on the power supply voltage output frequency and load Especially for a completely electromagneticMCCB aslightlylargecapacitymustbeselectedsinceitsoperationcharacteristic varies with harmonic currents Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker As an earth leakage current breaker use the Mitsubishi earth leakage current breaker d...

Page 147: ... Leakage currents NOTE For star connection the amount of leakage current is approx 1 3 of the above value 1 5 3 7 2 2 7 5 1522 1 1 37 30 55 45 5 5 18 5 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 2 3 5 5 5 8 14 22 30 38 60 80 100 150 Example of leakage current of cable path per 1 km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit 200 V 60 Hz Leakagec...

Page 148: ...out noise filter Leakage current Igi mA 1 with EMC filter For the leakage current of the inverter refer to the following table Leakage current Ig2 mA 33 50 m 1 65 1000 m Motor leakage current Igm mA 0 18 Total leakage current mA 3 00 6 66 Rated sensitivity current mA Ig 10 30 100 Tab 3 2 Estimation of the permanent flowing leakage current Voltage V EMC filter ON mA OFF mA Phase grounding 200 22 1 ...

Page 149: ... 536 class 1 and other applicable standards When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the effective value is within the rating In this case do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase lead ing to temperature rise The following models are standard breakers BV C1 BC V NVB NV L NV G2N ...

Page 150: ... electromagnetic noises which use magnetic contactors electromagnetic brakes many relays for example are installed near the inverter and the inverter may malfunction due to electromagnetic noises the following countermeasures must be taken Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many electromagnetic noises to suppress electromagnetic noises Install data line filters page 3 8 to signal ...

Page 151: ...nduction noises may be propagated to the signal cables to cause malfunction of the devices and the following countermeasures must be taken 앫 Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter 앫 Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I O cables 앫 Do not run the signal cables and power cables inverter I O cables in parallel with eac...

Page 152: ...E Fig 3 6 Noise reduction examples NOTE For compliance with the EU EMC Directive refer to the Installation Guideline 34 1 TDK 39 1 30 1 13 1 Lot number Product name Cable fixing band mount Unit mm Inverter Enclosure Control power supply Sensor M 3 Motor Inverter power supply Do not earth ground shield but connect it to signal common cable Use a twisted pair shielded cable EMC filter Use 4 core cab...

Page 153: ...filterON OFFconnectorsetting I002808E Fig 3 7 Built in EMC filter FILTER OFF ON FILTER OFF ON FILTER OFF ON FILTER OFF ON FILTER FILTER OFF ON FILTER FILTER OFF ON EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON OFF connector FR A820 00046 0 4K 00077 0 75K FR A820 00105 1 5K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower FR A820 00046 0 4K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00023 0 4K to 00126 3 7K FR A820 00340 5 5K to...

Page 154: ...fficult to disconnect the connector use a pair of needle nose pliers etc For FR A820 00077 0 75K or lower Remove the control circuit terminal block Refer to page 7 11 Connect the shorting wire to the corresponding terminal to enable or disable the filter Connect the wire to the terminal in the same way as general wiring of the control circuit terminal block Refer to page 2 52 After switching reins...

Page 155: ... channel power impedance To space distance wiring path Quantitative understanding Theoretical calculation possible Random occurrence quantitative grasping difficult Generated amount Nearly proportional to the load capacity Changes with the current variation ratio Gets larger as switching speed increases Affected equipment immunity Specified by standards per equipment Different depending on maker s...

Page 156: ...pression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage hereinafter referred to as the Specific Consumer Guidelines Specific Consumer Guidelines This guideline sets forth the maximum harmonic currents outgoing from a high voltage or especially high voltage receiving consumer who will install add or renew harmonic generating equipment If any of the maximum values is excee...

Page 157: ...he rated capacity used here is used to calculate the generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply capacity required for actual inverter drive Classification Circuit type Conversion coefficient Ki 3 Three phase bridge Capacitor smoothing Without reactor K31 3 4 With reactor AC side K32 1 8 With reactor DC side K33 1 8 With reactors AC DC sides K34 1 4 5 Self excitation three pha...

Page 158: ...57 72 39 96 30 98 0 49 0 2970 34 7 1931 1218 252 5 228 7 127 7 92 07 77 22 53 46 37 121 60 4 3660 42 8 2379 1501 311 1 281 8 157 4 113 5 95 16 65 88 45 147 73 5 4450 52 1 2893 1825 378 3 342 7 191 4 138 0 115 7 80 10 55 180 89 9 5450 63 7 3543 2235 463 3 419 7 234 4 169 0 141 7 98 10 Tab 3 11 Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents no reactor of inverter driven motors Applica ble motor kW ...

Page 159: ...wer factor converter FR HC2 with the accessories that come as standard Installation of power factor improving capacitor When used with a reactor connected in series the power factor improving correction capacitor can absorb harmonic currents Transformer multi phase operation Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30 as in Δ and Δ Δ combinations to provide an effect corresponding to ...

Page 160: ...r anexcessivepeakcurrentmayflowinthepowerinput circuit damaging the converter circuit To prevent this always install an optional AC reactor FR HAL I002423E Fig 3 11 Installation of a reactor R S T Z Y X U V W R L1 S L2 T L3 5000 5300 4000 3000 2000 1000 110165 247 330 420 550 kVA AC reactor FR HAL Inverter M 3 Capacities requiring installation of AC reactor Inverter capacity Power supply Power sup...

Page 161: ...ficient or brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at power restoration after an inverter stop made by a power failure To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work If using an MC for emergency stop during operation select an MC regarding the i...

Page 162: ...cial power supply operation is not available with vector control dedicated motors SF V5RU SF THY nor with PM motors Handling of the manual contactor on the inverter s output side APMmotorisasynchronousmotorwithhigh performancemagnetsembeddedinside High voltage is generated at the motorterminals while themotor isrunning evenafterthe inverterpower is turned OFF In an application where the PM motor i...

Page 163: ...the wiring length Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side For the FR A840 01800 55K or lower connect the surge voltage suppression filter FR ASF H FR BMF H to the output side For the FR A840 02160 75K or higher connect the sine wave filter MT BSL BSC to the output side Countermeasures With PM motor When the wiring length exceeds 50 m set 9 6 kHz or less in Pr 72 PWM frequency selection ...

Page 164: ...he total wiring length 2 37 Countermeasures are taken against EMI The input output main circuit of the inverter includes high frequency components which may interfere with the communication devices such as AM radios used near the inverter In such case activate the EMC filter turn ON the EMC filter ON OFF connector to minimize interference 3 9 On the inverter s output side none of the power factor ...

Page 165: ... motor the damage may further spread If a failure has occurred between the MC2 and the motor a protection circuit such as using the OH signal input must be provided 5 488 A countermeasure is provided for power restoration after a power failure If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure provide an MC in the inverter s input side and also make up a sequence whi...

Page 166: ...nd do not bundle them 앫 Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables inverter I O cables 앫 Use shielded cables 앫 Install a ferrite core on the signal cable Example ZCAT3035 1330 by TDK 3 6 A countermeasure is provided for an overload operation When performing frequent starts stops by the inverter rise fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due ...

Page 167: ...vates and the inverter trips the fault output signal ALM signal is output ALM signal is assigned to terminal A1B1C1 in the initial setting With this signal check that the inverter operates properly In addition negative logic can be set ON when the inverter is normal OFF when the fault occurs No Interlock method Check method Used signals Refer to page Inverter protective function operation Operatio...

Page 168: ...e considering the inverter s deceleration time Checking the motor operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and inverter output current detection signal Theoutputcurrentdetectionsignal Y12signal isoutputwhentheinverteroperatesandcurrents flow in the motor Check if Y12 signal is being output while inputting a start signal to the inverter STF signal is a forward rotation signal and ...

Page 169: ...election referring to the table below Output signal Pr 190 to Pr 196 setting Positive logic Negative logic ALM 99 199 RY 11 111 RUN 0 100 Y12 12 112 Tab 3 17 Setting in positive and negative logic NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal ...

Page 170: ...al operation check Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector Note that the current is flowing through the motor while the motor coasts to stop even after the inverter s start signal is turned OFF For the logic check confi...

Page 171: ...FR DU08 FR A800 4 1 4 Basic operation 4 1 Operation panel FR DU08 4 1 1 Components of the operation panel FR DU08 To mount the operation panel FR DU08 on the enclosure surface refer to page 2 67 FR DU08 Fig 4 1 Operation panel FR DU08 ...

Page 172: ...command is not given even if the forward reverse command is given 앫 When the frequency command is the starting frequency or lower 앫 When the MRS signal is being input STOP RESET key Stops the operation commands Resets the inverter when the protection function is activated Setting dial The setting dial of the Mitsubishi inverters The setting dial is used to change the frequency and parameter settin...

Page 173: ...Parameter setting mode Display the present setting Example Parameter clear All parameter clear Faults history clear Parameter write is completed Parameter copy Operation for displaying faults history Past eight faults can be displayed The latest fault is ended by When no fault history exists is displayed Parameter setting mode at power ON Group parameter setting Function Function mode Trace functi...

Page 174: ...ear Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values Calibration parameters and the offline auto tuning parameters are also cleared The communication parameters are not cleared For the details of the uncleared parameters refer to page A 5 5 738 Faults history clear Deletes the faults history 6 3 Parameter copy Copies the parameter settings saved in the inverter to the operation panel The...

Page 175: ...llowingcorrespondencesbetweentheactualalphanumericcharactersandthedigital characters displayed on the operation panel I002430E Fig 4 3 Correspondences between digital and actual characters operation panel 0 E e R 1 F f r 2 G g S s 3 H h T t 4 I i U 5 J j u 6 K k V 7 L l v 8 M m W 9 N w A n X x B b O Y y C o Z z c P p D d Q q ...

Page 176: ...tting and flicker alternately 앫 Turn to read another parameter 앫 Press to show the setting again 앫 Press twice to show the next parameter 앫 Press three times to return to the monitor display of the frequency Tab 4 3 Setting the maximum output frequency NOTES If a parameter write condition is not satisfied a parameter write error appears Refer to page 6 10 When Pr 77 Parameter write selection 0 ini...

Page 177: ... A indicator turns ON Press to monitor the output voltage V indicator turns ON Tab 4 4 Monitoring of output current and output voltage NOTE Other monitored items such as output voltage and set frequency are also available Use Pr 52 Operation panel main monitor selection or Pr 774 to Pr 776 Operation panel monitor selection 1 to 3 to change the setting Refer to page 5 344 Example Changing example S...

Page 178: ...n mode or in the External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 Operation mode selection 3 select the monitor mode and then press the setting dial The present set frequency is displayed NOTE Use Pr 992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection to change the displayed indica tion Refer to page 5 344 ...

Page 179: ...al PU combined operation mode 1 appears For other settings refer to the table below Press to enter the setting External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 is set Tab 4 6 One can immediately change parameter 79 by simultaneously pressing the PU EXT and MODE keys Operation panel indication Operation method Operation mode Start command Frequency command PU operation mode External STF STR Analog vol...

Page 180: ...ressed before pressing the SET key the easy setting mode is terminated and the display goes back to the monitor display If the easy setting mode is terminated while Pr 79 0 initial value the operation mode switches between the PU operation mode and the External operation mode Check the operation mode Reset by STOP RESET key is enabled The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr 79 3 are Multi...

Page 181: ...tting Description 9999 Displays only the simple mode parameters 0 initial value Displays simple mode extended parameters 1 Displays parameters registered in the user group Tab 4 8 Setting of parameter 160 Pr Pr group Name Unit Initialvalue Range Application Refer to page FM CA 0 G000 Torque boost 0 1 6 0 30 Set this parameter to obtain a higher starting torque under V F control Also set this when ...

Page 182: ...8 F011 Deceleration time 0 1 s 5 s 0 3600 s Sets the deceleration time 15 s 9 H000 C103 Electronic thermal O L relay 0 01 A Rated inverter current 0 500 A Protects the motor from heat Set the rated motor current 5 303 0 1 A 0 3600 A 79 D000 Operation mode selection 1 0 0 4 6 7 Select the start and frequency command sources 5 271 125 T022 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 0 01 Hz 60Hz 50H...

Page 183: ...ode of the operation panel Refer to section 4 5 1 page 4 13 The setting dial used as the potentiometer Refer to section 4 5 2 page 4 15 The ON OFF switches connected to terminals Refer to section 4 5 3 page 4 16 Voltage input signals Refer to section 4 5 4 page 4 18 Current input signals Refer to section 4 5 5 page 4 20 NOTE Use the operation panel FR DU08 to give a start command and a frequency c...

Page 184: ...eration constant speed Press or to start running The frequency value indicated on the display increases for the time set in Pr 7 Acceleration time and is fixed at 30 00 Hz To change the set frequency perform the operation in above step 3 The last setting appears at first Deceleration stop Press to stop running The frequency value indicated on the display decreases for the time set in Pr 8 Decelera...

Page 185: ...ng the frequency Turn until appears The set frequency flickers The frequency flickers for about 5 s needs not to be pressed Tab 4 11 Use the digital dial like a potentiometer to perform operation NOTES If the display changes from flickering 60 00 to 0 00 Pr 161 Frequency setting key lock opera tion selection may be set to a value other than 1 Simply turning the setting dial will enable frequency s...

Page 186: ...peration mode Set 4 in Pr 79 PU and EXT indicators turn ON For changing the setting value refer to page 4 9 Setting the frequency Turn ON the low speed switch RL Start acceleration constant speed Press or to start running The frequency value indicated on the display increases for the time set in Pr 7 Acceleration time and is fixed at 10 00 Hz Deceleration stop Press to stop The frequency value ind...

Page 187: ...r 4 Pr 5 and Pr 6 In the initial setting when two or more of multi speed settings are simultaneously selected prior ity is given to the set frequency of the lower signal For example when RH and RM signals turn ON RM signal Pr 5 has a higher priority Up to 15 speed operation can be performed Parameters referred to Pr 4 to Pr 6 multi speed setting page 5 299 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 241 Pr 8 De...

Page 188: ...ay turns ON Changing the operation mode Set 4 in Pr 79 PU and EXT indicators turn ON For changing the setting value refer to page 4 6 Start Press or FWD or REV indicator flickers as no frequency command is given Acceleration constant speed Turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full The frequency value indicated on the display increases for the time set in Pr 7 Acceleration t...

Page 189: ...change the frequency 0 Hz at the minimum voltage input initial value 0 V adjust the calibra tion parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency Parameters referred to Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 241 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 241 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 271 Pr 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency page 5 418 C2 Pr 902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequen...

Page 190: ...e operation mode Set 4 in Pr 79 PU and EXT indicators turn ON For changing the setting value refer to page 4 6 Terminal 4 input selection Turn ON the terminal 4 input selection signal AU Input to the terminal 4 is enabled Start Press or FWD or REV indicator flickers as no frequency command is given Acceleration constant speed Input 20 mA The frequency value indicated on the display increases for t...

Page 191: ...in frequency To change the frequency 0 Hz at the minimum current input initial value 4 mA adjust the cali bration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency Parameters referred to Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 241 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 241 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 271 Pr 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency page 5 418 Pr 184 AU terminal function select...

Page 192: ...fer to section 4 6 1 page 4 22 Switches multi speed setting Refer to section 4 6 2 page 4 24 Voltage input signals Refer to section 4 6 3 page 4 26 Current input signals Refer to section 4 6 5 page 4 28 NOTES Turn ON the STF STR signal to give a start command Use the operation panel FR DU08 setting dial to give a frequency command Set Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation mode 1 I002445E_G Fig 4 ...

Page 193: ...t Deceleration stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR The frequency value indicated on the display decreases for the time set in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating at 0 00 Hz Tab 4 15 Operate the inverter by using external signals NOTES When both the forward rotation switch STF and the reverse rotation switch STR are turned ON the motor cannot be started If both are turned ON w...

Page 194: ...t switch STF or STR The frequency value indicated on the display decreases for the time set in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating at 0 00 Hz FWD or REV indicator turns OFF Turn OFF the high speed switch RH Tab 4 16 Operate the inverter by using external signals NOTES When both the forward rotation switch STF and the reverse rotation switch STR are turned ON the motor cannot be sta...

Page 195: ...ic operation Basic operation procedure External operation FR A800 4 25 Parameters referred to Pr 4 to Pr 6 multi speed setting page 5 299 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 241 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 241 ...

Page 196: ...ing the forward rotation and REV indicator turns ON during the reverse rotation Deceleration Turn the frequency setting potentiometer counterclockwise slowly to full The frequency value indicated on the display decreases for the time set in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating at 0 00 Hz FWD or REV indicator flickers Stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR FWD or REV indicator tur...

Page 197: ...to the monitor frequency monitor Start Turn ON the start switch STF or STR then turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full Refer to steps and in section 4 6 3 The motor is operated at 50 Hz Tab 4 18 Change the frequency of the maximum analog value NOTES To set the frequency at 0 V use the calibration parameter C2 Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting voltage gai...

Page 198: ...eleration time and is fixed at 60 00 Hz FWD indicator turns ON during the forward rotation and REV indicator turns ON during the reverse rotation Deceleration Input 4 mA or less The frequency value indicated on the display decreases for the time set in Pr 8 Deceleration time and the motor stops rotating at 0 00 Hz FWD or REV indicator flickers Stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR FWD or REV i...

Page 199: ...o the monitor frequency monitor Start Turn ON the start switch STF or STR then turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full Refer to steps and in section 4 6 5 The motor is operated at 50 Hz Tab 4 20 Change the frequency of the maximum analog value NOTES To set the frequency at 4 mA use the calibration parameter C5 Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting current gai...

Page 200: ... display increases for the time set in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and is fixed at 5 00 Hz FWD indicator turns ON during the forward rotation and REV indicator turns ON during the reverse rotation Deceleration stop Turn OFF the start switch STF or STR The frequency value indicated on the display decreases for the time set in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and the motor stops...

Page 201: ...ing or The frequency value indicated on the display increases for the time set in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time andis fixed at 5 00 Hz Deceleration stop Release or The frequency value indicated on the display decreases for the time set in Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time and the motor stops rotating at 0 00 Hz Tab 4 22 JOG operation performed on the operation panel NOTES To chan...

Page 202: ...Basic operation procedure JOG operation Basic operation 4 32 ...

Page 203: ...n motor PM motor PM sensorless vector control PM motor Inverter model Common designation FR A8첸0 Standard model FR A8첸2 Separated converter type FR A8첸6 IP55 compatible model FR A8첸첸 GF Model with built in CC Link IE Field Network communication function see note FR A8첸첸 E Model with built in Ethernet board FR A8ETH Tab 5 1 Designation of the inverter model NOTES The model with the symbol GF is not...

Page 204: ...ximum frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0 01 Hz 120 Hz 5 321 60 Hz 2 H401 Minimum frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 Hz 5 321 3 G001 Base frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 690 4 D301 Multi speed setting high speed 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 197 5 D302 Multi speed setting middle speed 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 30 Hz 5 197 6 D303 Multi speed setting low speed 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 10 Hz 5 197 7 F010 Accel...

Page 205: ...g 4 speed to 7 speed 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 197 28 D300 Multi speed input compensation selection 0 1 1 0 5 299 29 F100 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection 0 to 6 1 0 5 248 30 E300 Regenerative function selection 0 to 2 10 11 20 21 100 to102 110 111 120 121 1 0 5 713 2 10 11 102 110 111 0 2 10 20 100 102 110 120 0 Frequency junp 31 H420 Frequency jump 1A 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 99...

Page 206: ...rter rated current 5 358 0 to 3600 A 0 1 A Automatic restart 57 A702 Restart coasting time 0 0 1 to 30 s 9999 0 1 s 9999 5 581 5 590 58 A703 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0 1 s 1 s 5 581 59 F101 Remote function selection 0 to 3 11 to 13 1 0 5 255 60 G030 Energy saving control selection 0 4 9 1 0 5 697 Automatic acceleration deceleration 61 F510 Reference current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 9999 5 263 ...

Page 207: ...03 114 to 117 E100 Reset selection 0 1 0 E101 Disconnected PU detection E102 PU stop selection 1 E107 Reset limit 0 1 0 0 1 76 M510 Fault code output selection 0 to 2 1 0 5 402 77 E400 Parameter write selection 0 to 2 1 0 5 211 78 D020 Reverse rotation prevention selection 0 to 2 1 0 5 291 79 D000 Operation mode selection 0 to 4 6 7 1 0 5 271 5 280 Function Pr Pr group Name Setting range Minimum s...

Page 208: ...to tuning setting status 0 1 11 101 1 0 5 72 5 471 Adjustable 5 points V F 100 G040 V F1 first frequency 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 698 101 G041 V F1 first frequency voltage 0 to 1000 V 0 1 V 0 V 5 698 102 G042 V F2 second frequency 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 698 103 G043 V F2 second frequency voltage 0 to 1000 V 0 1 V 0 V 5 698 104 G044 V F3 third frequency 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999...

Page 209: ...me 0 1 to 3600 s 9999 0 1 s 1 s 5 543 5 571 131 A601 PID upper limit 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 543 5 571 132 A602 PID lower limit 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 543 5 571 133 A611 PID action set point 0 to 100 9999 0 01 9999 5 543 5 571 134 A615 PID differential time 0 01 to 10 s 9999 0 01 s 9999 5 543 5 571 Bypass 135 A000 Electronic bypass sequence selection 0 1 1 0 5 488 136 A001 MC switchover interlo...

Page 210: ...p read selection 0 1 9999 1 0 5 224 161 E200 Frequency setting key lock operation selection 0 1 10 11 1 0 5 206 Automatic restart functions 162 A700 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection 0 to 3 10 to 13 1 0 5 581 5 590 163 A704 First cushion time for restart 0 to 20 s 0 1 s 0 s 5 581 164 A705 First cushion voltage for restart 0 to 100 0 1 0 5 581 165 A710 Stall prevention o...

Page 211: ... to 57 60 61 63 64 67 68 70 79 80 84 85 90 to 99 100 to 108 110 to 116 120 122 125 to 128 130 to 136 138to157 160 161 163 164 167 168 170 179 180 184 185 190to 199 200 to 208 242 BM 300 to 308 342 BM 9999 1 0 5 378 191 M401 SU terminal function selection 1 1 5 378 192 M402 IPF terminal function selection 1 2 0 5 378 9999 193 M403 OL terminal function selection 1 3 5 378 194 M404 FU terminal functi...

Page 212: ...n selection 0 9999 1 9999 5 729 248 A006 Self power management selection 0 to 2 1 0 5 497 249 H101 Earth ground fault detection at start 0 1 1 0 5 447 250 G106 Stop selection 0to100s 1000to1100s 8888 9999 0 1 s 9999 5 447 251 H200 Output phase loss protection selection 0 1 1 1 5 317 Frequency compensation function 252 T050 Override bias 0 to 200 0 1 50 5 412 253 T051 Override gain 0 to 200 0 1 150...

Page 213: ...13 Load torque high speed frequency control 271 A201 High speed setting maximum current 0 to 400 0 1 50 5 513 272 A202 Middle speed setting minimum current 0 to 400 0 1 100 5 513 273 A203 Current averaging range 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 513 274 A204 Current averaging filter time constant 1 to 4000 1 16 5 513 Stop on contact control 275 A205 Stop on contact excitation current low speed multi...

Page 214: ...99 5 378 314 BL BM M411 DO1 output selection 1 9999 5 378 315 BL BM M412 DO2 output selection 1 9999 5 378 RS 485 communication 331 N030 RS 485 communication station number 0 to 31 0 to 247 1 0 5 635 332 N031 RS 485 communication speed 3 6 12 24 48 96 192 384 576 768 1152 1 96 5 635 333 RS 485 communication stop bit length data length 0 1 10 11 1 1 5 635 N032 PU communication data length 0 1 1 0 N...

Page 215: ...d detection level 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 339 376 C148 Encoder signal loss detection enable disable selection 0 1 1 0 5 486 S pattern acceleration deceleration C 380 F300 Acceleration S pattern 1 0 to 50 1 0 5 248 381 F301 Deceleration S pattern 1 0 to 50 1 0 5 248 382 F302 Acceleration S pattern 2 0 to 50 1 0 5 248 383 F303 Deceleration S pattern 2 0 to 50 1 0 5 248 Pulse train input 384 ...

Page 216: ...mand filter 0 to 5 s 0 001 s 0 s 5 189 426 B007 In position width 0 to 32767 pulse 1 pulse 100 pulse 5 187 427 B008 Excessive level error 0 to 400 x 10 9999 1 x 10 pulse 40 x 10 pulse 5 187 428 B009 Command pulse selection 0 to 5 1 0 5 177 429 B010 Clear signal selection 0 1 1 1 5 177 430 B011 Pulse monitor selection 0 to 5 12 13 100 to 105 112 113 1000 to 1005 1012 1013 1100 to 1105 1112 1113 888...

Page 217: ...otor constant R2 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 9999 5 457 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 460 C222 Second motor constant L1 d axis inductance Ld 0 to 6000 mH 9999 0 1 mH 9999 5 457 5 471 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 461 C223 Second motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 0 to 6000 mH 9999 0 1 mH 9999 5 457 5 471 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 462 C224 Second motor constant X 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 457 0 01 463 C210 Seco...

Page 218: ... 9999 1 0 5 160 484 B040 Tenth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 160 485 B041 Eleventh target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 160 486 B042 Eleventh target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 160 487 B043 Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 160 488 B044 Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 5 160 489 B045 Thirteenth target position lower 4 ...

Page 219: ...on 549 N000 Protocol selection 0 1 1 0 5 626 550 D012 NET mode operation command source selection 0 1 5 BM 9999 1 9999 5 282 551 D013 PU mode operation command source selection 1 to 3 5 BM 9999 1 9999 5 282 552 H429 Frequency jump range 0 to 30 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 323 PID control 553 A603 PID deviation limit 0 0 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 543 554 A604 PID signal operation selection 0 to 3 10 to 13 ...

Page 220: ...reduction ratio 1 1 to 100 1 100 5 303 602 H003 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 303 603 H004 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 1 to 100 1 100 5 303 604 H005 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 303 606 T722 Power failure stop external signal input selection 0 1 1 1 5 599 607 H006 Motor permissible load level 110 to 250...

Page 221: ...g cutoff frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0 01 Hz 20 Hz 5 737 Analog remote output function 655 M530 Analog remote output selection 0 1 10 11 1 0 5 399 656 M531 Analog remote output 1 800 to 1200 0 1 1000 5 399 657 M532 Analog remote output 2 800 to 1200 0 1 1000 5 399 658 M533 Analog remote output 3 800 to 1200 0 1 1000 5 399 659 M534 Analog remote output 4 800 to 1200 0 1 1000 5 399 Increased magnetic exci...

Page 222: ...ce timer 3 0 1 to 9998 1 0 5 235 689 E715 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 0 to 9998 9999 1 9999 5 235 690 H881 Deceleration check time 0 to 3600 s 9999 0 1 s 1 s 5 124 Electronic thermal O L relay 692 H011 Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 0 to 590 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 303 693 H012 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 1 to 100 1 100 5 303 694 H013 Second free thermal reducti...

Page 223: ... 471 742 C285 Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width 0 to 6000 μs 10000 to 16000 μs 9999 1 μs 9999 5 471 743 C206 Second motor maximum frequency 0 to 400 Hz 9999 0 01 Hz 9999 5 471 744 C207 Second motor inertia integer 10 to 999 9999 1 9999 5 471 745 C208 Second motor inertia exponent 0 to 7 9999 1 9999 5 471 746 C233 Second motor protection current level 100 to 500 9999 0 1 9999 5 471 7...

Page 224: ... s 9999 5 241 792 F071 Deceleration time in low speed range 0 to 3600 s 9999 0 1 s 9999 5 241 799 M520 Pulse increment setting for output power 0 1 1 10 100 1000 kWh 0 1 kWh 1 kWh 5 403 800 G200 Control method selection 0 to 6 9 to 14 20 100 to 106 109 to 114 1 20 5 61 802 G102 Pre excitation selection 0 1 1 0 5 701 Torque command 803 G210 Constant output range torque characteristic selection 0 1 ...

Page 225: ...ting filter 1 0 to 5 s 9999 0 001 s 9999 5 416 827 G216 Torque detection filter 1 0 to 0 1 s 0 001 s 0 s 5 194 828 G224 Model speed control gain 0 to 1000 1 60 5 115 5 189 830 G311 Speed control P gain 2 0 to 1000 9999 1 9999 5 103 831 G312 Speed control integral time 2 0 to 20 s 9999 0 001 s 9999 5 103 832 T005 Speed setting filter 2 0 to 5 s 9999 0 001 s 9999 5 416 833 G315 Speed detection filte...

Page 226: ...G217 Excitation ratio 0 to 100 1 100 5 195 855 C248 Control terminal option Signal loss detection enable disable selection 0 1 1 0 5 486 858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 1 4 9999 1 0 5 90 5 325 5 411 859 C126 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 9999 5 72 5 471 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A 860 C226 Second motor torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A...

Page 227: ...idance voltage gain 0 to 200 0 1 100 5 723 Free parameters 888 E420 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 5 219 889 E421 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 5 219 Energy saving monitor 891 M023 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 0 to 4 9999 1 9999 5 344 5 371 892 M200 Load factor 30 to 150 0 1 100 5 371 893 M201 Energy saving monitor reference motor capacity 0 1 to 55 kW 0 01 kW Inverter rated...

Page 228: ...nal 1 bias speed 0 to 300 0 1 0 5 418 C14 918 T102 Terminal 1 gain frequency speed 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 418 C15 918 T103 Terminal 1 gain speed 0 to 300 0 1 100 5 418 C16 919 T110 Terminal 1 bias command torque 0 to 400 0 1 0 5 426 C17 919 T111 Terminal 1 bias torque 0 to 300 0 1 0 5 426 C18 920 T112 Terminal 1 gain command torque 0 to 400 0 1 150 5 426 C19 920 T113 Terminal 1 gain tor...

Page 229: ...control 994 G403 Droop break point gain 0 1 to 100 9999 0 1 9999 5 733 995 G404 Droop break point torque 0 1 to 100 0 1 100 5 733 997 H103 Fault initiation 0 to 255 9999 1 9999 5 76 998 E430 PM parameter initialization 0 3003 3103 8009 8109 9009 9109 1 0 5 75 999 E431 Automatic parameter setting 1 2 10 11 12 13 20 21 9999 1 9999 5 219 1002 C150 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient 50 to...

Page 230: ... 610 1033 A916 Analog source selection 7ch 207 5 610 1034 A917 Analog source selection 8ch 208 5 610 1035 A918 Analog trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 5 610 1036 A919 Analog trigger operation selection 0 1 1 0 5 610 1037 A920 Analog trigger level 600 to 1400 1 1000 5 610 1038 A930 Digital source selection 1ch 1 to 255 1 1 5 610 1039 A931 Digital source selection 2ch 2 5 610 1040 A932 Digital source sele...

Page 231: ...or filter 0 to 5 s 9999 0 01 s 9999 5 344 1113 H414 Speed limit method selection 0 to 2 10 9999 1 0 5 142 1114 D403 Torque command reverse selection 0 1 1 1 5 138 1115 G218 Speed control integral term clear time 0 to 9998 ms 1 ms 0 s 5 103 1116 G206 Constant output range speed control P gain compensation 0 to 100 0 1 0 5 103 1117 G261 Speed control P gain 1 per unit system 0 to 300 9999 0 01 9999 ...

Page 232: ... 1199 A810to A859 PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 0 to 65535 1 0 5 606 1220 B100 Target position speed selection 0 to 2 1 0 A 45 Simple position control 1221 B101 Start command edge detection selection 0 1 1 0 5 160 1222 B120 First positioning acceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 160 1223 B121 First positioning deceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 160 1224 B122 First positioni...

Page 233: ...g dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 5 160 1249 B147 Seventh positioning sub function 0 1 2 10 11 12 100 101 102 110 111 112 1 10 5 160 1250 B148 Eighth positioning acceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 160 1251 B149 Eighth positioning deceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 160 1252 B150 Eighth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 5 160 1253 B151 Eighth positioning sub funct...

Page 234: ...160 1276 B174 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 5 160 1277 B175 Fourteenth positioning sub function 0 1 2 10 11 12 100 101 102 110 111 112 1 10 5 160 1278 B176 Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 160 1279 B177 Fifteenth positioning deceleration time 0 01 to 360 s 0 01 s 5 s 5 160 1280 B178 Fifteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ...

Page 235: ...1 5 675 1426 BM N641 Link speed and duplex mode selection 0 to 4 1 0 5 675 1427 BM N630 Ethernet function selection 1 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 45237 61450 1 5001 5 675 1428 BM N631 Ethernet function selection 2 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 45237 61450 1 45237 5 675 1429 BM N632 Ethernet function selection 3 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 4...

Page 236: ...ad characteristics load reference 2 0 to 400 9999 0 1 9999 5 333 1483 H523 Load characteristics load reference 3 0 to 400 9999 0 1 9999 5 333 1484 H524 Load characteristics load reference 4 0 to 400 9999 0 1 9999 5 333 1485 H525 Load characteristics load reference 5 0 to 400 9999 0 1 9999 5 333 1486 H526 Load characteristics maximum frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 333 1487 H527 Load ch...

Page 237: ...r higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher The value for the 200 V class The value for the 400 V class Setting can be made only when a vector control compatible option is installed The setting is available only when the FR A8AP is installed The setting is available only when the FR A8AP or the FR A8APR is installed The setting is available only when the FR A8TP is installed The setting is available only...

Page 238: ... group Tab 5 3 Changing to the grouped parameter numbers Operation Turning ON the power of the inverter The monitor display turns ON Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn until parameter display method appears Press initial value appears Changing to the group parameter display Turn to chang...

Page 239: ...er number read previously appears Parameter group selection Press several times until appears Parameter groups can now be selected Parameter group selection Turn until protective function parameter 4 appears Press to display and make the group parameters of the protective function parameter 4 selectable Parameter selection Turn until P H400 Maximum frequency appears Press to read the present set v...

Page 240: ... E411 297 Password lock unlock 5 215 E420 888 Free parameter 1 5 219 E421 889 Free parameter 2 5 219 E430 998 PM parameter initialization 5 75 E431 999 Automatic parameter setting 5 219 E440 160 User group read selection 5 224 E441 172 User group registered display batch clear 5 224 E442 173 User group registration 5 224 E443 174 User group clear 5 224 E490 989 Parameter copy alarm release 5 740 E...

Page 241: ...ng frequency 5 259 5 261 F103 571 Holding time at a start 5 259 F200 140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 5 248 F201 141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 5 248 F202 142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 5 248 F203 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 5 248 F300 380 Acceleration S pattern 1 5 248 F301 381 Deceleration S pattern 1 5 248 F302 382 Acceleration S pattern 2 5 248 F3...

Page 242: ...le Simple Simple Pr group Pr Name Refer to page H000 9 Electronic thermal O L relay 5 303 5 72 5 471 H001 600 First free thermal reduction frequency 1 5 303 H002 601 First free thermal reduction ratio 1 5 303 H003 602 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 5 303 H004 603 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 5 303 H005 604 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 5 303 H006 607 Motor permissible ...

Page 243: ...r limit fault detection width 5 333 H534 1491 Lower limit fault detection width 5 333 H535 1492 Load status detection signal delay time load reference measurement waiting time 5 333 H600 48 Second stall prevention operation level 5 325 H601 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 5 325 H602 114 Third stall prevention operation level 5 325 H603 115 Third stall prevention operation frequency ...

Page 244: ...1 M207 899 Operation time rate estimated value 5 371 M300 54 FM CA terminal function selection 5 358 M301 158 AM terminal function selection 5 358 Tab 5 10 Monitor display and monitor output signal 1 M310 C0 900 FM CA terminal calibration 5 365 M320 C1 901 AM terminal calibration 5 365 M321 867 AM output filter 5 365 M330 C8 930 Current output bias signal 5 365 M331 C9 930 Current output bias curr...

Page 245: ...002 74 Input filter time constant 5 416 T003 822 Speed setting filter 1 5 416 T004 826 Torque setting filter 1 5 416 T005 832 Speed setting filter 2 5 416 T006 836 Torque setting filter 2 5 416 T007 849 Analog input offset adjustment 5 416 T010 868 Terminal 1 function assignment 5 90 5 325 5 411 T021 242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount terminal 2 5 412 T022 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting ga...

Page 246: ...T721 599 X10 terminal input selection 5 713 T722 606 Power failure stop external signal input selection 5 599 T730 155 RT signal function validity condition selection 5 445 T740 699 Input terminal filter 5 439 Pr group Pr Name Referto page Tab 5 11 Multi function input terminal parameters 2 Pr group Pr Name Referto page C000 684 Tuning data unit switchover 5 72 5 471 C100 71 Applied motor 5 451 5 ...

Page 247: ... 471 C221 459 Second motor constant R2 5 457 C222 460 Second motor constant L1 d axis inductance Ld 5 457 5 471 C223 461 Second motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 5 457 5 471 C224 462 Second motor constant X 5 457 C225 455 Second motor excitation current 5 457 C226 860 Second motor torque current Rated PM motor current 5 457 5 471 C230 738 Second motor induced voltage constant phi f 5 471 C231...

Page 248: ...271 High speed setting maximum current 5 513 A202 272 Middle speed setting minimum current 5 513 Tab 5 13 Application parameters 1 A203 273 Current averaging range 5 513 A204 274 Current averaging filter time constant 5 513 A205 275 Stop on contact excitation current low speed multiplying factor 5 509 A206 276 PWM carrier frequency at stop on contact 5 509 A300 592 Traverse function selection 5 51...

Page 249: ...atic switchover frequency 5 543 A653 756 Second PID proportional band 5 543 A654 757 Second PID integral time 5 543 A655 758 Second PID differential time 5 543 A656 765 Second pre charge fault selection 5 566 A657 766 Second pre charge ending level 5 566 A658 767 Second pre charge ending time 5 566 A659 768 Second pre charge upper detection level 5 566 A660 769 Second pre charge time limit 5 566 A...

Page 250: ...selection 2ch 5 610 A912 1029 Analog source selection 3ch 5 610 A913 1030 Analog source selection 4ch 5 610 A914 1031 Analog source selection 5ch 5 610 A915 1032 Analog source selection 6ch 5 610 A916 1033 Analog source selection 7ch 5 610 A917 1034 Analog source selection 8ch 5 610 A918 1035 Analog trigger channel 5 610 A919 1036 Analog trigger operation selection 5 610 A920 1037 Analog trigger l...

Page 251: ... position lower 4 digits 5 160 B042 486 Eleventh target position upper 4 digits 5 160 Tab 5 14 Position control parameters 1 B043 487 Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 5 160 B044 488 Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 5 160 B045 489 Thirteenth target position lower 4 digits 5 160 B046 490 Thirteenth target position upper 4 digits 5 160 B047 491 Fourteenth target position lower 4 digits 5 ...

Page 252: ...ction 5 160 B172 1274 Fourteenth positioning acceleration time 5 160 B173 1275 Fourteenth positioning deceleration time 5 160 B174 1276 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 5 160 B175 1277 Fourteenth positioning sub function 5 160 B176 1278 Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 5 160 B177 1279 Fifteenth positioning deceleration time 5 160 B178 1280 Fifteenth positioning dwell time 5 160 B179 1281 F...

Page 253: ...N111 435 Station number CC Link IE 5 673 Tab 5 15 Operation via communication and its settings 1 N500 to N543 N550 to N559 1300 to 1343 1350 to 1359 Communication option parameters For details refer to the Instruction Manual of the option N600 1434 Ethernet IP address 1 5 675 N601 1435 Ethernet IP address 2 5 675 N602 1436 Ethernet IP address 3 5 675 N603 1437 Ethernet IP address 4 5 675 N610 1438...

Page 254: ...oidance voltage gain 5 723 G125 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 5 723 G130 660 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selection 5 727 Tab 5 16 Control Parameter 1 Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple G131 661 Magnetic excitation increase rate 5 727 G132 662 Increased magnetic excitation current level 5 727 G200 800 Control method selection 5 61 G201 85 Excitation curre...

Page 255: ...xcitation current break point 5 692 G302 566 Second motor excitation current low speed scaling factor 5 692 G311 830 Speed control P gain 2 5 103 G312 831 Speed control integral time 2 5 103 G313 834 Torque control P gain 2 5 150 G314 835 Torque control integral time 2 5 150 G315 833 Speed detection filter 2 5 194 G316 837 Torque detection filter 2 5 194 G350 747 Second motor low speed range torqu...

Page 256: ...lowing conditions If the conditions are not satisfied select V F control Otherwise malfunctions such as insufficient torque uneven rotation may occur For the motor capacity the rated current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated cur rent It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples etc an...

Page 257: ...s If the conditions are not satisfied select V F control Otherwise malfunctions such as insufficient torque uneven rotation may occur For the motor capacity the rated current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated cur rent It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples etc and degrade the sp...

Page 258: ...or the motor capacity the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples etc and degrade the speed and torque accuracies As a reference select the motor with the rated motor current that is about 40 or higher of the inverter ...

Page 259: ...he following conditions The motor described in the table below is used For the motor capacity the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current It must be 0 4 kW or higher Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples etc and degrade the speed and torque accuracies As a reference select the motor ...

Page 260: ...t iq torque current for causing the motor to develop torque In vector control the voltage and output frequency are calculated tocontrol the motor so that the ex citation current and torque current flow to the optimum as described below Theexcitationcurrentiscontrolledtoplacetheinternalmagneticfluxofthemotorintheoptimum status The torque command value is derived so that the difference between the m...

Page 261: ...d as difficult to use Applications requiring a wide variable speed range from extremely low speed to high speed frequent acceleration deceleration operations continuous four quadrant operations etc Allows torque control when induction motors are used Allows servo lock torque control which generates a torque in the motor shaft while stopped Not available under Real sensorless vector control I002502...

Page 262: ...lated to use that motor magnetic flux Ф2 as a predetermined magnetic flux Excitation current control A voltage Vd is calculated to flow a current id which is identical to the excitation current command id Output frequency calculation Motor slip ωs is calculated on the basis of the torque current value iq and magnetic flux Ф2 The outputfrequency ω0 isfoundbyaddingthatslip ωs tothefeedback ωFB found...

Page 263: ... be switched using the mode switching signal MC Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 71 C100 Applied motor 0 0 to 6 13 to 16 20 23 24 30 33 34 40 43 44 50 53 54 70 73 74 330 333 334 8090 8093 8094 9090 9093 9094 By selecting a standard motor or constant torque motor the thermal characteristic and motor constant of each motor are set 80 C101 Motor capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Set the appli...

Page 264: ...poles must be set to select Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control or vector control Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles 451 G300 Second motor control method selection 9999 0 to 6 Vector control 10 to 12 Real sensorless vector control 13 14 PM sensorless vector control 20 V F control Advanc...

Page 265: ... 6 106 Torque control variable currentlimiter control 9 109 Vector control test operation 10 110 Real sensorless vector control Speed control 11 111 Torque control 12 112 Speed control torque control switchover MC signal ON torque control MC signal OFF speed control 20 initial value 20 Advanced magnetic flux vector control Speed control 9999 initial value Advanced magnetic flux vector control for ...

Page 266: ...ntrol is enabled even if Pr 80 9999 or Pr 81 9999 SettingPr 788 Pr 747 0 low speedrangetorquecharacteristicdisabled selectsspeedcontrol Selecting the fast response operation Pr 800 Pr 451 100 to 106 109 to 114 Setting Pr 800 100 to 106 or 109 to 114 selects the fast response operation The fast response op eration is available during vector control Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless v...

Page 267: ...ion panel or by outputting it as analog signals to the terminal FM AM or CA NOTES Since current is not detected and voltage is not output monitors related to current and voltage such as output current and output voltage etc and output signals do not function For speed calculation speed is calculated in consideration of Pr 880 Load inertia ratio Since current synchronization operation occurs during...

Page 268: ...Second brake sequence open completion BRI2 Torque limit selection X93 Output terminal function selection Pr 190 to Pr 196 Electronic thermal O L relay pre alarm THP Brake opening request BOF Second brake opening request BOF2 Orientation complete ORA Orientation fault ORM Regenerative status output Y32 In position Y36 Travel completed MEND Start time tuning completion Y39 Home position return failu...

Page 269: ...frequency PID deviation Fault display Input terminal status Frequency setting value Output terminal status Running speed Option input terminal status Converter output voltage Option output terminal status Electric thermal relay load factor Motor thermal load factor Output current peak value Inverter thermal load factor Converter output voltage peak value PTC thermistor value Load meter PID measure...

Page 270: ...nput terminal function selection to assign the function V F control is set by turning ON the X18 signal If the X18 signal is unassigned RT signal performs the same function Turning ON the RT signal selects V F control V F control when Pr 453 or Pr 454 is set to 9999 regardless of the Pr 451 setting When Pr 450 is set to the IPM motor MM CF PM sensorless vector control is enabled even if Pr 453 999...

Page 271: ... selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal The RT signal is a second function selection signal The RT signal also enables other second func tions Refer to page 5 445 The control method could be changed by external terminals RT signal X18 signal while the inverter is stopped If a signal is switched during the operation the control method changes after the inverter stops Pr 862 Encoder o...

Page 272: ...al OFF Torque control MC signal ON Speed control MC signal OFF Position control MC signal ON Position control MC signal OFF Torque control MC signal ON 0 initial value Speed setting assistance Speed limit assistance Speed setting assistance Speed setting assistance 1 Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command ...

Page 273: ... limit Pr 810 1 Torque limit Pr 810 1 Torque limit Pr 810 1 Torque limit Pr 810 1 9999 Tab 5 23 Functions of the terminal 4 under different control modes NOTES Switching between the speed control and the torque control is always enabled regardless of the motor status in a stop in running or in DC injection brake during pre excitation During operation switching between speed control and position co...

Page 274: ...r of motor poles V F control is performed when the setting is 9999 initial value Motor Pr 71 setting Remarks Mitsubishi standard motor Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF JR 0 initial value 3 4 SF JR 4P 1 5 kW or lower 20 SF HR 40 Others 0 3 Offline auto tuning is required Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF JRCA 4P 1 SF HRCA 50 Other SF JRC etc 1 13 Offline auto tuning is required Mitsubishi high...

Page 275: ...e inverter and the motor may reduce the output torque The optional sine wave filter MT BSL BSC cannot be used between the inverter and the motor Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 89 G932 Speed control ga...

Page 276: ...r Pr 569 Pr 89 Control method selection Pr 451 Pr 800 Tab 5 24 Switching the parameters by using the RT signal NOTES The RT signal is a second function selection signal The RT signal also enables other second func tions Refer to page 5 445 RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to ano...

Page 277: ...Turn until IPM parameter initialization appears Setting value display Press to read the present set value initial value appears Changing the setting value Turn to change the set value to then press and flicker alternately The setting is completed Tab 5 25 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control by performing parameter initialization Setting Description 0 Parameter settings for an induction moto...

Page 278: ...9 9009 or 9109 The setting can be made after performing offline auto tuning Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 998 E430 PM parameter initialization 0 0 Parameter settings for an induction motor frequency The parameter settings required to drive an induction motor are set 3003 For IPM motor MM CF Parameter setting rotations per minute The parameters settings required to drive an IPM mo...

Page 279: ...pectively set to their initial values The purpose of Pr 998 is not to change the display units Use Pr 144 Speed set ting switchover to change the display units between rotations per minute and frequency Pr 144 enables switching of display units between rotations per minute and frequency without initializ ing the parameter settings Example Changing the Pr 144 setting between 6 and 106 switches the ...

Page 280: ...r min 0 01 Hz 18 High speed maximum frequency 120 Hz 3000 r min 200 Hz 1 r min 0 01 Hz 60 Hz 20 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r min Pr 84 133 33 Hz Pr 84 1 r min 0 01 Hz 22 Stall prevention operation level 150 150 0 1 37 Speed display 0 0 1 55 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r min Pr 84 133 33 Hz Pr 84 1 r min 0 01 Hz 56 Current monitoring reference...

Page 281: ... 84 1 r min 0 01 Hz 505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 133 33 Hz Pr 84 133 33 Hz Pr 84 0 01 Hz 557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current Inverter rated current Rated motor current Refer to page 8 8 Pr 859 Rated motor current Refer to page 8 8 Pr 859 0 01 A 0 1 A 820 Speed control P gain 1 60 30 1 821 Speed control integral time 1 0 333 s 0 333 s 0 001 s 824 Torque cont...

Page 282: ...ters 5 80 NOTE If IPM parameter initialization is performed in rotations per minute Pr 998 3003 8009 or 9009 the parameters not listed in the table and the monitored items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute ...

Page 283: ...er The Pr 747 becomes valid when the RT signal turns ON Pr Name Initial value Setting range Operation 788 G250 Low speed range torque characteristic selection 9999 0 Disables the low speed range torque characteristic current synchronization operation 9999 Enables the low speed range torque characteristic high frequency superposition control 747 G350 Second motor low speed range torque characterist...

Page 284: ...2 P G218 P G260 P G261 P G311 P G312 P G361 Pr 818 to Pr 821 Pr 830 Pr 831 Pr 880 Pr 1115 to Pr 1118 Pr 1121 5 103 To improve the motor trackability for the speed command changes Speed feed forward control model adaptive speed control P G220 to P G224 P G262 P C114 Pr 828 Pr 877 to Pr 881 Pr 1119 5 115 To stabilize the speed detection signal Speed detection filter P G215 P G315 Pr 823 Pr 833 5 194...

Page 285: ...4 to 6 24 to 27 232 to 239 RL RM RH REX Option Operation panel Maximum minimum setting Acceleration deceleration processing Decelerates to stop Pr 11 Pr 7 Pr 8 Pr 10 Vector control Pr 800 0 PM sensorless vector control Pr 800 9 13 14 Real sensorless Vector control Pr 800 10 Decelerates to stop Pr 11 Pr 802 1 Pr 802 0 Servo lock zero speed control Pr 850 1 Pr 850 0 Zero speed control Zero speed con...

Page 286: ...Pr 800 0 Speeddetectionfilter Speed estimation Realsensorlessvectorcontrol Pr 800 10 PMsensorlessvectorcontrol Pr 800 9 13 14 Terminal1bias C16 C17 Pr 919 Terminal1gain C18 C19 Pr 920 Fall timetorquebiasterminal1bias Pr 847 Fall timetorquebiasterminal1gain Pr 848 Torquebiasbalance compensation Pr 846 Pr 826 9999 Pr 826 Pr 74 Pr 836 Pr 74 Pr 826 9999 Pr 836 9999 Pr 836 9999 Torquebias Pr 841to843 P...

Page 287: ...anually Refer to page 5 108 SelectPr 800 10 speedcontrol or 12 speed torqueswitchover to enable speed control Select the start command and speed command Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles V F control is performed when the setting is 9999 initial value Set Pr 71 Applied motor to 3 standard motor or 13 constant torque mo...

Page 288: ...a tion Switching between the forward rotation command STF and reverse rotation command STR must not be performed during operations under torque control An overcurrent trip E OC첸 or opposite rotation deceleration fault E 11 will occur When performing continuous operations under Real sensorless vector control in FR A820 00250 3 7K or lower or FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower the speed fluctuation increas...

Page 289: ...nually Refer to page 5 108 Select Pr 800 0 speed control 2 speed torque switchover or 4 speed position switchover to enable speed control Select the start command and speed command Set the overheat protection of the motor Pr 9 Refer to page 5 303 Setthemotorcapacity kW inPr 80 Motorcapacity andset thenumberofmotorpolesinPr 81 Numberofmotorpoles V F control is performed when the setting is 9999 ini...

Page 290: ...6 Refer to page 5 471 Configure the initial setting for the PM sensorless vector control using Pr 998 Refer to page 5 76 When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr 998 PM parameter initialization the PM sensorless vector control is selected PM on the operation panel FR DU08 is lit when the PM sensorless vector control is set 8009 Parameter rotations per minute settings for an IPM motor ot...

Page 291: ... 200 Hz The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control Refer to page 5 227 Constant speed operation cannot be performed in the low speed range of 200 r min or less under current synchronization operation Refer to page 5 81 During PM sensorless vector control the RUN signal is output about 100 ms after turning ON the start command STF STR The delay is due to the magnetic pole ...

Page 292: ...er range constant motor output limit 11 Torque rise in low speed range In constant power range constant torque limit 804 D400 Torque command source selection 0 0 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used 1 Torque limit 400 to 400 by the parameter setting Pr 805 or Pr 806 3 Torque limit via CC Link communication FR A8NC FR A8NCE FR A800 GF FR A800 E 4 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used 5 T...

Page 293: ...e limit as constant speed 817 H721 Torque limit level during deceleration 9999 0 to 400 Set the torque limit value during deceleration 9999 The same torque limit as constant speed 858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0 1 4 9999 The torque limit level can be changed with setting value 4 and the signal to terminal 4 868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 to 6 9999 The torque limit level ca...

Page 294: ...torque limit 1 Perform the torque limit operation using the parameter Pr 22 Pr 812 to Pr 814 settings If changing the torque limit parameters via communication is enabled the torque limit input can be performed via communication 1 External torque limit Torque limit using analog voltage current to terminal 1 or terminal 4 is valid 2 Internal torque limit 2 The torque limit through the CC Link FR A8...

Page 295: ...nction assign ment 4 When inputting from terminal 4 set Pr 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 4 When Pr 858 4 and Pr 868 2 the torque for regenerative driving is limited with the terminal 1 analog input and the torque for power driving is limited with the terminal 4 analog input Fig 5 14 Torque limit level by parameter setting I001502E I002507E Fig 5 15 Torque limit level by analog input Forward d...

Page 296: ...ibration parameters NOTE When inputting an analog signal to the terminal 1 input a positive voltage 0 V to 10 V 5 V When a negative voltage 0 V to 10 V 5 V is input the torque limit value set by the analog signal becomes 0 400 150 0 0 0 400 150 0 100 0 20mA 20 4 Initial value Gain C18 Pr 920 100 5 V 10 V C19 Pr 920 Torque setting signal C17 Pr 919 Calibration example of terminal 1 Bias C16 Pr 919 ...

Page 297: ... installed and vector control is selected Pr 858 setting value Terminal 4 function Pr 868 setting Terminal 1 function 0 Initial value Speed command AU signal ON 0 Initial value Speed setting auxiliary 1 Magnetic flux command 2 3 4 Torque limit Pr 810 1 5 6 Torque bias Pr 840 1 to 3 9999 1 Magnetic flux command 0 Initial value Speed setting auxiliary 1 Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command 2 ...

Page 298: ...ter unit The torque can also be limited by setting a value in Pr 805 or Pr 806 Setting range if set by operation panel or parameter unit is 673 to 1327 327 to 327 setting increment is 1 Pr 804 Torque limit input Setting range Setting increments CC Link PLC function CC Link IE 1 Torque limit by Pr 805 or Pr 806 Torque limit by remote register RWw2 600 to 1400 400 to 400 1 3 Torque limit by remote r...

Page 299: ...set in Pr 810 while the communication option is not connected a protective function E OPT is activated when the PLC function is disabled For the details of the FR A8NC and the FR A8NCE refer to the Instruction Manual of each option For the details of the CC Link IE Field Network refer to page 5 747 I001505E Fig 5 19 Second torque limit level NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr...

Page 300: ...2 Hz the torque limit level during acceleration deceleration Pr 816 or Pr 817 changes to the torque control level during constant speed Pr 22 When the difference between the set speed and rotation speed is 2 Hz or less the torque limit level during deceleration Pr 817 activates I002510E Fig 5 20 Individual torque limit value during acceleration and deceleration NOTE The Pr 816 and Pr 817 settings ...

Page 301: ...eal sensorless vector control Pr 811 setting Speed setting running speed monitor increments from PU RS 485 communication communication options Torque limit setting increments Pr 22 Pr 812 to Pr 817 0 1 r min 0 1 1 0 1 r min 10 1 r min 0 01 11 0 1 r min Tab 5 31 Torque limit level increments NOTES The internal resolution of the torque limit is 0 024 100 212 and fractions below this resolution are r...

Page 302: ...e Constant power range constant power limit torque reduction Output frequency Base frequency 10 Hz Torque rise limit Output frequency Base frequency 10 Hz Torque rise limit Pr 803 10 Torque Low speed range Constant torque range Constant power range constant power limit torque reduction Pr 803 1 Torque Low speed range Constant torque range Constant power range Constant torque limit Constanttorqueli...

Page 303: ...ntion operation signal OL signal is turned ON for 100 ms or longer Whenthe output torque drops to the torque limit level or lower the output signal also turns OFF Pr 157 OL signal output timer can be used to set whether to output the OL signal immediately or whether to output it after a certain time period has elapsed I001508E Fig 5 22 Alarm stop when torque limit is activated NOTES Under V F cont...

Page 304: ... negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level page 5 325 Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection page 5 439 Pr ...

Page 305: ...ontrol P gain 1 60 0 to 1000 The proportional gain during speed control is set Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for speed command changes It also reduces the speed fluctuation caused by external disturbance 821 G212 Speed control integral time 1 0 333 s 0 to 20 s The integral time during speed control is set Setting this parameter lower shortens the return time to the origin...

Page 306: ... motor When applying the second motor RT signal is ON tuning is not performed Vector control Command Speed control position loop gain Model speed control gain Pr 820 Pr 821 Pr 828 Pr 422 Automatic setting Current control Load inertia moment Motor Encoder Detector Torque command Actual motor speed Load inertia ratio estimation section ON when Pr 819 1 ON when Pr 819 1 2 Load inertia ratio Pr 880 Ga...

Page 307: ... Pr 880 Load inertia ratio is used as the initial value of the load inertia ratio when performing tuning During tuning the calculated value is set in Pr 880 The calculation of the load inertia ratio may take excessive time or otherwise not be performed properly if the following conditions are not satisfied The time in acceleration deceleration driving until 1500 r min is reached in 5 s or less The...

Page 308: ...gral time 1 are set automatically Operation is performed with the adjusted gain from the next operation Perform a test run and set the response level in Pr 818 Easy gain tuning response level setting Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for commands but setting it too high causes vibration The response level can be adjusted during operation when Pr 77 Parameter write selection 2...

Page 309: ...d control gain Pr 422 Position control gain Pr 446 Model position control gain Manual input a The tuning result RAM is displayed a Gain is calculated when Pr 819 is set to 2 and the result is set in the parameter b The parameter is set at the following times Every hour after turning ON the power 앫 When Pr 819 is set to a value other than 1 앫 After changing to a control other than vector control su...

Page 310: ...al time 1 lower shortens the return time to the original speed during speed fluctuation but setting it too low causes overshoot The value in parentheses is applicable during Real sensorless vector control or with the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher during vector control Performing PM parameter initialization changes the settings Refer to page 5 76 Actual speed gain is c...

Page 311: ...occur raise the setting by double the setting and set a value that satisfies the following condition The setting where overshoots stop occurring 0 8 to 0 9 3 Response is slow Set Pr 820 higher Pr 820 If acceleration is slow raise the setting by 5 s and set a value that satisfies the following condition The setting immediately before vibration noise starts occurring 0 8 to 0 9 4 Return time respons...

Page 312: ...y referring to the response level based on this setting Also for vector control gain adjustment appropriate for the inertia can be easily performed by using easy gain tuning Pr 819 1 2 Rotation speed trackability is poor Set Pr 820 Speed control P gain 1 higher Raise the setting by 10 s and set a value that satisfies the following condition The setting immediately before vibration noise starts occ...

Page 313: ... Iq command is 100 rated Iq when the speed deviation is 100 When 10 is set the torque Iq command is 10 rated Iq when the speed deviation is 100 Set the 100 speed in Pr 1121 Per unit speed control reference frequency The speed control P gain becomes as follows according to Pr 1117 Speed control P gain 1 per unit system Pr 1118 Speed control P gain 2 per unit system and the RT signal I002815E Fig 5 ...

Page 314: ...nal When the X44 signal is turned ON integration is stopped and the accumulated integral term is reduced and cleared according to Pr 1115 Speed control integral term clear time Shock at P PI control switchover is absorbed InPr 1115 settimewhentheintegraltermisreducedfrom100 to0 regardingtheratedtorque current Iq as 100 Turning OFF the X44 signal resumes the integral operation I002518E Fig 5 28 Fun...

Page 315: ...852 1 The parameter setting and the number of encoder pulses used are different 앫 If the parameter setting value is lower than the number of encoder pulses used the motor will not rotate Set Pr 369 Pr 851 Number of encoder pulses correctly Encoder power specifications are incorrect Alternatively power is not input 앫 Check the encoder power specifications 5 V 12 V 15 V 24 V and input the external p...

Page 316: ...t Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 5 90 앫 Perform speed feed forward control Load inertia is too high 앫 Set acceleration deceleration time suitable for the load 7 Machinemovement is unstable Speed control gain is not suitable for the machine 앫 Perform easy gain tuning 앫 Adjust Pr 820 and Pr 821 앫 Perform speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control Response is slow...

Page 317: ...l becomes valid 878 G221 Speed feed forward filter 0 s 0 to 1 s Set the primary delay filter for the result of the speed feed forward calculated from the speed command and load inertia ratio 879 G222 Speed feed forward torque limit 150 0 to 400 Set a maximum limit for the speed feed forward torque 880 C114 Load inertia ratio 7 fold 0 to 200 fold Set the load inertia ratio for the motor 881 G223 Sp...

Page 318: ...d result can also be lessened with a primary delay filter in Pr 878 I002520E Fig 5 29 Block diagram of speed feed forward control NOTES The speed feed forward control is enabled for the first motor Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while Pr 877 1 the second motor is operated as Pr 877 0 Under PM sensorless vector control this function is available when low speed range high t...

Page 319: ...t speed control reference frequency I002521E Fig 5 30 Block diagram of model adaptive speed control NOTES The model adaptive speed control is enabled for the first motor Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while Pr 877 2 the second motor is operated as Pr 877 0 Under PM sensorless vector control this function is available when low speed range high torque characteristic is enab...

Page 320: ...ayed Write is not available The tuning result is displayed Write is not available Pr 821 Speed control integral time 1 Manual input The tuning result is displayed Write is not available The tuning result is displayed Write is not available Pr 828 Model speed control gain Manual input The tuning result is displayed Write is not available The tuning result is displayed Write is not available Pr 881 ...

Page 321: ...nication FR A8NP 400 to 400 25 Torque bias command via PROFIBUS DP communication FR A8NP 327 68 to 327 67 9999 No torque bias rated torque 100 841 G231 Torque bias 1 9999 600 to 999 Negative torque bias amount 400 to 1 842 G232 Torque bias 2 1000 to 1400 Positive torque bias amount 0 to 400 843 G233 Torque bias 3 9999 No torque bias setting 844 G234 Torque bias filter 9999 0 to 5 s The time until ...

Page 322: ...lection 1 X42 Torque bias selection 2 X43 Torque bias amount OFF OFF 0 ON OFF Pr 841 400 to 400 Setting value 600 to 1400 OFF ON Pr 842 400 to 400 Setting value 600 to 1400 ON ON Pr 843 400 to 400 Setting value 600 to 1400 Tab 5 41 Setting torque bias amount with the contact input NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other fu...

Page 323: ...e motor rotation I002525E Forward motor rotation I002526E Tab 5 42 Setting the torque bias amount using terminal 1 NOTE Input 0 to 10 V torque command to the terminal 1 that is used for the torque bias function Any negative input voltage is regarded as 0 V Torque command terminal 1 gain C18 Pr 920 Torque command terminal 1 gain C16 Pr 919 Voltage for balanced load Pr 846 C17 Pr 919 Bias amount Ter...

Page 324: ...es read C16 C17 Pr 919 Press the SET key C16 C17 Pr 919 setting completed The load input at no load is set as the terminal 1 bias and a terminal 1 bias command is automatically set according to the load Drive under the maximum load When the speed stabilizes read C18 C19 Pr 920 Press the SET key C18 C19 Pr 920 setting completed The load input at the maximum load is set astheterminal1gain and a term...

Page 325: ...g input selection and terminal 1 is the main speed no main speed main speed 0 Hz is set The torque bias is valid for the first motor When applying the second motor RT signal is ON the torque bias function is not performed Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each term...

Page 326: ...ency for a continuous time equal to or longer than the setting value in Pr 853 Speed deviation time Speed deviation excess detection E OSD activates to shut off the inverter output Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 285 H416 Speed deviation excess detection frequency 9999 0 to 30 Hz Set the speed deviation excess detection frequency difference between the actual rotation speed and spe...

Page 327: ...ctive function E OSD is activated to trip the inverter I001519E Fig 5 34 Speed limit NOTES When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected Pr 57 Restart coasting time 9999 and the setting value for the number of encoder pulses is lower than the actual number of pulses the output speed is limited with the synchronous speed of the value of Pr 1 Maximum frequency Pr ...

Page 328: ... speed control of the vector control If the protective function E OSD operates due to deceleration check check whether the Pr 369 Pr 851 Number of encoder pulses setting is correct Parameters referred to Pr 285 Overspeed detection frequency page 5 730 Pr 369 Number of encoder pulses page 2 83 Pr 851 Control terminal option Number of encoder pulses page 2 83 ...

Page 329: ...the required notch frequency to be determined Pr 1004 Notch filter depth A deeper notch depth has a greater effect in reducing mechanical resonance but because the phase delay is larger vibration may increase Adjust by starting from the shallowest value Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 1003 G601 Notch filter frequency 0 0 No notch filter 8 to 1250 Hz Set the frequency for the center...

Page 330: ...The setting can be adjusted according to the width of the frequency range to be excluded If the width is too wide the response level of speed control will drop and the system may become unstable NOTE If a value higher than 500 Hz is set in Pr 1003 while the response speed is normal Pr 800 any of 0 to 5 and 9 to 14 the inverter operates at 500 Hz Parameters referred to Pr 800 Control method selecti...

Page 331: ... prevent the motor from overspeeding set a speed limit Speed control is performed instead of torque control during speed limit If speed limit is not set speed limit value setting is regarded as 0 Hz and torque control is not enabled Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page To select the torque command source and to set the torque command value Torque command P D400 to P D402 P G210 Pr 803 to Pr 806 ...

Page 332: ... Motor Encoder Pr 800 1 Real sensorless vector control Pr 800 11 Speed estimation Speed detection filter Pr 827 Pr 837 Pr 823 Pr 833 Torque detection filter Torque control integral time 2 Pr 835 Torque control P gain 2 Pr 834 Torque control P gain 1 Pr 824 Torque control P gain 1 Pr 825 Motor Encoder Constant power range torque characteristic selection Pr 803 Torque command source selection Pr 804...

Page 333: ...74 Pr 832 Pr 74 Maximum minimum setting Acceleration decelerationprocessing When Pr 807 2 and Pr 1 Maximum frequency is the speed limit acceleration deceleration processing is not performed Reverse rotation Forward rotation Forward rotation Reverse rotation Terminal 1 input 0 to 10 V Terminal 1 input 10 to 0 V Terminal 1 input 0 to 10 V Terminal 1 input 10 to 0 V Pr 807 2 Pr 807 1 Pr 807 1 Operati...

Page 334: ...s the torque command Speed limit Selects the speed limit input method and inputs a speed limit value Tab 5 45 Signal input Speed limit value is increased up to preset value according to the Pr 7 Acceleration time setting Speed limit value Torque control Speed limit Speed limit value is decreased downtozeroaccordingtothePr 8 Deceleration time setting Output torque is provided according to the termi...

Page 335: ...hen the torque command and load torque are balanced The direction of motor torque generation is determined by a combination of the input torque command polarity and the start signal as given in the following table I002532E Fig 5 41 Transition operation Polarity of torque command Torque generation direction STF signal ON STR signal ON torque command Forward direction forward power driving reverse r...

Page 336: ...unction is invalid When Pr 261 11 12 the operation is performed in the same manner as if Pr 261 1 2 Under torque control perform linear acceleration deceleration Pr 29 0 initial value The inverter s protective function may operate for non linear acceleration deceleration patterns Refer to page 5 248 Performing pre excitation LX signal and X13 signal under torque control Real sensorless vector cont...

Page 337: ...ing the torque control gain manually Refer to page 5 150 Enable torque control by setting Pr 800 Control method selection 11 torquecontrol or 12 speed torqueswitch andtorquecontrol becomes valid Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles Pr 80 Pr 81 Refer to page 5 61 Set 0 standard motor or 1 constant torque motor in Pr 71 Applied motor Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity ...

Page 338: ...rations under torque control Otherwise an overcurrent trip E OC or opposite rotation deceleration fault E 11 will occur When performing continuous operations under Real sensorless vector control in FR A820 00250 3 7K or lower or FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower the speed fluctuation increases at 20 Hz or less and in the low speed range of less than 1 Hz there may be torque shortage In such case make a ...

Page 339: ...on 1 torque control 2 speed torque switch or 5 position torque switch to enable torque control Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles Pr 80 Pr 81 Refer to page 5 61 Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles V Fcontrolisperformedwhenthesettingis 9999 initialvalue Install a vector control compatible option Set the...

Page 340: ... E Torque command via PROFIBUS DP communication FR A8NP 6 805 D401 Torque command value RAM 1000 600 to 1400 Writes the torque command value in RAM Regards 1000 as 0 and set torque command by an offset of 1000 806 D402 Torque command value RAM EEPROM 1000 600 to 1400 Writes the torque command value in RAM and EEPROM Regards 1000 as 0 and set torque command by an offset of 1000 1114 D403 Torque com...

Page 341: ...nge torque command value frequently write in Pr 805 If values are written in Pr 806 frequently EEPROM life is shortened When the CC Link IE Field Network communication FR A8NCE or FR A800 GF is used the torque command from the remote register RWw2 is valid When the CC Link IE Field Network Basic communication FR A800 E is used the torque command from the remote registers RWw1 RWwC is valid Fig 5 4...

Page 342: ... digital input Pr 804 4 Execute torque command by 12 bit or 16 bit digital input using FR A8AX plug in option Pr 804 setting Torque command input Setting range Setting increments CC Link PLC function CC Link IE PROFIBUS DP 1 Torque command by Pr 805 Pr 806 Torque command by remote register RWw2 Torque command by Pr 805 Pr 806 600 to 1400 400 to 400 1 3 Torque command by remote register RWw1 or RWw...

Page 343: ...ed or not when the reverse rotation command STR is turned ON can be selected using Pr 1114 Torque command reverse selection Pr 803 setting Torque characteristic in the constant output range 0 initial value 10 Constant motor output 1 11 Constant torque Tab 5 48 Torque characteristics in the constant output area I001526E Fig 5 47 Motor characteristic Pr 1114 setting Torque command polarity at STR si...

Page 344: ...n speed limit reverse side speed limit 9999 0 to 400 Hz Sets the reverse side speed limit 9999 Pr 808 setting value is effective 1113 H414 Speed limit method selection 0 9999 Speed limit mode 1 0 Speed limit mode 2 1 Speed limit mode 3 2 Speed limit mode 4 10 X93 OFF Speed limit mode 3 X93 ON Speed limit mode 4 Pr 1113 setting Speed limit method Speed limit value 9999 Speed limit mode 1 Forward ro...

Page 345: ... frequency setting value speed limit value becomes the Pr 1 setting value When the speed limit command is smaller than Pr 2 Minimum frequency setting value speed limit value becomes the Pr 2 setting value Also when the speed limit command is smaller than the Pr 13 Starting frequency the speed limit value becomes 0 Hz To perform speed limit by analog input calibrate analog input terminals 1 2 and 4...

Page 346: ...anbeswitchedbetween forward and reverse rotation by its voltage polarity When Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment 5 forward reverse speed limit is enabled If 0 to 10 V is input forward rotation speed limit is applied Reverse rotation speed limit at this time is the value of Pr 1 Maximum frequency If 10 to 0 V is input reverse rotation speed limit is applied Forward rotation speed limit at this t...

Page 347: ... Output torque Torque controllable range Pr 7 Reverse rotation Pr 8 Torque controllable range Start signal OFF ON OFF ON Pr 1 Start signal Pr 1 Torque controllable range Pr 8 Pr 7 Terminal 1 input 10 to 0 V The reverse rotation speed limit Time Time The reverse rotation speed limit Terminal 1 input 0 to 10 V The forward rotation speed limit Speed When terminal 1 input is 10 to 0 V When terminal 1 ...

Page 348: ...posite to the torque polarity the setting of Pr 809 Reverse rotation speed limit reverse side speed limit is applied for the speed limit The speed limit value and reverse side speed limit value are limited at Pr 1 Maximum frequency maximum 400 Hz under vector control I002817E Fig 5 52 Speed limit mode 2 ON Time When the torque command value is positive When the torque command value is negative Spe...

Page 349: ... maximum 400 Hz under vector control I002818E I002819E Fig 5 53 Speed limit mode 3 Pr 809 ON Speed limit value Torque command value Range where torque control is available Reverse side speed limit value Pr 809 Range where torque control is available Range where torque control is available Reverse side speed limit value Reverse side speed limit value Start signal Start signal OFF OFF ON Time Speed ...

Page 350: ...ed at Pr 1 Maximum frequency maximum 400 Hz under vector control I002820E I002821E_D Fig 5 54 Speed limit mode 3 ON Speed limit value Torque command value Range where torque control is available Reverse side speed limit value Pr 809 Range where torque control is available Range where torque control is available Reverse side speed limit value Start signal Start signal OFF OFF ON Time Speed limit va...

Page 351: ...3 in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 out put terminal function selection to assign the OL signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirm ing the function of each terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after...

Page 352: ... types of gain Pr 834 Pr 835 Use Pr 834 Torque control P gain 2 Pr 835 Torque control integral time 2 if the gain setting needs to be switched according to application or if multiple motors are switched by a single inverter The Pr 834 and Pr 835 settings are valid when the second function selection RT signal is ON Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 824 G213 Torque control P gain 1 cur...

Page 353: ...urrent from the motor If it still requires improvement make Pr 825 longer Pr 824 Lower the setting by 10 increments and set a value that is approximately 0 8 to 0 9 times the setting value immediately before abnormal noise or current is improved If set too low current ripple is produced and produces a sound from the motor that synchronizes with it Pr 825 Lengthen the current setting by doubling it...

Page 354: ...ed and parameter settings do not match 앫 Correctly set Pr 862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used refer to page 5 69 2 When a small torque command is given the motor rotates in a direction opposite to the start signal 앫 Torque offset calibration is inaccurate 앫 Re calibrate C16 Terminal 1 bias command torque and C17 Terminal 1 bias torque Refer to page 5 426 3 Torque contro...

Page 355: ...e the torque limit is invalid at a change in the speed command value to adjust the internal speed command value to the actual speed Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 800 G200 Control method selection 20 6 Vector control Variable current limiter torque control 106 Vector control fast response operation 0to5 100to 105 Vector control 9 109 Vector control test operation 10to12 100 to 112...

Page 356: ...hange I002823E Fig 5 56 Generated torque depending on Pr 800 setting NOTE When Pr 800 6 or 106 torque control by a variable current limiter Pr 690 Deceleration check time and Pr 873 Speed limit are ignored Parameters referred to Pr 690 Deceleration check time page 5 124 Pr 873 Speed limit page 5 124 Pr 800 Control method selection page 5 61 0 0 0 0 0 0 Speed command value Line speed Torque limit v...

Page 357: ...20 to P B050 P B101 P B120 to P B188 P B190 to P B195 Pr 419 Pr 464 to Pr 494 Pr 1221 to Pr 1290 Pr 1292 Pr 1293 5 138 To perform position control by pulse input to the inverter Simple pulse train position command P B000 P B009 P B010 Pr 419 Pr 428 Pr 429 5 176 To adjust the gear ratio of the motor and machine Electronic gear settings P B001 P B002 P B005 Pr 420 Pr 421 Pr 424 5 185 To improve the ...

Page 358: ...e input stops the amount of droop pulses in the deviation counter decreases and thus the speed slows down When there is no droop pulse the motor stops If the numberofdroop pulses becomes smallerthanthe value set in Pr 426 In positionwidth the system determines that positioning is complete and the positioning completion signal Y36 is turned ON I002535E Fig 5 57 Control block diagram 0 M 2 0 1 0 1 2...

Page 359: ...unction selection To assign the positioning completion signal Y36 set 36 in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output ter minal function selection Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 or Pr 190 to Pr 196 may affect other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection page 5 439 Pr 190 to Pr 1...

Page 360: ...irection and Pr 369 Pr 851 Number of encoder pulses according to the motor and encoder Set the motor capacity kW in Pr 80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr 81 Number of motor poles V F control is performed when the setting is 9999 initial value Set the positioning parameters Pr 465 to Pr 494 and Pr 1222 to Pr 1281 Refer to page 5 138 Position command by contact input Set Pr 41...

Page 361: ... pulses motor rotation The positioning accuracy is 200 pulses rev for 1 5K or lower and 100 pulses rev for 2K or higher under no load PM PM PM Test run Select the position command source Pr 419 Select the control mode Pr 800 Refer to page 5 61 As required 앫 Set the electronic gear Refer to page 5 185 앫 Set the position adjustment parameters Refer to page 5 187 앫 Adjust the position control gain Re...

Page 362: ...digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the target position of point table 1 466 B022 First target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 467 B023 Second target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the target position of point table 2 468 B024 Second target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 469 B025 Third target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the target position of point table 3 470 B026 Third target po...

Page 363: ...e target position of the point table 14 492 B048 Fourteenth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 493 B049 Fifteenth target position lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the target position of the point table 15 494 B050 Fifteenth target position upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 1221 B101 Start command edge detection selection 0 0 Turning OFF the forward reverse rotation command will stop the motor in th...

Page 364: ...ing dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms 1241 B139 Fifth positioning sub function 10 0 1 2 10 11 12 100 101 102 110 111 112 1242 B140 Sixth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s Set the characteristics of the point table 6 1243 B141 Sixth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s 1244 B142 Sixth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms 1245 B143 Sixth positioning sub function 10 0 1 2 10...

Page 365: ...e 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms 1265 B163 Eleventh positioning sub function 10 0 1 2 10 11 12 100 101 102 110 111 112 1266 B164 Twelfth positioning acceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s Set the characteristics of the point table 12 1267 B165 Twelfth positioning deceleration time 5 s 0 01 to 360 s 1268 B166 Twelfth positioning dwell time 0 ms 0 to 20000 ms 1269 B167 Twelfth positioning sub function 10 0 1 2 10 ...

Page 366: ...home position return 1285 B183 Home position shift amount lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Set the home position shift distance Home position shift distance Pr 1286 10000 Pr 1285 1286 B184 Home position shift amount upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 1287 B185 Travel distance after proximity dog ON lower 4 digits 2048 0 to 9999 Set the travel distance after detecting the proximity dog Travel distance after the ...

Page 367: ...me If the accelera tion deceleration rate is smaller than 1 the motor runs at 1 Hz s or in the deceleration time The maximum acceleration deceleration time is limited at 360 s During position control acceleration deceleration pattern is always the liner acceleration decel eration and the Pr 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection setting is ignored Point table Position data command side Max...

Page 368: ...er a command has been executed Set individual as the operation method for the point table that will be the last of the continuously operated point tables When continuous operation using the point table selected at the start is selected the position ing operation is repeated To stop the operation turn OFF the STF STR signal or turn ON the X87 sudden stop input signal Individual operationisonlyexecu...

Page 369: ...r point tables I002536E Fig 5 61 Positioning operation by point tables NOTES During continuous operation the operation moves on to the next table after the position com mand speed becomes 0 During continuous operation no point table selection signal is received Select the position feed length by point tables before turning ON the start command Only the maximum frequency can be changed during opera...

Page 370: ...eration is switched to use the point table 4 end point According to the setting in the auxiliary function for the point table 4 Pr 1237 12 the operation is switched to use the point table 2 selected at the start loops back the start point from the end point Steps to are repeated I002537E Fig 5 62 Positioning operation by point tables Point table Target position Maximum speed Hz Acceleration time s...

Page 371: ... necessary Pr 1288 10000 Pr 1287 Turn OFF all point table selections Turn OFF all RH RM RL and REX signals Turn ON the Pre excitation servo ON LX signal Turn ON the start signal STF or STR Home position return is performed according to the settings I003098E Fig 5 63 Positioning operation by point tables NOTES The setting values of the point table 1 are used as acceleration deceleration time After ...

Page 372: ...he first Z phase signal or position of the Z phase signal shifted by the home position shift amount Pr 1285 Pr 1286 I002539E 2 Data set type The position at which the start signal is input is used as the home position I002540E Tab 5 59 Home position return methods 1 Vector Vector Vector X76 LX 0 STF Home position return speed Point table 1 acceleration time Point table 1 decelerationtime Creep spe...

Page 373: ...og After the back end is passed the position is shifted by the post dog travel distance and home position shift amount The position after the shifts is set as the home position Set pulses required for deceleration from the creep speed or more as the total of the post dog travel distance and home position shift amount I002825E Pr 1282 Setting Home position return method Description Tab 5 59 Home po...

Page 374: ...ction In a system that uses home position return with proximity dog if the home position return is com manded while the motor is in a position within the proximity dog the motor moves out of the proximity dog once then starts deceleration to stop when it comes to the proximity dog again The home position return is performed automatically after that Pr 1282 Setting Home position return method Descr...

Page 375: ... home position return 앫 The proximity dog signal is turned OFF during transition from the home position return speed to the creep speed when home position return is performed in the dog type or dog type back end reference 앫 The position command is given for the motor to reach the post dog travel distance during transition from the home position return speed to the creep speed when home position re...

Page 376: ...erminal The input logic of the X87 signal can be set using Pr 1292 Position control terminal input selection I002543E Fig 5 64 Sudden stop I002544E Fig 5 65 Sudden stop during positioning operation or home position return operation Pr 1292 setting Input logic X87 0 initial value Normally open input NO contact input specification 1 Normally closed input NC contact input specification Tab 5 61 Input...

Page 377: ...ning I002827E Fig 5 66 Basic operation of roll feed mode Input output Signal name Function Pr 178 to Pr 189 setting Pr 190 to Pr 196 setting Positive logic Negative logic Input X76 Proximity dog ON dog ON OFF dog OFF 76 X87 Sudden stop When turned ON the motor decelerates and stops according to Pr 464 87 Output MEND Travel completed Turns ON when the position command operation has completed while ...

Page 378: ...t signal operation during positioning with home position return Parameters referred to Pr 20 Acceleration deceleration reference frequency page 5 241 Pr 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection page 5 248 Y36 LX 0 STF PBSY RH MEND Speed Position command Point table 1 Motor speed Dwell time Point table 2 Time Point table selection signal X76 LX 0 STF MEND ZPEND Y36 PBSY Point table selection ...

Page 379: ... position command by setting parameters The home position information is retained at servo OFF 100 Simple position control by point tables position command by setting parameters The monitor value of the current position 2 is cleared when the home position return is completed 110 Simple position control by point tables position command by setting parameters The home position data is retained at ser...

Page 380: ...ssign Simple position pulse train sign NP Select the command pulse train with Pr 428 Command pulse selection Select vector control or PM sensorless vector control to select the position control method I001538E Fig 5 69 Operation Pr 428 setting Command pulse train type During forward rotation During reverse rotation 0 to 2 Negative logic Pulse train rotation direction sign 3 to 5 Positive logic Pul...

Page 381: ...se signal of the encoder such as the home position return signal and the deviation counter is cleared For a terminal used for the CLR signal set 69 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function For a terminal used for the CLRN signal set 59 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function I001541E Fig 5 70 Clear the droop pul...

Page 382: ...P 637 M612 Control terminal option Cumulative pulse division scaling factor 1 1 to 16384 Set the division scaling factor on the cumulative pulse for the control terminal option FR A8TP 638 M613 Cumulative pulse storage 0 0 to 3 Select the processing method for the cumulative pulse monitor value when the power is turned OFF or the inverter is reset Pr 430 setting Description 첸첸첸0 Pulse monitor sele...

Page 383: ... droop pulse and current position 2 before the electronic gear operation 1첸첸첸 Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor position command current position and droop pulse after the electronic gear operation Displays the item in the PLC function special register position command current position droop pulse and current position 2 after the electronic gear operation 8888 For mul...

Page 384: ...F When the LX signal is turned ON again while Pr 419 10 the ZP signal is also turned ON The monitor value of the current position 2 is not cleared when switching between the first and second motors are switched each other For the details of the PLC function special register refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual Display data Monitor display without signs Monitor display with signs 10000 Lowe...

Page 385: ...78 to Pr 184 input terminal function selection to assign the function to a terminal Use Pr 635 Cumulative pulse clear signal selection to select the clearing method for the cumulative pulse monitor and the cumulative pulse overflow times Pr 635 X52 signal Cumulative pulse monitor clear X53 signal Cumulative pulse monitor clear control terminal option 0 Cleared at the edge when the signal is switch...

Page 386: ... EEPROM Retained Stored in the EEPROM Retained Tab 5 69 Pr 638 settings NOTES When the power is turned OFF during the reset process the cumulative pulse monitor value and the cumulative pulse carrying overflow times are not stored in the EEPROM For storing the cumulative pulse monitor value and the cumulative pulse overflow times in the EEPROM at power OFF connect R1 L11 with P and S1 L21 with N s...

Page 387: ...pulse Thefollowingformulashowstherelationshipbetweenthemotorspeedandinternalcommandpulse frequency fo Internal command pulse frequency pps No Motor rotation speed r min Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 420 B001 Command pulse scaling factor numerator electronic gear numerator 1 1 to 32767 Set the electronic gear Pr 420 is the numerator and Pr 421 is the denominator 421 B002 Command p...

Page 388: ...ion a stop settling time ts which is the time be tween the zero command output and the motor stop is required Set the operation pattern taking into the account the stop setting time The stop settling time ts will be 0 12 s for the initial value Kp 25 s 1 The accuracy of positioning Δε will be 5 to 10 Δl Δε mm Example Setting example 1 In a driving system whose ball screw pitch is PB 10 mm and the ...

Page 389: ...etected Excessive position fault E OD is activated and the inverter output is shut off Increase the error threshold level when a small value is set as the Position control gain setting value Set a small value for early detection even when the load is heavy If Pr 427 9999 is set E OD is not activated regardless of the amount of droop pulses Parameters referred to Pr 422 Position control gain page 5...

Page 390: ...ed on both the plus and minus sides When 1 is set the position is detected on the plus side only When 2 is set the position is detected on the minus side only When a current position varies the position detected signal may repeat ON OFF chatter Setting hysteresis to the detected position prevents chattering of the signal Use Pr 1297 Position detection hysteresis width to set a hysteresis width I00...

Page 391: ...osition feed forward gain 0 0 to 100 Function to cancel a delay caused by the droop pulses in the deviation counter 425 B006 Position feed forward command filter 0 s 0 to 5 s Input the first delay filter for the feed forward command 446 B012 Model position control gain 25 s 1 0 to 150 s 1 Set the gain for the model position controller 828 G224 Model speed control gain 60 0 to 1000 Set the gain for...

Page 392: ...on has no effects on servo rigidity at a stop Normally set this parameter to 0 When setting Pr 423 set Pr 877 0 or 1 to enable position feed forward control Model adaptive position control Pr 446 Set each response for position commands and for load and external disturbances individually Set this parameter when a sufficient position response cannot be obtained after setting Pr 422 WhensettingPr 446...

Page 393: ... position feed length set by Pr 465 to Pr 494 is not correct Check the position feed length in Pr 465 to Pr 494 The option to be used and parameter settings do not match Correctly set Pr 862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used Refer to page 5 69 2 The position is unfavorably shifted A command pulse is not correctly input 앫 Check the command pulse type in Pr 428 Command puls...

Page 394: ...ng The forward reverse rotation stroke end signal has turned off before completion of positioning Motor or machine is hunting The position control gain Pr 422 is high Decrease the position control gain Pr 422 Insufficient torque Increase the excitation ratio Pr 854 Please contact your sales representative Machine operation is unstable Perform easy gain tuning The speed control gain is high Decreas...

Page 395: ... 7 Acceleration time page 5 241 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 241 Pr 72 PWM frequency selection page 5 227 Pr 800 Control method selection page 5 61 Pr 802 Pre excitation selection page 5 701 Pr 819 Easy gain tuning selection page 5 72 Pr 820 Speed control P gain 1 page 5 72 Pr 821 Speed control integral time 1 page 5 72 ...

Page 396: ...the setting value is too large Employing multiple primary delay filters Use Pr 833 Pr 837 if changing filter according to application Pr 833 Pr 837 Second function selec tion RT signal Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page To stabilize speed and torque feedback signal Speed detection filter Torque detection filter P G215 P G216 P G315 P G316 Pr 823 Pr 827 Pr 833 Pr 837 5 194 To changes excitation...

Page 397: ...to 100 Set an excitation ratio when there is no load I001543E Fig 5 75 Setting of the excitation ratio NOTES When excitation ratio is reduced output torque startup is less responsive The setting of Pr 854 is invalid if Pr 858 Terminal 4 function assignment or Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment is set to 1 flux command according to terminal Sensorless Sensorless Sensorless Sensorless Sensorless ...

Page 398: ...ent loop integral time to set the integral time of current controllers for the d axis and the q axis If the setting value is small it produces current fluctuation toward disturbance decreasing time until it returns to original current value Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 824 G213 Torque control P gain 1 current loop proportional gain 100 0 to 500 The proportional gain of the curre...

Page 399: ...hange increment amount setting P E201 Pr 295 5 208 To use the regeneration unit to increase the motor braking torque Regenerative brake selection P E300 P G107 Pr 30 Pr 70 5 713 To change the overload current rating specification Multiple rating setting P E301 Pr 570 5 209 To input a voltage between 480 V and 500 V Input voltage mode selection P E302 Pr 977 5 211 To prevent parameter rewriting Par...

Page 400: ... 759 800 to 859 900 to 959 1000 to 1059 1100 to 1159 1200 to 1259 1300 to 1359 1400 to 1459 1500 to 1559 1600 to 1659 1700 to 1759 1800 to 1859 1900 to 1959 2000 to 2059 2100 to 2159 2200 to 2259 2300 to 2359 Set the hour and minute using the 24 hour clock 1000 and 100 digits 0 to 23 hours 10 and 1 digits 0 to 59 minutes For 23 59 set 2359 NOTES The clock s count up data is saved in the inverter s...

Page 401: ...t the clock of FR LU08 use the FR LU08 and set Pr 1006 to Pr 1008 I003015E Fig 5 76 Synchronization of internal clock with FR LU08 clock NOTES Time adjustment between the inverter internal clock and the FR LU08 is performed every one minute When the FR LU08 clock is initialized after the battery is exhausted for example the inverter inter nal clock is valid PREV NEXT SET STOP PU Hz 0 00 Hz Out 1 0...

Page 402: ...d E101 Disconnected PU detection 0 0 Operation continues even when the PU is disconnected 1 The inverter output is shut off when the PU is disconnected E102 PU stop selection 1 0 Decelerates to a stop when the STOP key is pressed in PU operation mode only 1 Decelerates to a stop when the STOP key for PU is pressed in any of the PU external and communication operation modes E107 Reset limit 0 0 Res...

Page 403: ...al RES is input during operation the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output Also the cumulative values of electronic thermal O L relay and regener ative brake duty are cleared The input of the PU reset key is only enabled when the protective function is activated regardless of the P E100 and Pr 75 settings NOTES When the PU has been disconnected since before power ON the ...

Page 404: ...and 114 to 117 if an electronic thermal O L relay or an overcurrent protective function E THM E THT E OC첸 is activated while one of them has been already activated within 3 minutes the inverter will not accept any reset command RES signal etc for about 3 minutes from the second activation The reset limit function is available with the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher I00...

Page 405: ...t signal is being input Doing so will cause a sudden start of the motor which is dangerous Parameters referred to Pr 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence page 5 318 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 271 Pr 250 Stop selection page 5 447 Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection page 5 282 ...

Page 406: ...e setting value lowers the contrast The above parameter is displayed as a simple mode parameter only when the LCD operation panel FR LU08 and the parameter unit FR PU07 is connected Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 145 E103 PU display language selection 1 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish 5 Italian 6 Swedish 7 Finnish Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 99...

Page 407: ...USB connector connector A the USB host error can be can celed without performing an inverter reset Parameter copy refer to page 5 740 and the trace function refer to page 5 610 can be used when a USB device such as a USB memory is connected to the USB connector connector A When a device such as a USB charger is connected to the USB connector and an excessive current 500 mA or higher flows USB host...

Page 408: ...5 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 161 E200 Frequency setting key lock operation selection 0 0 Setting dial frequency setting mode Key lock mode disabled 1 Setting dial potentiometer mode 10 Setting dial frequency setting mode Key lock mode enabled 11 Setting dial potentiometer mode NOTES If the display changes from flickering 60 00 to 0 00 the setting value of Pr 161 may not be 1 T...

Page 409: ...When setting dial and key operations are disabled appears on the operation panel If setting dial or key operation is attempted while dial and key operations are disabled appears When a setting dial or key operation is not performed for 2 s the monitor display appears To enable the setting dial and key operation again press MODE key for 2 s NOTES Even if setting dial and key operations are disabled...

Page 410: ...hange increment amount setting 0 0 Function invalid 0 01 The minimum change width when the set frequency is changed with the setting dial can be set 0 10 1 00 10 00 I002549E Fig 5 78 Magnitude when parameter 295 is set to 1 00 NOTES When machine speed display is selected in Pr 37 Speed display the minimum increments of change are determined by Pr 295 as well Note that the setting value may differ ...

Page 411: ...erature 50 C Pr Name Pr 570 setting Refer to page 0 1 2 Initial value 3 0 Torque boost 5 688 7 Acceleration time 5 241 8 Deceleration time 5 241 9 Electronic thermal O L relay SLD rated current LD rated current ND rated current HD rated current 5 303 12 DC injection brake operation voltage 5 701 22 Stall prevention operation level 110 120 150 200 5 90 5 325 48 Second stall prevention operation lev...

Page 412: ... 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 8 s 0 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 12 0 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Tab 5 74 Initial values of Pr 0 Pr 7 Pr 8 and Pr 12 depending on Pr 570 setting Pr Setting Pr 570 setting R...

Page 413: ... Use this function to pre vent parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation Pr 77 can be set at any time regardless of the operation mode or operation status Setting through communication is unavailable Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 977 E302 Input voltage mode selection 0 0 400 V class voltage protection level 1 500 V class voltage protection level NOTES Stand alone opti...

Page 414: ...meter 134 PID differential time 891 to 899 Energy saving monitor 158 AM terminal function selection C0 900 FM CA terminal calibration 160 User group read selection C1 901 AM terminal calibration 232 to 239 Multi speed setting speed 8 to speed 15 C8 930 Current output bias signal 240 Soft PWM operation selection C9 930 Current output bias current 241 Analog input display unit switchover C10 931 Cur...

Page 415: ... value stop the operation Pr Name Pr Name 22 Stall prevention operation level 345 346 DeviceNet communication 75 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection 496 497 Remote output 77 Parameter write selection 656 to 659 Analog remote output 79 Operation mode selection 805 Torque command value RAM 160 User group read selection 806 Torque command value RAM EEPROM 296 Password lock lev...

Page 416: ...ction 178 to 196 Input and output terminal function selection 699 Input terminal filter 248 Self power management selection 702 Maximum motor frequency 254 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 706 707 711 712 717 721 724 725 PM motor tuning 261 Power failure stop selection 738 to 746 Second PM motor tuning 289 Inverter output terminal filter 747 Second motor low speed range torque characteristic se...

Page 417: ...ction refer to page 5 282 This restricts parameter access from the command source that can write a parameter under the Network operation mode initially the RS 485 terminals or a communication option For the NET operation mode command source selection refer to page 5 282 Read write is enabled only for the simple mode parameters registered in the user group when Pr 160 9999 Pr 296 and Pr 297 are alw...

Page 418: ...he parameters are returned to their initial values Writea four digitnumber 1000to 9998 in Pr 297asa password WritingisdisabledwhenPr 296 9999 When a password is registered parameter reading writing is restricted with the restric tion level set in Pr 296 until unlocking Pr 296 setting Password unlock error restriction Pr 297 display 0 to 6 99 No restriction Always displays 0 100 to 106 199 Restrict...

Page 419: ...parameter clear cannot be performed during the operation During the conditions where parameter reading is disabled Pr 296 any of 0 4 5 99 100 104 105 or 199 do not use FR Configurator2 It may not operate correctly The password unlocking method differs between the operation panel parameter unit RS 485 communication and communication option For the parameter clear and parameter all clear methods for...

Page 420: ...9 Pr 296 9999 Pr 297 0 to 4 read value Pr 296 100 to 106 199 Pr 297 5 read value Pr 296 Read Write Pr 297 Read Write Parameter clear execution All parameter clear execution Parameter copy execution Enabled Disabled Tab 5 80 Parameter operation during password lock unlock NOTES When Pr 296 4 5 104 or 105 password lock the setting screen for PU JOG frequency is not displayed in the parameter unit FR...

Page 421: ...matically Users do not have to consider each parameter num ber Automatic parameter setting mode The read value is always 9999 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 888 E420 Free parameter 1 9999 0 to 9999 Any value can be input The settings are retained even if the inverter power is turned OFF 889 E421 Free parameter 2 9999 0 to 9999 NOTE Pr 888 and Pr 889 do not influence the operation ...

Page 422: ... parameters for the GOT connection with RS 485 terminals Controller Type in GOT FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO 12 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with a PU connector Controller Type in GOT FREQROL 800 Automatic Negotiation AUTO GOT Write 2 13 Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT connection with RS 485 terminals Controller Type in ...

Page 423: ... 4 774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 9999 9999 52 5 344 775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 9999 9999 53 776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 9999 9999 54 C42 934 PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0 5 562 C44 935 PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100 1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0 1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100 3 step monitor set...

Page 424: ...tting Refer to page 5 685 Initial setting with the GOT1000 series Set Pr 999 10 to configure the GOT initial setting Pr Name Initial value Pr 999 10 Pr 999 12 Refer to page 79 Operation mode selection 0 1 1 5 271 118 PU communication speed 192 192 1152 5 635 119 PU communication stop bit length 1 10 0 120 PU communication parity check 2 1 1 121 Number of PU communication retries 1 9999 9999 122 PU...

Page 425: ...l setting with the GOT1000 series Set Pr 999 10 to configure the GOT initial setting Pr Name Initial value Pr 999 11 Pr 999 13 Refer to page 79 Operation mode selection 0 0 1 5 271 332 RS 485 communication speed 96 192 1152 5 635 333 RS 485 communication stop bit length 1 10 0 334 RS 485 communication parity check selection 2 1 1 335 RS 485 communication retry count 1 9999 9999 336 RS 485 communic...

Page 426: ...z 60 Hz 50 Hz 263 Subtraction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 599 266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 292 505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 341 808 Forward rotation speed limit speed limit 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 5 142 C14 918 Terminal 1 gain frequency speed...

Page 427: ...gistered parameters set Pr 172 9999 NOTES When a plug in option is installed on the inverter the option parameters can also be read Every parameter can be read regardless of the Pr 160 setting when reading parameters via a com munication option When reading the parameters using the RS 485 terminals all parameters can be read regardless of the Pr 160 setting by setting Pr 550 NET mode operation com...

Page 428: ... to display Parameter registration Turn until Pr 3 appears Press to register the parameter and flicker alternately To continue adding parameters repeat steps and Tab 5 88 When registering Pr 3 to user group Operation Power ON Make sure the motor is stopped Changing the operation mode Press to choose the PU operation mode PU indicator is lit Parameter setting mode Press to select the parameter sett...

Page 429: ... than 9999 Parameters referred to Pr 15 Jog frequency page 5 296 Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time page 5 296 Pr 77 Parameter write selection page 5 211 Pr 296 Password lock level page 5 215 Pr 297 Password lock unlock page 5 215 Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection page 5 282 Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection page 5 282 Pr 991 PU contrast adjustment page 5 204...

Page 430: ...lter MT BSL BSC set Pr 72 25 2 5 kHz FR A820 03800 75K or higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher Soft PWM control Pr 240 Soft PWM control is a control method that changes the motor noise from a metallic sound into an inoffensive complex tone Setting Pr 240 1 will enable the Soft PWM control To enable the Soft PWM control for the FR A820 03160 55K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower set Pr 72 to 5 ...

Page 431: ...higher inverter rated current reduces the carrier frequency automatically 1 LD Without carrier frequency automatic reduction Perform continuous operation with the carrier frequency set to 2 kHz or lower or with less than 85 of the inverter rated current 2 ND 3 HD Without carrier frequency automatic reduction Without carrier frequency automatic reduction Perform continuous operation with the carrie...

Page 432: ...pacitor main circuit capacitor cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit have reached the life alarm output level Read only 256 E701 Inrush current limit circuit life display 100 0 to 100 Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush current limit circuit Read only 257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display 100 0 to 100 Displays the deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor R...

Page 433: ...s is reached Pr 255 bit 3 is turned ON and also a warning is output to the Y90 signal Pr 255 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 Pr 255 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 Decimal Binary Deci mal Binary 15 1111 31 1111 14 1110 30 1110 13 1101 29 1101 12 1100 28 1100 11 1011 27 1011 10 1010 26 1010 9 1001 25 1001 8 1000 24 1000 7 0111 23 0111 6 0110 22 0110 5 0101 21 0101 4 0100 20 0100 3 0011 19 0011 2 0010 18 0010 1 0001 1...

Page 434: ...d ON and also a warning is output to the Y90 signal Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration degree of the capacitor capacity Check that the motor is connected and at a stop Set 1 measuring start in Pr 259 Switch the power OFF The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the inverter is OFF After confirm...

Page 435: ...motor is running coasting The motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more The inverter is tripped or a fault occurred while the power was OFF The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal The start command is given while measuring The applied motor setting is incorrect Operation environment surrounding air temperature annual average of 40 C free from corro sive ...

Page 436: ...rminal used for the LF signal set 98 positive logic or 198 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection NOTES When the inverter is mounted with two ore more cooling fans FN is displayed with one or more fans with speed of 50 or less Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameter...

Page 437: ...unction selection Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 503 E710 Maintenance timer 1 0 0 1 to 9998 Displays the inverter s cumulative energization time in increments of 100 h read only Writing the setting of 0 clears the cumulative energization time while Pr 503 1 to 9998 Writing is disabled when Pr 503 0 504 E711 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 9999 0 to 9998 Set the time un...

Page 438: ... they are displayed in the priority of MT1 MT2 MT3 The cumulative energization time is counted every hour Energization time of less than 1 h is not counted Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal func...

Page 439: ... the FR A820 03160 55K or lower and FR A840 01800 55K or lower Initial value for the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K and higher I002551E Fig 5 81 Monitoring the maintenance timer and current average value Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 555 E720 Current average time 1 s 0 1 to 1 s Set the time for calculating the average current during start pulse output 1 s 556 E...

Page 440: ...t average value is less than 10 of the set ting value in Pr 557 the output time is 0 5 s and when it is more than 180 the output time is 9 s For example when Pr 557 10 A and the output current average value is 15 A 15 A 10 A 5 s 7 5 s thus the current average value monitor signal is Low output in 7 5 s intervals I001265E Fig 5 82 Output of the pulse signal Y93 Output current average value 5 s Outp...

Page 441: ...f the output current value inverter output current monitor is 0 A at the completion of the 1 cycle signal output no signal is output until the next constant speed state Under the following conditions the Y93 signal is output with Low output in 20 s intervals no data output When acceleration or deceleration is operating at the completion of the 1 cycle signal output When automatic restart after ins...

Page 442: ...0 Parameters referred to Pr 57 Restart coasting time page 5 581 page 5 590 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 378 Pr 503 Maintenance timer 1 page 5 235 Pr 686 Maintenance timer 2 page 5 235 Pr 688 Maintenance timer 3 page 5 235 ...

Page 443: ...59 5 261 To set optimum acceleration deceleration time automatically Automatic acceleration deceleration P F500 P F510 to P F513 Pr 61 to Pr 63 Pr 292 5 263 To set V F pattern for lift automatically Lift operation Automatic acceleration deceleration P F500 P F510 P F520 Pr 61 Pr 64 Pr 292 5 268 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description FM CA 20 F000 Acceleration deceleration reference freque...

Page 444: ...cceleration time in a low speed range less than 10 of the rated motor frequency 9999 The acceleration time set in Pr 7 is applied While RT signal or X9 signal is ON the second or third function is enabled 792 F071 Deceleration time in low speed range 9999 0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time in a low speed range less than 10 of the rated motor frequency 9999 The deceleration time set in Pr 8 is a...

Page 445: ...cceleration time setting Pr 20 Acceleration time from stop status to maximum frequency Maximum frequency Pr 13 Example For example the following calculation is performed to find the setting value for Pr 7 when increas ing the output frequency to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 s with Pr 20 60 Hz initial value and Pr 13 0 5 Hz Pr 7 60 Hz 10 s 50 Hz 0 5 Hz 12 1 s Fig 5 86 Acceleration decelerat...

Page 446: ...r 8 when increasing the output frequency to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 s with Pr 20 120 Hz and Pr 10 3 Hz Pr 8 120 Hz 10 s 50 Hz 3 Hz 25 5 s NOTES If the acceleration deceleration time is set the actual motor acceleration deceleration time can not be made shorter than the shortest acceleration deceleration time determined by the mechan ical system J moment of inertia and motor torque If ...

Page 447: ...g frequency setting the acceleration deceleration time switches to the Pr 44 Pr 45 when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr 10 or Pr 13 setting Switching frequency for each control method Pr 147 setting Acceleration deceleration time Description 9999 initial value Pr 7 Pr 8 Acceleration deceleration time is not automatically changed 0 00 Hz Pr 44 Pr 45 Second acceleration deceleration t...

Page 448: ... The RT and X9 signals can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr 178 to Pr 189 input ter minal function selection Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal The RT X9 signal acts as the second third function selection signal and makes the other second third functions valid Refer to page 5 445 RT signal is assig...

Page 449: ... Setting the acceleration deceleration time in the low speed range NOTE The X92 signals can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 3 Base frequency page 5 690 Pr 10 DC injection brake operation fr...

Page 450: ...equency 1 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the stopping frequency and time during backlash measures Valid by backlash measures Pr 29 3 141 F201 Backlash acceleration stopping time 0 5 s 0 to 360 s 142 F202 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 1 Hz 0 to 590 Hz 143 F203 Backlash deceleration stopping time 0 5 s 0 to 360 s 380 F300 Acceleration S pattern 1 0 0 to 50 Set the time for drawing the S pattern from ...

Page 451: ... Hz fb base frequency rated motor frequency Reference 0 Hz to set frequency of acceleration deceleration time when Pr 3 60 Hz S pattern acceleration deceleration B Pr 29 2 This is useful for preventing collapsing stacks such as on a conveyor S pattern acceleration deceleration B can reduce the impact during acceleration deceleration by accelerating deceler ating while maintaining an S pattern from...

Page 452: ...4 Pr 380 to Pr 383 Switch the acceleration deceleration curve by the S pattern acceleration deceleration C switcho ver X20 signal To input the X20 signal set 20 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal function selection to assign the function to the terminal Fig 5 93 Anti backlash measure function I002559E_B NOTE Setting the backlash measures increases the acceleration deceleration time by the s...

Page 453: ... Parameter setting I001552E NOTES At a start the motor starts at Pr 13 Starting frequency when the start signal turns ON If there is a difference between the speed command and speed at a start of deceleration due to torque limit operation etc the speed command is matched with the speed to make deceleration Change the X20 signal after the speed becomes constant S pattern operation before switching ...

Page 454: ...ime when starting the inverter by selecting S pattern acceleration deceleration D from a stop to 60 Hz as shown below with the initial parame ter settings I001554E Fig 5 97 Actual acceleration time when starting Set acceleration time T1 Set frequency Pr 13 Pr 7 Pr 20 60 Hz 0 5 Hz 5 s 60 Hz 4 96 s actual acceleration time at linear acceleration Actual acceleration time T2 Set acceleration time T1 P...

Page 455: ...acceleration deceleration time such as Pr 7 and Pr 8 is set to 0 s under Real sensorless vector control vector control and PM sensorless vector control with MM CF and Pr 788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection 9999 initial value linear acceleration and decel eration are performed for the S pattern acceleration deceleration A to D and backlash measures Pr 29 1 to 5 Set linear accelerati...

Page 456: ...ing is prioritized and the inverter operates as Pr 14 0 constant torque load For the variable torque acceleration deceleration time setting set the time period to reach Pr 3 Base frequency Not the time period to reach Pr 20 Acceleration deceleration reference fre quency The variable torque acceleration deceleration is disabled during PM sensorless vector control Linear acceleration deceleration is...

Page 457: ... 59 0 remote setting function valid the functions of the RH RM and RL signals are changed to acceleration RH deceleration RM and clear RL Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description RH RM RL signal function Frequency setting storage function Deceleration to the frequency lower than the set frequency 59 F101 Restart cushion time 0 0 Multi speed setting Disabled 1 Remote setting With 2 Remote se...

Page 458: ...eration mode frequency I002563E Fig 5 101 Example of the remote setting function I002564E Fig 5 102 Acceleration deceleration operation NOTE While the RT signal is OFF Pr 44 Second acceleration deceleration time and Pr 45 Second deceleration time are used as the set frequency accelerating decelerating time at turn ON of the acceleration deceleration signal If the Pr 7 and Pr 8 settings are longer ...

Page 459: ...e latest frequency is different from the previous one when comparing the two This cannot be written with RL signals Clearing the settings WhenPr 59 1 2 11 12 andtheclearsignal RL isturnedON theremotely setfrequencyiscleared When Pr 59 3 13 and the STF STR signal is turned OFF the remotely set frequency is cleared NOTE When switching the start signal from ON to OFF or changing frequency by the RH o...

Page 460: ...oth the RH and RM signals E CAUTION When using the remote setting function set the maximum frequency again according to the machine Parameters referred to Pr 1 Maximum frequency page 5 321 Pr 18 High speed maximum frequency page 5 321 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 241 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 241 Pr 44 Second acceleration deceleration time page 5 241 Pr 45 Second deceleration time page 5 241 ...

Page 461: ...n performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive at a start Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 13 F102 Starting frequency 0 5 Hz 0 to 60 Hz Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned ON 571 F103 Holding time at a start 9999 0 to 10 s Set the holding time of Pr 13 9999 The holding function at a start is invalid Fig 5 103 Starting frequency parameter I002566E ...

Page 462: ...is started at that point At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation the starting frequency is valid but the start time hold function is invalid E CAUTION Note that when Pr 13 is set to any value equal to or lower than Pr 2 Minimum frequency simply turning ON the start signal will run the motor at the frequency set in Pr 2 even if the command frequency is not input Parameters referr...

Page 463: ...e Initial value Setting range Description 13 F102 Starting frequency Minimum frequency Minimum rotations per minute 0 to 60 Hz Set the frequency where the motor starts running 571 F103 Holding time at a start 9999 0 to 10 s Set the time to hold 0 01 Hz 9999 The holding function at start is disabled Fig 5 105 Starting frequency parameter I002568E NOTES Under induction motor control under V F contro...

Page 464: ...ed Pr 788 9999 Fig 5 106 Function of start time hold function I002832E E CAUTION Note that when Pr 13 is set to any value equal to or lower than Pr 2 Minimum frequency simply turning ON the start signal will run the motor at the frequency set in Pr 2 even if the command frequency is not input Parameters referred to Pr 2 Minimum frequency page 5 321 Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 241 STF 0 60 Output...

Page 465: ... page 5 268 7 8 Brake sequence 1 2 Refer to page 5 501 61 F510 Reference current 9999 0 to 500 A Set the reference current during shortest optimum acceleration deceleration 0 to 3600 A 9999 Rated output current value reference of the inverter 62 F511 Reference value at acceleration 9999 0 to 220 Set the speed limit value optimum value during shortest optimum acceleration 9999 Shortest acceleration...

Page 466: ...tion level during acceleration deceleration becomes 150 adjustable using Pr 61 to Pr 63 The setting of Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level and stall level by analog input are used only during a constant speed operation Under Real sensorless vector control and vector control the torque limit level Pr 22 etc is applied during acceleration deceleration The adjustments by Pr 61 to Pr 63 are disable...

Page 467: ...erative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop E OV3 occurs during deceler ation the setting of Pr 8 is multiplied by 1 4 Parameter storage The optimum values of Pr 0 Pr 7 and Pr 8 are written to both the parameter RAM and EEPROM only three times of acceleration deceleration after the optimum acceleration deceleration has been selected or after the power is switched ON or the inverter is res...

Page 468: ...eration is enabled Because of the learning method the impact of the optimum acceleration deceleration is not apparent in the first operation after setting to the optimum acceleration deceleration mode The optimum value are calculated for only acceleration from 0 to 30 Hz or higher or deceleration from 30 Hz or higher to 0 Hz The optimum acceleration deceleration will not operate if the motor was n...

Page 469: ...eration 0 to 400 Set this when changing the reference level of acceleration and deceleration Shortest acceleration deceleration Set the stall prevention operation level percentage of current value of Pr 61 during acceleration deceleration Optimum acceleration deceleration Set the optimum current level percentage of current value of Pr 61 during acceleration deceleration 63 Reference value at decel...

Page 470: ...celeration 0 0 Normal operation 1 Shortest acceleration deceleration without brakes Refer to page 5 263 11 Shortest acceleration deceleration with brakes 3 Optimum acceleration deceleration 5 Lift operation 1 stall prevention operation level 150 6 Lift operation 2 stall prevention operation level 180 7 8 Brake sequence 1 2 Refer to page 5 501 61 F510 Reference current 9999 0 to 500 A Set the refer...

Page 471: ...e motor capacity and inverter capacity differ etc Set the reference current A of the stall prevention operation level 0 to 3600 A 9999 initial value The rated inverter output current value is the reference 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 0 to 10 Hz Set the starting frequency for the lift operation 9999 initial value Starting frequency is 2 Hz NOTES Even if the lift operation has been selec...

Page 472: ...To prevent motor from rotating reversely Reverse rotation prevention selection P D020 Pr 78 5 291 To change the setting resolution of speed Set resolution switchover P D030 Pr 811 5 341 To change the setting resolution of torque limit Set resolution switchover P D030 Pr 811 5 341 To set the frequency by pulse train input Pulse train input P D100 P D101 P D110 P D111 Pr 291 Pr 384 to Pr 386 5 292 T...

Page 473: ...eration mode NET operation mode 5 274 Operation mode Frequency command Start command 1 PU operation mode fixed Operation panel or parameter unit FWD or REV key on operation panel or parameter unit PU operation mode 5 275 2 External operation mode fixed The operation can be performed by switching between the External and NET operation modes External signal input terminal 2 and 4 JOG multi speed sel...

Page 474: ...peration mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code I002570E Fig 5 108 Operation modes of the inverter NOTES There are two settings of 3 and 4 with PU External combined operation The startup method differs according to the setting value In the initial setting the stop function PU stop selection by the operation panel or the parameter unit is effective ...

Page 475: ...Frequency setting terminal ON 앫 Start command STF STR ON PU digital setting STF forward rotation STR reverse rotation Refer to page 5 447 Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation 1 앫 Frequency setting DU digital setting 앫 Start command STF STR ON Communication RS 485 terminals STF forward rotation STR reverse rotation Refer to page 5 447 RS 485 terminals Refer to page 5 622 Pr 338 1 Pr 340 1 2 앫 Fre...

Page 476: ...eration 2 앫 Frequency setting Frequency setting terminal ON 앫 Start command FWD REV key ON PU digital setting Pr 79 1 PU operation mode fixed 앫 Frequency setting Digital setting 앫 Start command FWD REV key ON Communication RS 485 terminals communication option N A Communication RS 485 terminals External terminal 2 and 4 JOG multi speed etc RS 485 terminals Refer to page 5 622 Terminal 2 and 4 anal...

Page 477: ... logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function PU External combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 Select the PU External combined operation mode 1 when applying a frequency command from the operation panel or the parameter unit and inputting a start command with the external start switches Set 3 in Pr 79 The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes Wh...

Page 478: ... continued 앫 For the setting frequency the setting of the potentiometer frequency command is continued Note however that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset External operation NET operation The switchover command to the Network operation mode is transmitted via communication 앫 As the direction of rotation the direction that was active by External opera...

Page 479: ...on of the X12 signal Operating status X12 MRS signal Operation mode Operating status Switching to PU or NET operation mode Operation mode Status PU NET During a stop ON OFF External If frequency and start commands are input from external source the inverter runs by those commands Not available Running ON OFF Not available External During a stop OFF ON External During a stop Available ON OFF Not av...

Page 480: ...gnal X65 to a terminal When the X65 signal is ON the PU operation mode is selected When the X65 signal is OFF the Network operation mode is selected Pr 79 setting X16 signal status and operation mode Remarks ON External OFF PU 0 initial value External operation mode PU operation mode Switching among the External PU and NET operation modes is enabled 1 PU operation mode PU operation mode fixed 2 Ex...

Page 481: ...al Pr 340 setting Pr 79 setting X65 signal state Remarks ON PU OFF NET 10 12 0 initial value PUoperationmode NET operation mode 1 PU operation mode PU operation mode fixed 2 NET operation mode NET operation mode fixed 3 4 External PU combined operation mode External PU combined operation mode fixed 6 PUoperationmode NET operation mode Switching between operation modes is enabled while running 7 X1...

Page 482: ... 75 Reset selection disconnected PU detection PU stop selection page 5 200 Pr 161 Frequency setting key lock operation selection page 5 206 Pr 178 to Pr 182 input terminal function selection page 5 439 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 378 Pr 340 Communication startup mode selection page 5 280 Pr 550 NET mode operation command source selection page 5 282 Pr Name Initial va...

Page 483: ...External and NET operation modes is enabled Switching to PU operation mode is disabled 3 4 External PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching is disabled 6 External operation mode Switching among the External PU and NET operation mode is enabled while running 7 X12 MRS signal ONExternal operation mode Switching among the External PU and NET operation modes is enabled X12 MRS signal OFF E...

Page 484: ...0 D012 NET mode operation command source selection 9999 0 The communication option is the command source when in the NET operation mode 1 The RS 485 terminals are the command source when in the NET operation mode FR A800 E For manufacturer setting Do not set 5 FR A800 E The Ethernet connector is the command source when in the NET operation mode 9999 Communication option is recognized automatically...

Page 485: ...ce in the PU operation mode Set Pr 551 1 to use communication connected to the RS 485 terminals to write parameters or execute start and frequency commands in the PU operation mode For FR A800 E In the PU operation mode set Pr 551 5 to write parameters or input the start and frequency commands via the Ethernet connector Set Pr 551 3 or 9999 to use the USB connector NOTE In the initial setting 9999...

Page 486: ...value PU operation mode PU operation mode NET operation mode 1 1 PU operation mode Switching to NET opera tion mode disabled 2 PU operation mode NET operation mode 3 PU operation mode NET operation mode 9999 initial value PU operation mode PU operation mode NET operation mode 5 2 PU operation mode NET operation mode 3 PU operation mode NET operation mode 5 PU operation mode Switching to NET opera ...

Page 487: ... 9999 automatic recognition without USB connection Operation start command Operation stop command Δ Δ Δ Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter reset Other than the above Operation start command Operation stop command Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter reset Control by communica tion via RS 485 terminals 1 RS 485 terminals Oper...

Page 488: ...lected Operation command start stop Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter reset Communica tion option via communica tion Operation command start stop Running frequency Monitor Parameter writing Parameter read Inverter reset External terminal at the control circuit Inverter reset Operation command start stop Frequency setting Valid Invalid Δ Partially valid Not availab...

Page 489: ...g and the operating condition Refer to page 5 211 Some parameters are write enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence absence Writing is also enabled when Pr 77 2 Refer to page 5 211 Parameter clear is disabled WhenPr 550 NETmodeoperationcommandsourceselection 1 RS 485terminalsenabled or Pr 550 9999 with no communication option connected FR A800 E When Pr 550 NET mode...

Page 490: ...ly FR A800 E Not available Fault record Conditions Pr 551 setting Operation in each operation mode at error occurrences PU operation External operation External PU combined operation mode 1 Pr 79 3 External PU combined operation mode 2 Pr 79 4 NET operation when RS 485 terminals areused NET operation when the Ethernet connectoris used NET operation when communica tion option is used Inverter fault...

Page 491: ...tion 1 NET External Pr 270 1 3 11 or 13 stop on contact 4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Combined Combined 5 JOG Jog operation selection External 6 CS Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start External 7 OH External thermal relay input External 8 REX 15 speed selection NET External NET External Pr 59 0 multi speed 9 X9 Third function selection NET External 10 X10...

Page 492: ...T External 62 RES Inverter reset External 64 X64 During retry NET External NET External 65 X65 PU NET operation switchover External 66 X66 External NET operation switchover External 67 X67 Command source switchover External 68 NP Simple position pulse train sign External 69 CLR Simple position droop pulse clear External 70 X70 DC feeding operation permission NET External 71 X71 DC feeding cancel N...

Page 493: ... Pr 550 and Pr 551 settings The Pr 338 and Pr 339 settings can be changed while the inverter is running when Pr 77 2 Note that the setting change is applied after the inverter has stopped Until the inverter has stopped communication operation command source and communication speed command source before the setting change are valid X67 signal state Start command source Speed command source Signal n...

Page 494: ... be input Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description FM CA 291 D100 Pulse train I O selection 0 Pulse train input terminal JOG Pulse train output terminal FM 0 JOG signal FM output 1 Pulse train input FM output 10 JOG signal High speed pulse train output 50 duty 11 Pulse train input High speed pulse train output 50 duty 20 JOG signal High speed pulse train output ON width fixed 21 Pulse train...

Page 495: ...Connection with a complementary output system pulse generator I002573E_G Fig 5 114 Pulse train input Wiring length Less than 10 m 10 to 50 m 50 to 100 m Pull up down resistance Not required 1 kΩ 470 Ω Load current reference 10 mA 35 mA 65 mA Tab 5 115 Resistance values for pull up and pull down resistances I002574E_G Pulse generator output NOTES When pulse train input is selected the function assi...

Page 496: ...en pulse train input is zero and at 30 Hz when pulse train is 4000 pulses sec set the inverter as follows Pr 384 10 maximum number of input pulses 4000 pulses s Pr 385 0 Hz Pr 386 30 Hz pulse train limit value 33 Hz Item Specification Supported pulse method Open collector output Complementary output 24 V power supply voltage HIGH input level 20 V or more voltage between JOG and SD LOW input level ...

Page 497: ...rs that receive pulse train since the maximum pulse train output is 50k pulses s The maximum number of input pulses should be 50k pulses s When performing synchronized operation wire according to the following procedure This is to prevent contact input of 24 V from being applied to the terminal FM Set pulse train output setting other than 0 1 to Pr 291 on the master side inverter Turn the inverter...

Page 498: ... User group read selection Refer to page 5 224 The Pr 20 initial value is set to 60 Hz for the FM type and to 50 Hz for the CA type Item Specification Output pulse format Pulse width fixed 10 μs Pulse rate 0 to 50 kpps Pulse propagation delay 1 to 2 μs 1 unit Tab 5 118 Speed synchronized operation specification Parameters referred to Pr 291 Pulse train output page 5 358 Pr 419 Position command sou...

Page 499: ...GF signal is input and the rotation is reverse while the JOGR signal is input Use Pr 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time to set the acceleration deceleration time during JOG operation For each signal refer to the following table and assign the function by Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection JOG operation in PU When the operation panel or parameter unit is in the JOG operation mode...

Page 500: ...arted by one push of FWD REV key on the operation panel and stopped by STOP RESET key This function is invalid when Pr 79 3 Under the position control when the position command speed creation is completed and the droop pulse is within in position width the external JOG operation can be operated The JOG operation cannot be performed from PU When the JOGR or STR signal is input while the JOGF signal...

Page 501: ...when RM is ON 6 D303 Multi speed setting low speed 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RL is ON 24 D304 Multi speed setting speed 4 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 Frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set according to the combination of the RH RM RL and REX signals 9999 Not selected 25 D305 Multi speed setting speed 5 26 D306 Multi speed setting speed 6 27 D307 Multi speed setting speed 7 232...

Page 502: ...g when two or more of multi speed settings are simultaneously selected prior ity is given to the set frequency of the lower signal For example when RH and RM signals turn ON RM signal Pr 5 has a higher priority The RH RM and RL signals are assigned to the terminals RH RM and RL in the initial status Set 0 RL 1 RM and 2 RH in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the s...

Page 503: ...o priority among them When Pr 59 Remote function selection 0 the multi speed setting is invalid since the RH RM and RL signals are for remote setting When performing analog input compensation set Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selec tion to 1 Select the terminals terminals 1 2 to use for compensation input voltage 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V at Pr 73 Analog input selection When using terminal 1 for c...

Page 504: ... activated Retry operation P H300 to P H303 Pr 65 Pr 67 to Pr 69 5 318 To set the upper and lower limits of the output frequency Maximum minimum frequency P H400 to P H402 Pr 1 Pr 2 Pr 18 5 321 To prevent the motor from overspeeding under torque control Speed limit P H410 to P H412 Pr 807 to Pr 809 5 142 To avoid overdriving the motor during speed control Overdriving prevention P H415 to P H417 Pr...

Page 505: ...on frequency 3 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 607 H006 Motor permissible load level 150 110 to 150 Set the permissible load according to the motor characteristics 51 H010 Second electronic thermal O L relay 9999 0 to 500 A Enabled when the RT signal is ON Set the rated motor current 0 to 3600 A 9999 Second electronic thermal O L relay invalid 692 H011 Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 9999 0 to 590...

Page 506: ... the inverter rated current It is not the percentage to the rated motor current When the electronic thermal O L relay of the Mitsubishi constant torque motor is set the charac teristic curve is as shown in this diagram at 6 Hz or higher For selection of the operation characteristic refer to page 5 451 Transistor protection is activated depending on the temperature of the heatsink The protection ma...

Page 507: ...he line to line leak age current Refer to page 3 1 The cooling effect of the motor drops during low speed opera tion Use a thermal protector or a motor with built in thermistor The protective characteristic of the electronic thermal O L relay is degraded when there is a large difference in capacity between the inverter and motor and when the set value is small In such case use an external thermal ...

Page 508: ...a the area right of the characteristic curve Normal operation area the area left of the characteristic curve I002580E Fig 5 122 Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic MM CF NOTES The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter s power reset and reset signal input Avoid unnecessary reset and power OFF Whe...

Page 509: ...r No 2 Motor No 1 motor No 2 motor 9999 0 9999 0 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ 9999 Other than 0 9999 0 Δ 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ Δ Other than 9999 0 9999 0 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ Other than 9999 Other than 0 9999 Δ Δ 0 Δ 0 01 to 500 0 1 to 3600 Δ Δ Values are accumulated by using the output current Δ Values are accumulated by assuming the output current is 0 A cooling processing Electronic therm...

Page 510: ...ot shut off with the warning signal THP For the terminal used for THP signal output set 8 positive logic or 108 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function I002851E Fig 5 124 Example of motor permissible load setting when Pr 9 100 of the inverter rating I001138E Fig 5 125 Prealarm signal output NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 1...

Page 511: ...ion selection to assign the function Vector control dedicated motors SF V5RU are equipped with thermal protectors Connecttherecommended2W1kΩresistorbetweentheterminalSDandOH Refertopage2 77 When the control terminal option FR A8TP is used valid invalid setting of the terminal OH can be changed using Pr 876 Thermal protector input Fig 5 126 Connection of an external thermal relay I002582E_G I002583...

Page 512: ... it does not deviate from the protective function activating temperature TN If the Pr 561 setting becomes too close to R1 or R2 the protective function activating temperature may be too hot protection is delayed or too cold too much protection When the PTC thermistor protection is enabled Pr 561 9999 the resistance value for the PTC thermistor can be displayed on the operation panel or via RS 485 ...

Page 513: ... using terminal 2 for PTC thermistor input Pr 561 9999 the terminal 2 will not operate as an analog frequency command terminal The PID and dancer control functions assigned to the terminal 2 will be also disabled Use Pr 133 PID action set point to set the set point for the PID function To input power to the PTC thermistor power supply always use the terminal 10 Do not use any other terminals or an...

Page 514: ...3E Fig 5 131 Setting examples Fig 5 132 Overheat protection setting I002586E Fig 5 133 Overheat protection setting example I002587E NOTE Make sure to set the parameters according to the motor temperature characteristic used Parameters referred to Pr 71 Applied motor page 5 451 Pr 72 PWM frequency selection page 5 227 Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection page 5 439 Pr 190 to Pr 196 ou...

Page 515: ... aside from the E OHT E THM and E PTC the output is immediately shut off and the fault signal ALM is output To use the ER signal set 97 positive logic or 197 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 875 H030 Fault definition 0 0 Normal operation 1 Decelerates to stop at...

Page 516: ...ng fan operation command signal Y206 signal can be output when the inverter cooling fan meets the conditions for running The function can be used when the fan installed on the enclosure is synchronized with the inverter cooling fan Y206 signal indicates the operating command condition of the inverter cooling fan depending on the power supply ON OFF or the Pr 244 settings The signal does not indica...

Page 517: ...etection at start 0 0 Without the earth ground fault detection at start 1 With the earth ground fault detection at start NOTES Because of the detection performed at start the output is delayed by approximately 20 ms at every start Use Pr 249 to enable disable ground fault detection at operation start Ground faults are detected always during operation regardless of the Pr 249 setting If a smaller c...

Page 518: ...ction gener ated by the fault is not saved in the faults history Perform inverter reset to cancel the protective function For the selectable parameter by Pr 997 and the corresponding protective functions refer to page 6 10 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 997 H103 Fault initiation 9999 16 to 253 The setting range is same with the one for fault data codes of the inverter which can be...

Page 519: ...lost for 1 s continuously Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 251 H200 Output phase loss protection selection 1 0 Without output phase loss protection 1 With output phase loss protection 872 H201 Input phase loss protection selection 0 0 Without input phase loss protection 1 With input phase loss protection NOTES When several motors are connected output phase loss cannot be detected ev...

Page 520: ...ter retries Refer to the retry failure example Use Pr 68 to set the waiting time from a protective function activation to a retry in the range of 0 1 to 600 s During retry operation the during retry Y64 signal is ON For the Y64 signal set 64 positive operation or 164 negative operation in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function Pr Name Initial value Settin...

Page 521: ...For the fault details refer to page 6 10 indicates the faults selected for retry I002589E Fig 5 135 Retry success and retry failure example Tab 5 121 Errors selected for retry 0 Y64 0 Y64 Retry success Pr 68 x 4 Pr 68 If it is below 3 1s 3 1s is set Inverter output frequency Retry start Fault occurrence Retry success count Success count 1 Time Inverter output frequency Retry success example Retry ...

Page 522: ...does not clear the accumulated data of the electronic thermal O L relay regenerative brake duty etc This is different from power supply reset or reset by RES sig nal When the parameter storage device fault E PE is occurring and reading of the retry function related parameters is not possible retry cannot operated Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function sele...

Page 523: ...equency in Pr 18 the Pr 1 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in Pr 18 Also when setting a frequency in Pr 1 the Pr 18 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in Pr 1 Setting the minimum frequency Pr 2 Set Pr 2 Minimum frequency to the lower limit of the output frequency If the set frequency is Pr 2 or less the output frequency is clamped at Pr 2 will not fall below Pr 2 ...

Page 524: ...output frequency the output frequency may drop to Pr 2 or below If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr 1 Pr 18 Maximum frequency is set for the 3 point fre quency jump the maximum frequency setting is the set frequency If the set frequency is less than the jump frequency Pr 2 Minimum frequency the jump frequency is the set frequency The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower ...

Page 525: ...cy jump 1A 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 1A to 1B 2A to 2B 3A to 3B are frequency jumps 3 point jump 9999 Function disabled 32 H421 Frequency jump 1B 33 H422 Frequency jump 2A 34 H423 Frequency jump 2B 35 H424 Frequency jump 3A 36 H425 Frequency jump 3B 552 H429 Frequency jump range 9999 0 to3 0 Hz Set the jump range for the frequency jumps 6 point jump 9999 3 point jump Fig 5 137 Definition of the jump a...

Page 526: ...e error Er1 will occur Setting Pr 552 0 disables frequency jumps If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr 1 Pr 18 Maximum frequency is set for the 3 point jump the maximum frequency setting is the set frequency If the set frequency is less than the jump fre quency Pr 2 Minimum frequency the jump frequency is the set frequency The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit Exa...

Page 527: ... prevention operation frequency 0Hz 0 Second stall prevention operation disabled 0 01 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the Pr 48 stall prevention operation will start 9999 Pr 48 is enabled when RT signal is ON 114 H602 Third stall prevention operation level 150 0 Third stall prevention operation disabled 0 1 to 400 The stall prevention operation level can be changed using the X9 signal 115 H60...

Page 528: ...040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0 1 4 9999 When set 4 the stall prevention level can be changed with the signal to the terminal 4 868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 to 6 9999 When set 4 the stall prevention level can be changed with the signal to the terminal 1 I001120E Fig 5 139 Stall prevention operation example NOTES A continuous overloaded condition may activate a protective func...

Page 529: ... disabled Stall prevention operation selection enabled disabled OL signal output operation continued operation stopped Pr 156 setting Fast response current limit enabled disabled Stall prevention operation selection enabled disabled OL signal output operation continued operation stopped Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration 0 initial value 16 1 17 2 18 3...

Page 530: ...escription 0 initial value Output immediately 0 1 to 25 Output after the set time s 9999 Not output Tab 5 123 Setting of parameter 157 Fig 5 140 Output of the OL signal I002515E NOTES OL signal is assigned to the terminal OL in the initial status The OL signal can be assigned to other terminals by setting 3 positive logic or 103 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function se...

Page 531: ...66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency to 60 Hz and Pr 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed to 100 Calculation formula for stall prevention operation level When Pr 23 9999 initial value the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr 22 level up to 590 Hz Fig 5 141 Stall prevention operation level I002597E Fig 5 142 Stall prevention...

Page 532: ...led 0 01 Hz to 590 Hz The second third stall prevention function operates according to the frequency 9999 Setting not available The second stall prevention function operates according to the RT signal RT signal ON stall level Pr 48 RT signal OFF stall level Pr 22 Tab 5 124 Settings of parameter 49 and 115 I002599E Fig 5 143 Stall prevention operation level setting example NOTES When Pr 49 9999 lev...

Page 533: ...ion level at 0 V input to the current limit level when input voltage is 0 V 0 mA Set Pr 149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input to the current limit level when input voltage is 10 V 5 V 20 mA I002600E Fig 5 144 Stall prevention operation level setting by terminal 1 Pr 858 setting Pr 868 setting V F Advanced magnetic flux vector control Terminal 4 function Terminal 1 function 0 initial value 0 ini...

Page 534: ...ll prevention operation in an application with large load inertia Note that turning OFF the start signal STF STR or varying the frequency command during stall prevention operation may delay the acceleration deceleration start 4 0 initial value Stall prevention Auxiliary frequency 1 2 3 4 Stall prevention 5 Stall prevention 6 9999 9999 NOTE The fast response current limit cannot be set Pr 154 E OC첸...

Page 535: ...1482 H522 Load characteristics load reference 2 9999 1483 H523 Load characteristics load reference 3 9999 1484 H524 Load characteristics load reference 4 9999 1485 H525 Load characteristics load reference 5 9999 1486 H526 Load characteristics maximum frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the maximum frequency of the load characteristics fault detection range 1487 H527 Load characteristics minimum ...

Page 536: ...requency range for load fault detection I003026E Fig 5 145 Setting of the load characteristics and output frequency range f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 Load status Load reference 5 Pr 1485 Normal load range Output frequency Pr 1487 Lower limit warning detection width Pr 1489 Load reference 4 Pr 1484 Load reference 3 Pr 1483 Load reference 2 Pr 1482 Load reference 1 Pr 1481 Pr 1486 Lower limit fault detection wid...

Page 537: ...90 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection Setting 8888 in Pr 1481 to Pr 1485 enables fine adjustment of load characteristics When setting Pr 1481 to Pr 1485 8888 during operation the load status at that point is set in the parameter Only when the set frequency is within 2 Hz of the frequency of the measurement point and SU signal is in the ON state NOTES Perform measurement under actual envi...

Page 538: ...eleration deceleration is performed even if the S pattern acceleration deceleration is set Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal f2 f3 f4 Y213 1 2 3 4 5 0 STF Frequency Hz STF ON Pr 1480 1 SU signal Read value of Pr 1480 Operation at the set frequency Ti...

Page 539: ...hut off When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr 1491 Lower limit fault detection width the protective function E LDN is activated and the inverter output is shut off To prevent the repetitive on off operation of the signal due to load fluctuation near the detection range Pr 1492 Load status detection signal delay time load reference measurement waiting time can be used to set ...

Page 540: ...characteristics reference 3 f3 f5 f1 2 f1 35 Hz Pr 1483 30 Load characteristics reference 4 f4 f5 f1 3 4 f1 47 5 Hz Pr 1484 60 Load characteristics reference 5 f5 load characteristics maximum frequency Pr 1486 60 Hz Pr 1485 100 Tab 5 128 Setting example for load reference I003029E Fig 5 148 Reference value when the output frequency is 30 Hz NOTE When the load reference is not set for five points t...

Page 541: ...or rotation speed exceeds the speed set in Pr 374 during encoder feedback control Real sensorless vector control vector control or PM sensorless vector control Overspeed occurrence E OS occurs the inverter output is shut off 9999 If the speed exceeds the maximum speed Pr 1 Pr 18 20 Hz during encoder feedback control Real sensorless vector control or vector control E OS occurs During PM sensorless ...

Page 542: ...aving monitor P M023 P M100 P M200 to P M207 P M300 P M301 Pr 52 Pr 54 Pr 158 Pr 891 to Pr 899 5 197 To assign functions to the output terminals Output terminal function assignment P M400 to P M406 P M410 to P M412 P M431 Pr 190 to Pr 196 Pr 289 Pr 313 to Pr 315 5 378 To detect the output frequency Up to frequency sensitivity Output frequency detection Low speed detection P M440 to P M446 Pr 41 to...

Page 543: ...Pr 37 Pr 505 To display in the machine speed set Pr 37 to the machine speed at the frequency set in Pr 505 For example when Pr 505 60 Hz and Pr 37 1000 the running speed monitor will display 1000 at the running speed of 60 Hz When running frequency is 30 Hz 500 is displayed Changing the monitored value and speed setting increment Pr 811 When Pr 811 1 or 11 the speed setting for PU input and RS 485...

Page 544: ...ynchronous speed under V F control The dis played value is actual motor speed motor slip When Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control is selected the actual motor speed estimated value by motor slip calculation is used When the encoder feedback control or vector control is selected the actual motor speed from the encoder is used When Pr ...

Page 545: ...Otherwise the motor might run at extremely high speed damaging the machine Parameters referred to Pr 1 Maximum frequency page 5 321 Pr 22 Torque limit level page 5 90 Pr 52 Operation panel main monitor selection page 5 344 Pr 81 Number of motor poles page 5 61 Pr 800 Control method selection page 5 61 Pr 811 Set resolution switchover page 5 90 ...

Page 546: ...9 kWh 9999 Set the maximum value for monitoring via communication Set it in the range of 0 and 65535 kWh 563 M021 Energization time carrying over times 0 0 to 65535 Read only Displays the numbers of times that the cumulative energization time monitor exceeded 65535 h Read only 268 M022 Monitor decimal digits selection 9999 0 Displays as integral value 1 Displays in 0 1 increments 9999 No function ...

Page 547: ... past faults individually Frequency setting value speed setting 0 01Hz 1 5 H05 40205 Displays the set frequency Running speed 1 r min 6 H06 40206 3 Displays the motor speed by the Pr 37 Pr 144 settings Refer to page 5 341 The actual motor speed by encoder signal is used during encoder feedback control and vector control Motor torque 0 1 7 H07 40207 Displays motor torque as a percentage 0 under V F...

Page 548: ...eeded 65535 h can be checked with Pr 564 This can be cleared with Pr 171 Refer to page 5 354 Motor load factor 0 1 24 H18 40224 Displays the output current value as a percentage considering the inverter rated current value as 100 Monitor value output current monitor value inverter rated current 100 Cumulative power 0 01kWh 0 1 kWh 25 H19 40225 Displays the cumulative energy based on the output pow...

Page 549: ... in No 42 Refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual PLC function user monitor 2 41 H29 40241 PLC function user monitor 3 42 H2A 40242 Station number RS 485 terminals 1 43 H2B 40243 Displays which station number 0 to 31 can currently be used for communication from the RS 485 terminal block Station number PU 1 44 H2C 40244 Displays which station number 0 to 31 can currently be used for communicat...

Page 550: ...utput option FR A8AR can be monitored via RS 485 communication and the communication option Motor thermal load factor 0 1 61 H3D 40261 Displays the accumulated heat value of the motor thermal O L relay The motor overload trip E THM occurs at 100 Inverter thermal load factor 0 1 62 H3E 40262 Displays the accumulated heat value of the inverter thermal O L relay The inverter overload trip E THT occur...

Page 551: ...ive power lower 16 bits 0 01kWh 0 1 kWh H4F 40279 32 bit cumula tive power upper 16 bits 0 01kWh 0 1 kWh H50 40280 Remote output value 1 0 1 87 H57 40287 Displays the setting values of Pr 656 to Pr 659 analog remote output Refer to page 5 399 Remote output value 2 0 1 88 H58 40288 Remote output value 3 0 1 89 H59 40289 Remote output value 4 0 1 90 H5A 40290 PIDmanipulated variable 0 1 91 H5B 40291...

Page 552: ... OFF when the option is not connected Option input terminal monitor 2 details FR A8AX input terminal status 1 denotes terminal ON 0 denotes terminal OFF denotes undetermined value All are OFF when the option is not connected Option output terminal monitor details FR A8AY A8AR output terminal status 1 denotes termi nal ON 1 denotes terminal OFF and denotes undetermined value All are OFF when the op...

Page 553: ...quency monitor and press SET key for 1 s For example when Pr 52 20 cumulative energization time the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as shown below Pr 774 sets the output frequency monitor Pr 775 sets the output current monitor and Pr 776 sets the monitor description to be displayed at the output voltage monitor position When Pr 774 to Pr 776 9999 initial value the Pr 52 setting value i...

Page 554: ... 992 100 thesetfrequencyisdisplayedduringstop andoutputfrequencyisdisplayed during running Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON The value considers the maximum minimum frequency and frequency jumps It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr 992 5 Pr 52 setting Status Output frequency Output current Output voltage Fault or alarm indication 0 During ru...

Page 555: ...nal monitor Pr 52 57 Pr 52 setting Monitor description 55 Displays the I O terminal ON OFF state of the inverter 56 Displays input terminal ON OFF state of the digital input option FR A8AX 57 Displays output terminal ON OFF state of the digital output option FR A8AY or the relay output option FR A8AR Tab 5 133 I O terminal monitor I002605E_D Fig 5 152 Displaying the signal states of the I O termin...

Page 556: ...ation time monitor Pr 171 Pr 563 Pr 564 Cumulative energization time monitor Pr 52 20 accumulates energization time from ship ment of the inverter every one hour On the actual operation time monitor Pr 52 23 the inverter running time is added up every hour Time is not added up during a stop If the number of monitor value exceeds 65535 it is added up from 0 Pr 563 allows the user to check how many ...

Page 557: ...ements The monitor value equal to or smaller than 0 99 is displayed as 0 1 When monitoring with the second decimal place 0 01 increments the 0 01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place 0 1 increments When monitoring with the first decimal place the display will not change Tab 5 135 Selection of decimal digits NOTE The number of display digits on the cumulative en...

Page 558: ...times control terminal option Current position lower Remote output 1 Current position upper Remote output 2 Droop pulse lower Remote output 3 Droop pulse upper Remote output 4 Torque command PID manipulated amount Torque current command Second PID deviation Torque monitor power driving regenerative driving polarity switching Second PID manipulated amount Motor temperature Control circuit temperatu...

Page 559: ...ter 32 Torque command 33 Torque current command 1107 6 Running speed 1108 18 Motor excitation current Tab 5 138 Monitor filter Parameters referred to Pr 30 Regenerative function selection page 5 713 Pr 70 Special regenerative brake duty page 5 713 Pr 37 Motor speed display page 5 341 Pr 144 Speed setting switchover page 5 341 Pr 55 Frequency monitoring reference page 5 358 Pr 56 Current monitoring...

Page 560: ...o be output to the terminal AM 55 M040 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the full scale value when outputting the frequency monitor value to terminals FM CA and AM 56 M041 Current monitoring reference Inverter Rated current 0 to 500 A Set the full scale value when outputting the output current monitor value to terminals FM CA and AM 0 to 3600 A 866 M042 Torque monitoring r...

Page 561: ...s 400 V 400 V class 800 V Frequency setting value 0 01 Hz 5 Pr 55 Running speed 1 r min 6 Value is Pr 55 converted by Pr 37 Pr 144 Refer to page 5 341 Refer to page 5 341 for the running speed monitor Motor torque 0 1 7 Pr 866 Converter output voltage 0 1 V 8 200 V class 400 V 400 V class 800 V Regenerative brake duty 0 1 9 Brake duty decided by Pr 30 and Pr 70 Electronic thermal O L relay load fa...

Page 562: ...5 197 PID set point 0 1 52 100 Refer to page 5 556 for the PID control PID measured value 0 1 53 100 PID deviation 0 1 54 100 Output with a negative sign terminal AM Motor thermal load factor 0 1 61 Motor thermal operation level 100 Inverter thermal load factor 0 1 62 Inverter thermal operation level 100 PID measured value 2 0 1 67 100 PLC function analog output 0 1 70 100 Refer to page 5 606 for ...

Page 563: ...nnected between terminal CA and 5 for example 60 Hz or 120 Hz Output current is proportional to the frequency The maximum output current is 20 mA DC For the calibration of terminal AM set the full scale value of the connected meter when output voltage of terminal FM is 10 V DC Set the frequency to be indicated as the full scale value on the meter 10 V DC voltmeter connected between terminal AM and...

Page 564: ...ected between terminal AM and 5 Output voltage is proportional to the monitored value of output current The maximum output voltage is 10 V DC Torque monitor reference Pr 866 Set the full scale value when outputting the current monitor from terminal the FM CA or AM For the FM type inverters set the full scale value of the connected torque meter when the pulse speed of terminal FM is 1440 pulses s 5...

Page 565: ...calibration Use a calibration resistor when the indicator frequency meter needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located far from the inverter However the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full scale if the calibration resistor is connected In this case calibrate additionally with the operation panel or parameter unit In the initial setting 1 mA full scale ...

Page 566: ...F width are the same When Pr 291 20 21 100 the pulse ON width is output at a fixed width approx 10 μs At the 100 setting the same pulse train from the pulse train input terminal JOG will be outputted This is used when running at a synchronized speed with more than one inverter Refer to page 5 292 50 kpps when the monitor output value is 100 Fig 5 160 High speed pulse train output circuit example o...

Page 567: ...rom high speed pulse train output to FM output voltage output since the Pr 291 setting value returns to the initial value of 0 Perform all parameter clear after removing the device connected to the terminal FM Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description C0 900 M310 FM CA terminal calibration Calibrates the scale of the meter connected to terminals FM and CA C1 901 M320 AM terminal calibration ...

Page 568: ...it In the initial setting 1 mA full scale and 1440 pulses s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz Calibrate the terminal FM in the following procedure Connect an indicator frequency meter across terminals FM and SD of the inverter Note the polarity The terminal FM is positive When a calibration resistor has already been connected adjust the resistance to 0 or remove the resistor Refer to the monitored ite...

Page 569: ... cannot be done when Pr 291 Pulse train I O selection 10 11 20 21 100 high speed pulse train output Operation Turning ON the power of the inverter The monitor display turns ON Changing the operation mode Press to choose the PU operation mode PU indicator turns ON Calibration is also possible in the External operation mode Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parame...

Page 570: ... can also be made for the External operation Set the frequency in the External opera tion mode and make calibration in the above procedure Calibration can be performed during operation For the operation from the parameter unit refer to the Instruction Manual of the parameter unit ...

Page 571: ...ity The terminal CA is positive Set the initial values of the calibration parameters C8 Pr 930 to C11 Pr 931 If the meter needle does not indicate zero when the current input is at zero calibrate the meter using C8 Pr 930 and C9 Pr 930 Refer to the monitor description list page 5 359 and set Pr 54 When the running frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor set the running freq...

Page 572: ...o the monitor description list page 5 359 and set Pr 158 AM terminal function selection When the running frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor set the running frequency or current value at which the output signal will be 10 V using Pr 55 or Pr 56 beforehand If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output calibrate it with C1 Pr 901 Fig 5 164 Connectin...

Page 573: ... page 5 344 50 Power saving monitor 51 Cumulative power saving monitor 774 M101 Operation panel monitor selection 1 9999 775 M102 Operation panel monitor selection 2 776 M103 Operation panel monitor selection 3 992 M104 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection 0 set frequency 54 M300 FM CA terminal function selection 1 output frequency Refer to page 5 358 50 Power saving monitor 158 M30...

Page 574: ...204 Power unit cost 9999 0 to 500 Set the power unit cost The power cost savings are displayed on the energy saving monitor 9999 No function 897 M205 Power saving monitor average time 9999 0 Average of 30 minutes 1 to 1000 h Average of the set time 9999 No function 898 M206 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 9999 0 Cumulative monitor value clear 1 Cumulative monitor value hold 10 Continue accum...

Page 575: ...ercial power supply operation input power monitor 0 01 kW 0 1 kW 9999 9999 Power saving rate The power saving ratio with the commercial power supply operation as 100 0 1 0 The power saving ratio with Pr 893 as 100 1 Average power saving The average power saving per hour during a predetermined time Pr 897 0 01kWh 0 1 kWh 9999 9999 0 to 1000 h Average power saving rate The average power saving ratio...

Page 576: ...ate considering the consumed power during the power supply operation estimated value as 100 is displayed Pr 895 Power saving rate reference value needs to be set to 0 Energy saving monitor reference motor capacity Energy saving monitored item Description and formula Incre ment Parameter setting Pr 895 Pr 896 Pr 897 Pr 899 Power saving amount The cumulative power saving is added up per hour Power s...

Page 577: ...ative monitors the monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times setting For example if the cumulative power value is 1278 56 kWh when Pr 891 2 the PU DU display is 12 78 display in 100 kWh increments and the communication data is 12 If the maximum value is exceeded when Pr 891 0 to 4 the value is clamped at the maximum value in...

Page 578: ...on pattern and rating current output frequency Pr 3 Base frequency I002619E Fig 5 166 Cumulative energy saving monitor NOTE The power saving cumulative monitor value is saved every hour This means that if the power is turned OFF after less than an hour when then the power is turned ON again the previously saved monitor value is displayed and accumulation starts In some cases the cumulative monitor...

Page 579: ...Calculate the annual power saving amount from Pr 899 Operation time rate estimated value and the average power saving monitor When the power cost per hour is set in Pr 896 Power unit cost the annual power cost savings can be monitored Estimated consumed power during commercial power supply operation kW Pr 893 kW Consumed power Pr 892 100 100 NOTE In commercial power supply operation because the ro...

Page 580: ...o 116 120 122 125 to 128 130 to 136 138 to 157 160 161 163 164 167 168 170 179 180 184 185 190 to 199 200 to 208 242 300 to 308 342 9999 191 M401 SU terminal function selection 1 SU Up to frequency 192 M402 IPF terminal function selection 2 IPF Instantaneous power failure undervoltage 9999 193 M403 OL terminal function selection 3 OL Overload warning 194 M404 FU terminal function selection 4 FU Ou...

Page 581: ...ctronic thermal O L relay value reaches 85 of the trip level Electronic thermal O L relay protection E THT E THM is activated when the value reaches 100 Pr 9 5 303 10 110 PU PU operation mode Output when PU operation mode is selected Pr 79 5 271 11 111 RY Inverter operation ready Output when the reset process is completed after powering ON the inverter when starting is possible by switching the st...

Page 582: ...sition command operation is not completed or performing home position return Pr 426 5 187 39 139 Y39 Start time tuning completion Output when tuning is completed during start up Pr 95 Pr 574 5 482 40 140 Y40 Trace status Output during trace operation Pr 1020 to Pr 1047 5 610 41 141 FB Speed detection Output when the actual motor rotations per minute estimated rotations per minute reaches Pr 42 Pr ...

Page 583: ...ltage or the power failure time deceleration to stop function is activated Pr 261 to Pr 266 5 599 68 168 EV 24 V external power supply operation Output while operating with a 24 V power supply input from an external source 2 60 70 170 SLEEP PID output interruption Output during PID output suspension function operation Pr 127 to Pr 134 Pr 575 to Pr 577 5 543 79 179 Y79 Pulse train output of output ...

Page 584: ... Output when an alarm fan fault or communication error warning occurs Pr 121 Pr 244 5 314 5 626 99 199 ALM Fault Output when the inverter s protective function is activated to stop the output at fault occurrence The signal output is stopped after a reset 5 388 200 300 FDN2 Second PID lower limit Output when the value is lower than the lower limit of second PID control Pr 753 to Pr 758 5 543 201 30...

Page 585: ...talled For the corresponding parameters of each option refer to the Instruction Manual of the option When the power is reset the fault output 2 signal ALM2 turns OFF at the same time as the power turns OFF FR A800 E only NOTES The same function may be set to more than one terminal The terminal conducts during function operation when the setting is 0 to 99 200 to 299 and does not conduct when the s...

Page 586: ...ONwhiletheinverterisrunning or the start signal is ON When the start command is ON the RUN3 signal output turns ON evenwhiletheinverter sprotectivefunctionisactivatedortheMRSisON DuringDCinjection brake operation as well the output is ON and when the inverter stops it turns OFF Fig 5 168 Adjusting the RUN signal response level I002620E NOTES When Pr 157 OL signal output timer is set for the Overlo...

Page 587: ... The Inverter running 2 RUN2 signal is ON while the inverter is running or the start signal is ON When the inverter s protective function is activated or the MRS is ON the RUN2 signal turns OFF The Inverter running and start command is ON RUN3 signal output is ON while the inverter is running or the start signal is ON Output signal Start signal OFF during stop Start signal ON during stop Start sig...

Page 588: ...er position control Output is shutoff in conditions like a fault and when the MRS signal is ON OFF while power is not supplied to the main circuit power supply NOTE When pre excitation is activated by the pre excitation signal LX the RY2 signal turns ON 100 ms 500 ms for FR A820 03800 75K or higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher after the LX signal turns ON When online auto tuning at start up Pr 95 1...

Page 589: ...n any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal To use the Y31 signal set 31 positive logic or 131 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal Output signal Pr 190 to Pr 196 settings Positive logic Negative logic RY 11 111 RY2 33 133 RUN 0 100 RUN2 44 144 RUN3 4...

Page 590: ... function is activated The ALM2 signal stays ON during the reset period after the fault occurs To use the ALM2 signal set 94 positive logic or 194 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal The ALM signal is assigned to the A1B1C1 contacts in the initial status I002625E Fig 5 172 Forward and reverse rotation of the mot...

Page 591: ...al For the fault details refer to page 6 10 Fault record Inrush current limit circuit fault E IOH CPU fault E CPU CPU fault E 5 CPU fault E 6 CPU fault E 7 Parameter storage device fault E PE Parameter storage device fault E PE2 24 V DC power fault E P24 Operation panel power supply short circuit RS 485 terminal power supply short circuit E CTE Output side earth ground fault overcurrent E GF Outpu...

Page 592: ... level where the SU signal turns ON 42 M442 Output frequency detection 6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency where the FU FB signal turns ON 43 M443 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency where the FU FB signal turns ON in reverse rotation 9999 Same as the Pr 42 setting 50 M444 Second output frequency detection 30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency where the ...

Page 593: ...ng of the electromagnetic brake operation during forward rotation lifting and reverse rotation lowering in operations such as lift opera tion When Pr 43 9999 forward rotation uses the Pr 42 setting and reverse rotation uses the Pr 43 setting When outputting a frequency detection signal separately from the FU signal set the detection frequency in Pr 50 or Pr 116 When the output frequency reaches th...

Page 594: ... selection to assign the function to the output terminal Speed detection hysteresis Pr 870 This function prevents chattering of the speed detection signals When an output frequency fluctuates the following signals may repeat ON OFF chatter Up to frequency signal SU Speed detection signal FB FB2 FB3 Low speed output signal LS Setting hysteresis to the detected frequency prevents chattering of these...

Page 595: ...ect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal Parameters referred to Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 378 Pr 874 OLT level setting page 5 90 Control method Compared frequency FU FU2 FU3 FB FB2 FB3 SU LS V F control Output frequency Output frequency Advanced magnetic flux vector control Output frequency before the slip compensation O...

Page 596: ...al Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 150 M460 Output current detection level 150 0 to 220 Set the output current detection level 100 is the inverter rated current 151 M461 Output current detection signal delay time 0s 0 to 10 s Set the output current detection time Set the time from when the output current reaches the setting or higher until the output current detection Y12 signal is...

Page 597: ...nverter operation continues when Y13 signal turns ON by setting Pr 167 Pr 167 setting When Y12 signal turns ON When Y13 signal turns ON 0 Initial value Continuous operation Continuous operation 1 Inverter trip E CDO Continuous operation 10 Continuous operation Inverter trip E CDO 11 Inverter trip E CDO Inverter trip E CDO Tab 5 150 Selecting the behaviour of the inverter output at switching of Y12...

Page 598: ...nt is low and torque is not generated the detection signal may not be output Even when using the zero current detection signal a safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided to prevent hazardous machine or equipment conditions Parameters referred to Online auto tuning page 5 482 Offline auto tuning page 5 72 page 5 471 Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection page 5 378 Pr ...

Page 599: ...90 RUN terminal function selection 96 positive logic and 1 H01 is set in Pr 496 the terminal RUN turns ON Any value Y0 to Y6 are available when the extension output option FR A8AY is installed RA1 to RA3 are available hen the relay output option FR A8AR is installed Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 495 M500 Remote output selection 0 0 Remote output data is cleared when the power sup...

Page 600: ...ot turn ON OFF even if 0 or 1 is set in the terminal bits of Pr 496 and Pr 497 ON OFF is performed with the assigned functions When Pr 495 1 or 11 remote output data retention at power OFF take measures such as con necting R1 L11 with P and S1 L21 with N so that the control power is retained If the control power is not retained the output signal after turning ON the power is not guaranteed to work...

Page 601: ...FF Remote output data is cleared during an inverter reset 1 Remote output data is retained when the power supply is turned OFF 10 Remote output data is cleared when the power supply is turned OFF Remote output data is retained during an inverter reset 11 Remote output data is retained when the power supply is turned OFF 656 M531 Analog remote output 1 1000 800 to 1200 Value output from the termina...

Page 602: ...A WhenPr 158 AMterminalfunctionselection 87 88 89 or90 ananalogvoltagecanbeoutput from the terminal AM Terminal AM output V 10 V analog remote output value 1000 100 The output range is 10 V to 10 V regardless of the Pr 290 Monitor negative output selection setting I002634E Fig 5 185 Terminal CA output I002635E Fig 5 186 Terminal AM output 20 1100 1200 800 1000 0 Output current mA Analog remote out...

Page 603: ...remote analog output data retention at power OFF take measures such as connecting R1 L11 with P and S1 L21 with N so that the control power is retained while power is supplied to R L1 S L2 and T L3 If the control power is not retained the analog output after turning ON the power is not guaranteed to work When connecting the high power factor converter FR HC2 assign the instantaneous power failure ...

Page 604: ...tial value Setting range Description 76 M510 Fault code output selection 0 0 Without fault code output 1 With fault code output Refer to the table below 2 Fault code is output only when a fault occurs Refer to the table below Operation panel indication FR DU08 Output terminal operation Fault code SU IPF OL FU Normal 0 0 0 0 0 E OC1 0 0 0 1 1 E OC2 0 0 1 0 2 E OC3 0 0 1 1 3 E OV1 to E OV3 0 1 0 0 4...

Page 605: ...lue 79 positive logic 179 negative logic to any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 Output terminal function selection Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 799 M520 Pulse increment setting for output power 1 kWh 0 1 kWh 1 kWh 10 kWh 100 kWh 1000 kWh Pulse train output of output power Y79 is output in pulses at every output power kWh that is specified I002834E Fig 5 188 Pulse train output of output powe...

Page 606: ...rature reaches the Pr 663 setting or higher For the Y207 signal set 207 positive logic or 307 negative logic in one of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the output terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 663 M060 Control circuit temperature signal output level 0 C 0 to 100 C Set the temperature where the Y207 signal turns ON NOTES The Y2...

Page 607: ...vision times 50 duty Pulse waveform example at 1000 pulse input when Pr 863 2 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 863 M600 Control terminal option Encoder pulse division ratio 1 1 to 32767 Set a numerical value by which pulses are divided I002859E Fig 5 189 Pulse waveform when Pr 863 2 NOTE Control of forward rotation reverse rotation by phase difference between A phase and B phase Whe...

Page 608: ... calibration Torque setting voltage current bias and gain P T110 to P T113 P T410 to P T413 P M043 Pr 241 C16 to C19 Pr 919 to Pr 920 C38 to C41 Pr 932 to Pr 933 5 426 To continue operating at analog current input loss 4 mA input check P T052 to P T054 Pr 573 Pr 777 Pr 778 5 416 To assign functions to input terminals Input terminal function selection P T700 to P T711 P T740 Pr 178 to Pr 189 Pr 699...

Page 609: ...t settings shown in the table below cause a failure Other incorrect settings result in an incorrect operation I002637E Fig 5 190 Voltage current input switches Setting causing a failure Operation Switch setting Terminal input ON currentinput Voltage input Causes an analog signal output circuit failure in an external device due to increased loads on the signal output circuit of the external device ...

Page 610: ...etting Terminal 4 input Switch 2 0 initial value 4 to 20 mA ON 1 0 to 5 V OFF 2 0 to 10 V OFF Tab 5 154 Setting of parameter 267 NOTES To enable the terminal 4 turn the AU signal ON Set the parameters and the switch settings so that they agree Incorrect setting may cause a fault failure or malfunction Terminal 1 frequency setting auxiliary input is added to the terminal 2 or 4 main speed setting s...

Page 611: ...l 4 input Terminal Inverter internal power source voltage Frequency setting resolution Pr 73 terminal 2 input voltage 10 5 V DC 0 030 Hz 60 Hz 0 to 5 V DC input 10E 10 V DC 0 015 Hz 60 Hz 0 to 10 V DC input Tab 5 155 Built in power supply voltage Fig 5 191 Frequency setting by voltage 0 to 5V DC I002638E_G Fig 5 192 Frequency setting by voltage 0 to 10 V DC I002639E_G Fig 5 193 Frequency setting b...

Page 612: ... 73 to a value of 10 to 17 enables the polarity reversible operation Setting input 0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V to the terminal 1 allows the operation of forward reverse rotation by the polarity Fig 5 194 Frequency setting by current 4 to 20 mA DC I002641E_G Fig 5 195 Frequency setting by current 4 to 20 mA DC I002642E_G Fig 5 196 CompensationinputcharacteristicswhenSTFisON I002643E STF PC 4 5 AU 2 4 For...

Page 613: ... 4 function assignment page 5 411 Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment page 5 411 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0 to 6 9999 Select the terminal 1 function Refer to the table below 858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0 1 4 9999 Select the terminal 4 function Refer to the table below Pr 868 setting V F control Advanced magnetic flux ...

Page 614: ...he control mode NOTE When Pr 868 1 magnetic flux command or 4 stall prevention torque limit the terminal 4 function is enabled whether the AU terminal is turned ON OFF Parameters referred to Advanced magnetic flux vector control page 5 72 Real sensorless vector control page 5 61 Pr 804 Torque command source selection page 5 138 Pr 807 Speed limit selection page 5 142 Pr 810 Torque limit input meth...

Page 615: ...ue with use of terminal 2 terminal 2 input terminal 1 input Pr 242 100 Analog command value with use of terminal 4 terminal 4 input terminal 1 input Pr 243 100 Fig 5 197 Example of addition compensation connection I002644E_G I001187E Fig 5 198 Auxiliary input characteristics NOTE After changing the Pr 73 setting check the voltage current input switch setting Incorrect setting may cause a fault fai...

Page 616: ...minal 1 or 4 the compensation by terminal 2 is disabled Specify the scope of override by using Pr 252 and Pr 253 How to calculate the set frequency for override Set frequency Hz Main speed setting frequency Hz Compensation 100 Main speed setting frequency Hz Terminals 1 or 4 input multi speed setting Compensation Terminal 2 input Fig 5 199 Connection example for the override function I002645E_G Fi...

Page 617: ... set Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selection 1 with compensation initial value 0 After changing the Pr 73 setting check the voltage current input switch setting Incorrect setting may cause a fault failure or malfunction For the settings refer to page 5 406 Parameters referred to Pr 28 Multi speed input compensation selection page 5 197 Pr 73 Analog input selection page 5 406 75 50 37 5 25 1...

Page 618: ... T004 Torque setting filter 1 9999 0 to 5 s Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external torque command analog input command 9999 Use the Pr 74 setting 832 T005 Speed setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s 9999 Second function of Pr 822 enabled when the RT signal is ON 836 T006 Torque setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s 9999 Second function of Pr 826 enabled when the RT signal is ON 849 T007 Anal...

Page 619: ...ilter 1 To change the time constant for example in a case where only one inverter is used to switch between two motors use Pr 836 Torque setting filter 2 Pr 836 Torque setting filter 2 is enabled when the RT signal is ON Analog speed command input offset adjustment Pr 849 This is used to set a range in which the motor is stopped for prevention of incorrect motor operation in a very low speed rotat...

Page 620: ... setting gain 100 0 to 300 Set the converted on the gain side voltage current of the terminal 2 input C5 904 T400 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the terminal 4 input bias side frequency C6 904 T401 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 20 0 to 300 Set the converted on the bias side current voltage of terminal 4 input 126 905 T402 T042 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain...

Page 621: ...l 4 frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C16 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias torque C18 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque 2 Regenerative driving torque limit C16 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias torque C18 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque 3 Torque ...

Page 622: ...function Calibration parameter Bias setting Gain setting 0 initial value Frequency command C5 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Pr 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C38 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque C39 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias torque C40 Pr 933 Termi...

Page 623: ...r 125 Set the bias frequency of the terminal 1 input using C12 Pr 917 It is initially set to the frequency at 0 V Set the gain frequency of the terminal 1 input using C14 Pr 918 It is initially set to the frequency at 10 V Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using C5 Pr 904 It is initially set to the frequency at 4 mA Settheoutputfrequencyfor20mAofthefrequencycommandcurrent 4to20mA byus...

Page 624: ...voltage input to terminal 1 sets terminal 2 4 analog value terminal 1 analog value as the analog calibration value Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage current input signal with Pr 73 Pr 267 and the voltage current input selection switch Analog command terminals 2 4 depending on Pr 73 Pr 267 and voltage current input switch Pr 241 0 initial value Pr 241 1 0 to 5 V input 0 to 5 V 0...

Page 625: ...ears Press to display Selecting the parameter number Turn to choose C4 Pr 903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain for the terminal 2 and C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 2 4 Do not touch until calibration is completed Voltage current application Apply a 5 V 20 mA...

Page 626: ...ng gain for the terminal 2 and C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 2 4 Analog voltage current adjustment When is turned the gain voltage current currently set to the parameter is displayed When until the desired gain voltage current is displayed Setting completed ...

Page 627: ...bias of voltage current setting voltage are too close an error Er3 may be dis played at setting Changing C4 Pr 903 or C7 Pr 905 gain adjustment will not change Pr 20 Input to the terminal 1 frequency setting auxiliary input is added to the frequency setting signal For operation outline of the parameter unit FR PU07 refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR PU07 To set the value to 120 Hz or higher...

Page 628: ...ector control only Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description C16 919 T110 Terminal 1 bias command torque 0 0 to 400 Set the torque magnetic flux of the bias side of terminal 1 input C17 919 T111 Terminal 1 bias torque 0 0 to 300 Set the converted on bias side voltage of terminal 1 input C18 920 T112 Terminal 1 gain command torque 150 0 to 400 Set the torque magnetic flux of the gain maximum ...

Page 629: ...l 4 frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C16 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias torque C18 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque 2 Regenerative driving torque limit C16 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque C17 Pr 919 Terminal 1 bias torque C18 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque 3 Torque ...

Page 630: ... Bias setting Gain setting 0 initial value Frequency speed command Speed limit C5 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6 Pr 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Pr 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency C7 Pr 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1 Magnetic flux command C38 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque C39 Pr 932 Terminal 4 bias torque C40 Pr 933 Terminal 4 gain c...

Page 631: ...itial value is 10 V Set the bias torque of the terminal 4 input using C38 Pr 932 The initial value is the torque for 4 mA Set the torque against the 20 mA for torque command current 4 to 20 mA with C40 Pr 933 I002648E Fig 5 204 Signal adjustment of terminal 1 I002649E Fig 5 205 Signal adjustment of terminal 4 400 150 0 0 0 Gain C18 Pr 920 Torque setting signal 5 V 10 V C19 Pr 920 C17 Pr 919 Calibr...

Page 632: ...splayunit V mA foranalog inputbiasandgaincalibrationcanbechanged Depending on the terminal input specification set to Pr 73 and Pr 267 the display units of C17 Pr 919 C19 Pr 920 C39 Pr 932 and C41 Pr 933 will change as shown below NOTE Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage input signal with Pr 73 Pr 267 and the volt age current input selection switch Analog command terminals 1 and ...

Page 633: ...ss to display Selecting the parameter number Turn to choose C19 Pr 920 Terminal 1 gain torque for the terminal 1 and C41 Pr 933 Terminal 4 gain torque for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 1 4 Do not touch until calibration is completed Voltage current application Apply a 5 V 20 mA Turn the external potentiom...

Page 634: ...gain torque for the terminal 1 and C41 Pr 933 Terminal 4 gain torque for the terminal 4 Analog voltage current display Press to display the analog voltage current currently applied to the terminal 1 4 Analog voltage current adjustment When is turned the gain voltage current currently set to the parameter is displayed Turn until the desired gain voltage current is displayed Setting completed Press ...

Page 635: ...justing only the torque without adjustment of a voltage current NOTES If the gain and bias of torque setting are too close an error Er3 may displayed at setting For operation outline of the parameter unit FR PU07 refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR PU07 Set the bias torque setting using the calibration parameter C16 Pr 919 or C38 Pr 932 Refer to page 5 429 E CAUTION Be cautious when setting ...

Page 636: ... output frequency before the current input loss 2 4 mA input fault is activated when the current input loss is detected 3 Decelerates to stop when the current input loss is detected After it is stopped 4 mA input fault E LCI is activated 4 Continues operation with the Pr 777 setting 9999 No current input check 777 T053 4 mA input check operation frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the running frequency...

Page 637: ...ion PID control reverse action I001197E Fig 5 207 4mA input check during external operation Pr 573 1 or 4 I001198E Fig 5 208 4mA input check during PID control reverse action Pr 573 1 or 4 NOTE When the setting is changed to continuously operate after the input current loss Pr 573 1 4 the motor will operate as the frequency before loss is 0 Hz 20 mA 4 mA 2 mA 3 mA Output frequency Analog input Pr ...

Page 638: ...he analog current input is restored during the deceleration it will accelerate again and operate according to the current input PID control reverse action I002650E Fig 5 209 Fault output Pr 573 2 I002651E Fig 5 210 Fault output after deceleration to stop Pr 573 3 STF Output frequency Set point fixed Measured value 20 mA 4 mA LF signal PID signal ALM signal E LCI occurs Input current decrease Retur...

Page 639: ...everse action I002768E Fig 5 211 Fault output after deceleration under PID control reverse action Pr 573 3 STF Output frequency 20 mA 4 mA Set point fixed Measured value LF signal PID signal OFF during deceleration Input current decrease 2mA 3 mA Return Decelerates as the input current is lost Normal operation after the current is restored Time ...

Page 640: ...he operation continuation due to current input loss and retry was a success operation will continue without clearing the operation continuation frequency 5 318 Added compensation override compensation During operation with added compensation or override compensation and transferred to operation continuation due to input current loss added compensation and override compensation will become invalid ...

Page 641: ...705 RT terminal function selection 3 RT Second function selection 184 T706 AU terminal function selection 4 AU Terminal 4 input selection 185 T707 JOG terminal function selection 5 JOG Jog operation selection 186 T708 CS terminal function selection 6 CS Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start 187 T709 MRS terminal function selection 24 MRS Output stop 10 X10 I...

Page 642: ...lay input Pr 9 5 303 8 REX 15 speed selection Combination with multi speeds of RL RM and RH Pr 4 to Pr 6 Pr 24 to Pr 27 Pr 232 to Pr 239 5 197 9 X9 Third function selection Pr 110 to Pr 116 5 445 10 X10 Inverter run enable signal FR HC2 FR CV FR CC2 connection Pr 30 Pr 70 Pr 599 5 713 11 X11 FR HC2 FR CC2 connection instantaneous power failure detection Pr 30 Pr 70 5 713 12 X12 PU operation extern...

Page 643: ...NET operation switchover PU operation with X65 ON Pr 79 Pr 340 5 271 66 X66 External NET operation switchover NET operation with X66 ON Pr 79 Pr 340 5 271 67 X67 Command source switchover Command by Pr 338 Pr 339 enabled with X67 ON Pr 338 Pr 339 5 282 68 NP Simple position pulse train sign Pr 291 Pr 419 to Pr 430 Pr 464 5 178 69 CLR Simple position droop pulse clear External operation mode Pr 291...

Page 644: ...EX PID X14 When the X10 signal is not set up Pr 79 Operation mode selection 7 and PU operation external interlock X12 signal is Inverter run enable signal Same signal is used to assign multi speed 7 speed and remote setting Setting cannot be per formed individually When the Load pattern selection forward reverse rotation boost X17 signal is not assigned RT signal will share this function If Pr 419...

Page 645: ...gnal is entered into the inverter To coast the motor to a stop When the start signal is turned OFF the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time but when the MRS signal is turned ON the motor coasts to a stop MRS signal logic inversion Pr 17 2 WhenPr 17 2 theMRSsignalcanbechangedtonormallyclosed NCcontact specification Thein verter will shut off the output with MRS s...

Page 646: ...tput shutoff Tab 5 172 Output shutoff by external terminal or communication NOTES The MRS signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial status By setting 24 in either Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection the RT signal can be assigned to the other terminal When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation modes ...

Page 647: ...ons Switching between regular use and emergency use Switching between heavy load and light load Change the acceleration deceleration time by break point acceleration deceleration Switching characteristics of main motor and sub motor Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 155 T730 RT signal function validity condition selection 0 0 Second third function is immediately enabled with ON of RT...

Page 648: ...Pr 462 Pr 738 to Pr 747 Pr 860 5 457 5 471 Offline auto tuning Pr 96 Pr 463 5 457 5 471 Online auto tuning Pr 95 Pr 574 5 482 PID control Pr 127 to Pr 134 Pr 753 to Pr 758 5 543 PID Pre charge function Pr 760 to Pr 764 Pr 765 to Pr 769 5 566 Brake sequence Pr 278 to Pr 285 Pr 639 Pr 640 Pr 641 to Pr 648 Pr 650 Pr 651 5 501 Droop control Pr 286 to Pr 288 Pr 994 Pr 995 Pr 679 to Pr 683 5 733 Low spe...

Page 649: ...for the frequency setting signal For multi speed operation refer to page 5 197 By setting Pr 250 1000 to 1100 8888 STF signal becomes start command and STF signal becomes forward reverse command Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description Start signal STF STR Stop operation Refer to page 5 447 250 G106 Stop selection 9999 0 to 100 s STF signal Forward rotation start STR signal Reverse rotation...

Page 650: ...en OFF Inverter will perform deceleration stop by turning the STP STOP signal OFF once I002657E_G Fig 5 218 2 wire type connection example Pr 250 8888 NOTES By setting Pr 250 0 to 100 1000 to 1100 it will perform coast to stop when the start command is turned OFF Refer to page 5 447 The STF and STR signals are assigned to the STF and STR terminals in the initial status STF signal can be assigned t...

Page 651: ...connection example Pr 250 8888 STF STR PC STP STOP STF STR STP STOP Time Inverter Forward rotation start Stop Reverse rotation start Reverse rotation Forward rotation Output frequency ON ON OFF OFF ON STF STR STP STOP STF STR PC STP STOP ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Time Inverter Start Stop Forward rotation reverse rotation Forward rotation Reverse rotation Output frequency ...

Page 652: ...he JOG signal STP STOP signal will be disa bled Even when the output is stopped by turning ON the MRS signal self holding function is not can celled STF STR Pr 250 setting and inverter condition 0 to 100 s 9999 1000 s to 1100 s 8888 OFF OFF Stop Stop OFF ON Reverse rotation ON OFF Forward rotation Forward rotation ON ON Stop Reverse rotation Tab 5 174 Start signal selection Parameters referred to ...

Page 653: ...auto tuning P C000 P C100 to P C108 P C110 P C120 P C122 P C123 P C126 P C130 to P C133 P C150 P C182 P C185 P C200 to P C208 P C210 P C220 P C222 P C223 P C226 P C230 to P C233 P C282 P C285 Pr 9 Pr 51 Pr 71 Pr 80 Pr 81 Pr 83 Pr 84 Pr 90 Pr 92 Pr 93 Pr 96 Pr 450 Pr 453 Pr 454 Pr 456 to Pr 458 Pr 460 Pr 461 Pr 463 Pr 684 Pr 702 Pr 706 Pr 707 Pr 711 Pr 712 Pr 717 Pr 721 Pr 724 Pr 725 Pr 738 to Pr 7...

Page 654: ...tandard motor such as SF JR Adjustable 5 points V F Refer to page 5 698 20 Mitsubishi standard motor SF JR 4P 1 5 kW or lower 30 Vector control dedicated motor SF V5RU 1500 r min series SF THY 40 Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF HR 50 Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF HRCA 70 Mitsubishi high performance energy saving motor SF PR 330 IPM motor MM CF 8090 IPM motor other than MM CF 9090 SPM mot...

Page 655: ... 0 01 mΩ Pr 92 Pr 460 and Pr 93 Pr 461 앫 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 앫 0 to 3600 mΩ 9999 0 1 mΩ Pr 94 Pr 462 앫 0 to 500 Ω 9999 0 01 Ω 앫 0 to 100 Ω 9999 0 01 Ω 15 Constant torque motor 6 Standard motor Delta connection 16 Constant torque motor 9999 initial value No second applied motor NOTES Regardless of the Pr 71 Pr 450 setting offline auto tuning can be performed according to Pr 96 Pr 463 Auto tuning...

Page 656: ...setting status Pr 463 Pr 96 Frequency search gain Pr 560 Pr 298 Online auto tuning selection Pr 574 Pr 95 Induced voltage constant phi f Pr 738 Pr 706 Motor Ld decay ratio Pr 739 Pr 711 Motor Lq decay ratio Pr 740 Pr 712 Starting resistance tuning compensation Pr 741 Pr 717 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width Pr 742 Pr 721 Maximum motor frequency Pr 743 Pr 702 Motor inertia integ...

Page 657: ...from its initial value the automatic change is not performed Inverter Pr 0 value after automatic change Pr 12 value after automatic change FR A820 쏔 FR A840 쏔 Motor Standard motor Constant torque motor SF PR Standard motor Constant torque motor SF PR SLD LD ND HD SLD LD ND HD Pr 81 2 4 6 Pr 81 2 Pr 81 4 Pr 81 6 00046 0 4K 00023 0 4K 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 00077 0 75K 00038 0 75K 6 6 4 7 4 6 6 4 4 4 4 0...

Page 658: ...ough the torque boost value has been automatically changed When the protective function such as the electronic thermal O L relay E THT E THM and the stall preven tion OL E OLT etc is activated adjust the Pr 0 Torque boost setting according to the load E CAUTION Make sure to set this parameter correctly according to the motor used Incorrect setting may cause the motor and inverter to overheat and b...

Page 659: ...Motor capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Set the applied motor capacity 0 to 3600 kW 9999 V F control 81 C102 Number of motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 12 Set the number of motor poles 9999 V F control 9 C103 Electronic thermal O L relay Inverter rated current 0 to 500 A Set the rated motor current 0 to 3600 A 83 C104 Rated motor voltage 200 400 V 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage V 84 C105 Rated motor ...

Page 660: ...ons as Pr 71 9999 The function is disabled 453 C201 Second motor capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Set the capacity of the second motor 0 to 3600 kW 9999 V F control 454 C202 Number of second motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor 9999 V F control 51 C203 Second electronic thermal O L relay 9999 0 to 500 A This function is enabled when the RT signal is ON Set the rated...

Page 661: ...9 0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search of the second motor 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA and so on NOTES The function is enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector con trol and vector control Even if a motor other than Mitsubishi standard motors SF JR 0 4...

Page 662: ...h slip motor a high speed motor or a special motor The highest frequency is 400 Hz The motor may rotate slightly even if the offline auto tuning without motor rotation Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 1 is selected The slight motor rotation does not affect the tuning performance Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or before tuning make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates Caut...

Page 663: ...0 451 Control method selection 20 Set this parameter when using vector control or Real sensorless vector control 9 51 Electronic thermal O L relay Inverter rated current Set the rated motor current A 83 456 Rated motor voltage 200 V 400 V Set the rated motor voltage V printed on the motor s rating plate 84 457 Rated motor frequency 9999 Set the rated motor frequency Hz When the setting is 9999 the...

Page 664: ...dard motor 0 initial value 3 4 5 star connection motor 6 delta connection motor Other manufacturer s constant torque motor 1 13 14 15 star connection motor 16 deltaconnection motor Tab 5 179 Motor selection NOTES If the SF V5RU other than the 1500 r min series is used be sure to perform auto tuning after set ting 1 13 or 14 in Pr 71 and setting Pr 83 and Pr 84 If Pr 11 DC injection brake operation...

Page 665: ...H MRS RT RES STF STR S1 and S2 Output terminals RUN OL IPF FM CA AM A1B1C1 and SO When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM CA and AM the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in fifteen steps from FM CA and AM Do not perform ON OFF switching of the Second function selection RT signal during offline auto tuning Auto tuning will not be performed prope...

Page 666: ...ion Pr 96 101 Approx 40 s The following offline auto tuning time is set according to the acceleration deceleration time setting Offline auto tuning time acceleration time deceleration time approx 30 s Tab 5 182 Offline auto tuning time when the initial value is set NOTES The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline ...

Page 667: ... activated Set the acceleration deceleration time longer Set Pr 156 1 92 The converter output voltage has dropped to 75 of the rated voltage Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation Check the Pr 84 Rated motor frequency setting 93 Calculation error The motor is not connected Check the Pr 83 and Pr 84 settings Check the motor wiring and make the setting again 94 Rotation tuning frequency sett...

Page 668: ...la to find the Pr 94 setting value and set a given value as the motor constant parameter Motor Pr 71 setting Mitsubishi standard motor Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF JR 0 initial value SF JR 4P 1 5 kW or lower 20 SF HR 40 Mitsubishi constant torque motor SF JRCA 4P 1 SF HRCA 50 Mitsubishi high performance energy saving motor SF PR 70 Vector control dedicated motor SF V5RU 1500 r min series 30...

Page 669: ...99 0 1 mH 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 94 462 Motor constant X 0 to 100 9999 0 1 0 01 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01A 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A 298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767 9999 1 Tab 5 185 Parameter setting ranges NOTE If 9999 is set tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi motors SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA and SF V5RU 1500...

Page 670: ... to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 93 461 Motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 0 to 6000mH 9999 0 1 mH 0 to 400 mH 9999 0 01 mH 94 462 Motor constant X 0 to 100 9999 0 1 0 01 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A 298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767 9999 1 0 to 32767 9999 1 Tab 5 187 Parameter setting ranges NOTES As the motor constants measured in ...

Page 671: ...A 90 458 Motor constant r1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 91 459 Motor constant r2 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 92 460 Motor constant 1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 3600 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 93 461 Motor constant 2 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 0 to 3600 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 94 462 Motor constant m 0 to 500 Ω 9999 0 01 Ω 0 to 100 Ω 9999 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor curre...

Page 672: ... Pr 461 Pr 93 Motor constant X Pr 462 Pr 94 Auto tuning setting status Pr 463 Pr 96 Frequency search gain Pr 560 Pr 298 Tab 5 189 Validation of parameters by the RT signal NOTES The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 17...

Page 673: ...motor are set 80 C101 Motor capacity 9999 0 4 to 55 kW Applied motor capacity setting 0 to 3600 kW 9999 V F control 81 C102 Number of motor poles 9999 2 4 6 8 10 12 Set the number of motor poles 9999 V F control 9 C103 Electronic thermal O L relay Inverter rated current 0 to 500 A Set the rated motor current 0 to 3600 A 83 C104 Rated motor voltage 200 400 V 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage ...

Page 674: ...nsation 9999 0 to 200 9999 721 C185 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width 9999 0 to 6000 μs 10000 to 16000 μs 9999 725 C133 Motor protection current level 9999 100 to 500 Set the maximum current OCT level of the motor 9999 Uses the MM CF constant for the IPM motor MM CF and 200 for a PM motor other than MM CF 450 C200 Second applied motor 9999 0 1 3 to 6 13 to 16 20 23 24 30 33 34 ...

Page 675: ...r the IPM motor MM CF and the inverter internal data for a PM motor other than MM CF 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 460 C222 Second motor constant L1 d axis inductance Ld 9999 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 to 50 mH 9999 461 C223 Second motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 9999 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 to 50 mH 9999 860 C226 Second motor torque current Rated PM motor current 9999 0 to 500 A 9999 0 to 3600 A 9999 738 C230 Secon...

Page 676: ...e slightly even if the offline auto tuning without motor rotation Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 1 or 11 is selected It does not affect the tuning performance Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or before tuning make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications Tuning is not available during position control under PM senso...

Page 677: ...56 Rated motor voltage Rated motor voltage V Rated motorvoltage V written on the rated plate 71 450 Applied motor 8090 8093 IPM motor 9090 9093 SPM motor 330 and 333 96 463 Auto tuning setting status 1 11 Tab 5 190 Set the parameters before performing tuning Motor Pr 71 setting Motor constant parameter Ω mH and A unit setting Motor constant parameter Internal data setting IPM motor MM CF 330 333 3...

Page 678: ...lue Input terminals effective signals STP STOP OH MRS RT RES STF STR S1 and S2 Output terminals RUN OL IPF FM CA AM A1B1C1 and SO When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM CA and AM the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in fifteen steps from FM CA and AM Do not perform ON OFF switching of the Second function selection RT signal during offline aut...

Page 679: ...ring tuning monitor display NOTES The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline auto tuning is performed again However the tuning data is cleared by performing all parameter clear Changing Pr 71 after tuning completion will change the motor constant For example if Pr 71 8093 is set after tuning is performed with Pr 7...

Page 680: ... 93 Calculation error The motor is not connected Check the motor wiring and make the setting again 94 Rotation tuning frequency setting error The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed the maximum frequency setting or to be in the frequency jump range Check the Pr 1 Maximum frequency and Pr 31 to Pr 36 Frequency jump settings Tab 5 194 Settings for Pr 96 Pr 463 NOTES An instantaneous...

Page 681: ...etting values are stored in the EEPROM as motor constant parameters and two types of motor constants can be stored First motor Pr Second motor Pr Name Other than MM CF Pr 96 Pr 4 63 1 V F control or MM CF Pr 96 Pr 463 11 Description 90 458 Motor constant R1 Resistance per phase 92 460 Motor constant L1 d axis inductance Ld d axis inductance 93 461 Motor constant L2 q axis inductance Lq q axis indu...

Page 682: ...r 738 No exponent setting Motor Pr 71 setting IPM motor MM CF 330 Other than MM CF 8090 SPM motor 9090 Tab 5 196 Motor selection First Pr Second Pr Name Setting range Setting increments Initial value 90 458 Motor constant R1 0 to 50 Ω 9999 0 001 Ω 9999 0 to 400 mΩ 9999 0 01 mΩ 92 460 Motor constant L1 d axis inductance Ld 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 01 mH 0 to 50 mH 9999 0 001 mH 93 461 Motor constant L2 q...

Page 683: ...or constant L2 q axis inductance Lq 0 to 500 mH 9999 0 01 mH 0 to 50 mH 9999 0 001 mH 706 738 Induced voltage constant phi f 0 to 5000 mV s rad 9999 0 1 mV rad s 859 860 Torque current Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A 9999 0 01 A 0 to 3600 A 9999 0 1 A Tab 5 199 Parameter setting ranges NOTES As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data refer t...

Page 684: ... or 103 offline auto tuning completion Set Pr 95 Online auto tuning selection 1 online auto tuning at start Check that the following parameters are set before starting operation Ifamotorwithsubstantiallylowratedcurrentcomparedwiththeinverterratedcurrentisused speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples etc Set the rated motor current to about 40 or higher of the inverter rate...

Page 685: ...tion is required to prevent the object from dropping Use of the start time tuning start X28 signal is recommended to perform tuning Refer to page 5 483 Perform online auto tuning at startup when the motor is stopped The online auto tuning is disabled when the MRS signal is being input the setting speed is Pr 13 Starting frequency or lower V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control an invert...

Page 686: ...tsafewseconds Completed Tuning is not performedif the Y39 signalis ON While the X28 signal is ON X28 Signal Tuning status at starting Y39 signal Start signal Output frequency OFF OFF OFF ON ON Tune Tuning is not performed at start since X28 signal and Y39 signal is ON Completed 0 Hz Time While the X28 signal is OFF X28 Signal Tuning status at starting Y39 signal Output frequency Start signal OFF O...

Page 687: ...s ON as long as there is second flux even after the motor is stopped The X28 signal is disabled while the Y39 signal is ON The STF and STR signals are enabled after completing tuning at start The Inverter running RUN signal is not turned ON during online auto tuning The RUN signal is turned ON after starting up It is disabled during V F control or PM sensorless vector control Changing the terminal...

Page 688: ...current equal to or lower than the inverter rated current 454 Number of motor poles Tab 5 201 Related Parameters NOTES The RT signal is a second function selection signal The RT signal also enables other second func tions Refer to page 5 439 The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal ...

Page 689: ...r volume PID control P A600 to P A607 P A610 to P A615 P A621 to P A625 P A640 to P A644 P A650 to P A655 P A661 to P A665 Pr 127 to Pr 134 Pr 553 Pr 554 Pr 575 to Pr 577 Pr 609 Pr 610 Pr 753 to Pr 758 Pr 1015 Pr 1134 Pr 1135 Pr 1140 Pr 1141 Pr 1143 to Pr 1149 5 543 PID pre charge function P A616 to P A620 P A656 to P A660 Pr 760 to Pr 769 5 566 PID display adjustment P A630 to P A633 P A670 to P ...

Page 690: ...ger than the time period from the ON signal input to the actual pick up operation of MC3 0 3 to 0 5 s 138 A003 Bypass selection at a fault 0 0 Inverter output stop motor coasting at inverter failure 1 Automatic switchover to commercial power supply operation at inverter failure Switchover is not possible when an external thermal relay E OHT or CPU fault E CPU is occurring 139 A004 Automatic switch...

Page 691: ...n OFF of the magnetic contactor at the inverter output side The inverter s electronic bypass sequence that outputs timing signals for the magnetic contactors can act as a complicated interlock between the commercial power supply operation and the inverter operation Connection diagram A typical connection diagram of the electronic bypass sequence is shown below NOTE The commercial power supply oper...

Page 692: ...onnection diagram Separated converter type Output terminal capacity Output terminal permissible load Open collector output of inverter RUN SU IPF OL FU 24 V DC 0 1 A Inverter relay output A1 C1 B1 C1 A2 B2 B2 C2 Relay output option FR A8AR 230 V AC 0 3 A 30 V DC 0 3 A NOTES Use the electronic bypass function in External operation mode In addition the wiring terminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 must be conn...

Page 693: ...hen the external thermal relay is operating MC3 Between inverter output side and motor Open Shorted Open Tab 5 202 Operations of magnetic contactors Signal Applied terminal Function Operation MC operation MC1 MC2 MC3 MRS MRS Selects whether or not operation is available ON Electronic bypass operation available OFF Electronic bypass operation not available Invariance CS CS Inverter commercial power...

Page 694: ...al of the magnetic contactor MC1 on the inverter s input side MC2 18 Operation output signal of the magnetic contactor MC2 for the commercial power supply operation MC3 19 Operation output signal of the magnetic contactor MC3 on the inverter s output side Tab 5 204 Output signals I002669E Fig 5 226 Signal timing when there is no automatic switchover sequence Inverter run command STF Power supply O...

Page 695: ...C2 C A A B C D ON OFF Output frequency Pr 139 Frequency command Actual motor speed ON OFF INV operation Commercial power supply operation ON OFF A Pr 136 MC switchover interlock time C Pr 57 Restart coasting time B Pr 137 Start waiting time D Pr 58 Restart cushion time Time Time STF MC3 MC2 C A A B C D A A B C D ON OFF Output frequency Frequency command Actual motor speed ON OFF ON OFF Commercial ...

Page 696: ...witched to the inverter operation inverter ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON MC3 turns ON after MC2 turns OFF Waiting time is 4 s while coasting Stop ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON Tab 5 205 Signals after parameter setting 앫 Pr 135 1 open collector output terminal of inverter 앫 Pr 136 2 0 s 앫 Pr 137 1 0 s Set the time until MC3 is actually turned ON and the inverter and motor are electrically connected If the...

Page 697: ...mal functions When the electronic bypass sequence function Pr 135 1 and PU operation interlock function Pr 79 7 are used at the same time the MRS signal is shared with the PU operation external interlock if the X12 signal is not assigned The inverter operation is available when the MRS and CS signals are ON Set the acceleration time to the level that does not activate the stall prevention operatio...

Page 698: ... X96 Converter unit fault E OHT E CPU X94 Control signal for main circuit power supply MC MC operation Converter status MC1 MC2 MC3 OFF OFF ON Converter fault E OHT Pr 248 2 OFF Converter fault E OHT Pr 248 1 E CPU ON ON ON Converter normal OFF ON ON Converter fault other than the circuit failure fault or E OHT Pr 248 2 OFF Converter fault other than E OHT or E CPU Tab 5 206 Input signals of self ...

Page 699: ...ation of MC1 0 3 to 0 5 s 254 A007 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 600 s 1 to 3600 s Set the waiting time until the main circuit power supply is turned OFF after the motor is stopped 9999 The main circuit power supply is turned OFF only when the protective function selected by Pr 248 is activated 30 E300 Regenerative function selection 0 100 101 Power supply to the inverter AC terminals R S an...

Page 700: ...circuit power supply OFF Set Pr 254 to prevent frequent MC operation Turning ON the start signal turns ON the MC1 signal and closes the MC on the input side main circuit power supply ON After the time set in Pr 137 Start waiting time has passed the inverter starts Set time slightly longer about 0 3 to 0 5 s than the time period from the MC1 ON to the actual pick up operation of the MC is turned ON...

Page 701: ...signal of the inverter is assigned To use the X94 signal set 94 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function to an input terminal Fault record Inrush current limit circuit fault E IOH CPU fault E CPU CPU fault E 6 CPU fault E 7 Parameter storage device fault E PE Parameter storage device fault E PE2 24 VDC power fault E P24 Operation panel power supply short ...

Page 702: ...plied only to the control circuit set 100 or more in Pr 30 For the separated converter type setting Pr 30 of the converter unit is also required When supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit there is a little waiting time before starting To use X94 signal for the separated converter type use a converter unit manufactured in August 2014 or la...

Page 703: ...82 Pr 278 283 A105 Brake operation time at stop 0 3 s 0 to 5 s When Pr 292 7 set the mechanical delay time until the brake closes 0 1 s When Pr 292 8 set the mechanical delay time until the brake closes approx 0 2 to 0 3 s 284 A106 Deceleration detection function selection 0 0 The deceleration detection function disabled 1 The protective function activates when the deceleration speed of the decele...

Page 704: ... Pr 282 647 A125 Second brake operation time at stop 0 3 s 0 to 5 s Refer to Pr 283 648 A126 Second deceleration detection function selection 0 0 1 Refer to Pr 284 650 A128 Second brake opening current selection 0 0 1 Refer to Pr 639 651 A129 Second brake operation frequency selection 0 0 1 Refer to Pr 640 I002673E_G Fig 5 233 Connection example with mechanical brake Pr 184 15 Pr 190 20 NOTES The ...

Page 705: ...erform brake operation while referring to the frequency command regardless of the Pr 640 setting Operation with brake opening completion signal input Pr 292 7 When the start signal is input to the inverter the inverter starts running and when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr 278 Brake opening frequency and the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than the P...

Page 706: ...time set in Pr 283 Brake operation time at stop And after the set time in Pr 283 passes the inverter decelerates again Pr 13 Starting frequency setting or 0 5 Hz whichever is lower I002674E Fig 5 234 Operation when parameter 292 7 I002675E Fig 5 235 Operation when parameter 292 8 NOTE Even if the brake sequence operation has been selected inputting the JOG signal JOG operation will change the oper...

Page 707: ...s shuts off output and turns OFF the brake opening request signal BOF Pr 641 setting Brake sequence function when the RT signal is ON 0 initial value Normal operation The first and second brake sequence functions invalid 7 Second brake sequence mode 1 8 Second brake sequence mode 2 9999 First brake sequence mode is valid Tab 5 209 Multiple brake sequence functions Fault indication Description E MB...

Page 708: ...uency is valid under encoder feedback control used with the FR A8AP option even if a value other than 7 or 8 is set in Pr 292 Automatic acceleration decel eration Setting Pr 278 too high activates the stall prevention and may cause E MB4 E MB4 occurs when the acceleration time from Pr 13 to Pr 278 Pr 280 reaches or exceeds 2 s Parameters referred to Pr 3 Base frequency page 5 690 Pr 180 to Pr 186 ...

Page 709: ...Pr 1411 The maximum count is 99999999 When 99999999 is exceeded on the monitor the monitor value is reset to 0 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 1410 A170 Starting times lower 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Displays the lower four digits of the number of the inverter starting times 1411 A171 Starting times upper 4 digits 0 0 to 9999 Displays the upper four digits of the number of the inverter ...

Page 710: ...arting during offline auto tuning is not counted Under position control the count increases when the LX signal turns ON The counting is enabled even if the RUN signal is not assigned to an output terminal For the RUN signal refer to section 5 11 6 Output terminal function selection Starting during test operation Pr 800 9 is not counted ...

Page 711: ...as priority 48 H600 Second stall prevention operation level 150 0 to 400 270 A200 Stop on contact load torque high speed frequency control selection 0 0 Normal operation 1 Stop on contact control 2 Load torque high speed frequency control Refer to page 5 513 3 Stop on contact load torque high speed frequency control Refer to page 5 513 11 Stop on contact control E OLT is invalid under stop on cont...

Page 712: ...Middle speed operation command Stop on contact selection 0 Stop on contact selection 1 The input terminal used differs according to the Pr 180 to Pr 189 settings Motor Mechanical brake Pr 4 Pr 5 Pr 6 Normal mode Stop on contact control mode Time Output frequency ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF Goes into stop on contact control mode when both RL and RT switch on RL and RT may be switched on in any order wi...

Page 713: ...op or hold a load for an extended period this function can cause the motor to overheat After a stop immediately switch to a mechanical brake to hold the load Under the following operating conditions the stop on contact function is invalid PU operation Pr 79 JOG operation JOG signal PU External operation Pr 79 PID control function operation Pr 128 Remote setting function operation Pr 59 Automatic a...

Page 714: ... ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Pr 5 Multi speed setting middle speed ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Pr 6 Multi speed setting low speed ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON ON Pr 6 Multi speed setting low speed ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequency ON ON ON Pr 15 Jog frequen...

Page 715: ...ge 5 509 2 Load torque high speed frequency control 3 Stop on contact refer to page 5 509 load torque high speed frequency control 11 Stop on contact control E OLT invalid under stop on contact control 13 Stop on contact load torque high speed frequency control Refer to page 5 509 271 A201 High speed setting maximum current 50 0 to 400 Set the upper and lower limits of the current at high and midd...

Page 716: ...e currentaveragingrange Thecurrentaveragingrangeisfromthe1 2thePr 5tothefullPr 5setting in the current averaging range To use the X19 signal set 19 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function to an input terminal This is valid in External operation mode and Network operation mode The control can be activated at every start I002679E_G Fig 5 241 Connection exa...

Page 717: ...uency regardless of the average current When Pr 273 is used the current averaging range can be set between one half of the frequency of the Pr 273 setting value and the Pr 273 set frequency However the setting value must be smaller than Pr 5 setting When the average current is larger than inverter rated current Pr 271 setting and smaller than inverter rated current Pr 272 setting linear compensati...

Page 718: ...inal Under the following operating conditions the load torque high speed frequency function is inva lid PU operation Pr 79 PU External operation Pr 79 JOG operation PID control function opera tion Pr 128 remote setting function operation Pr 59 orientation control function operation multi speed setting RH RM RL signal torque control position control When the average current during acceleration is t...

Page 719: ...ted with f3 f1 Pr 595 and the inverter accelerates again to f0 f1 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 592 A300 Traverse function selection 0 0 Traverse function invalid 1 Traverse function valid only in External operation mode 2 Traverse function valid regardless of the operation mode 593 A301 Maximum amplitude amount 10 0 to 25 Level of amplitude during traverse operation 594 A302 Amp...

Page 720: ...elected S pattern acceleration deceleration operation occurs only in the range operated at the normal acceleration deceleration time Pr 7 Pr 8 Acceleration deceleration during traverse operation is performed linearly If stall prevention activates during traverse operation traverse operation stops and normal opera tion begins When stall prevention operation is completed the inverter accelerates dec...

Page 721: ...uency reaches the Pr 10 DC injection brake operation frequency or lower 1073 A311 Anti sway control operation selection 0 0 Swinging suppression control disabled 1 Swinging suppression control enabled 1074 A312 Anti sway control frequency 1 Hz 0 05 to 3 Hz Sets the swinging frequency of the load 999 A swinging frequency is estimated based on the Pr 1077 to Pr 1079 settings and swinging suppression...

Page 722: ...on of swinging suppression control Pr 1072 Set the time from when the output frequency becomes the Pr 10 DC injection brake operation fre quency or less to when the zero speed control or the servo lock operation starts in the Pr 1072 DC brake judgment time for Anti sway control operation Setting value 3 2 1 0 Depth Shallow Deep Gain 4 dB 8 dB 14 dB Tab 5 214 Setting of depth and gain I002840E Fig ...

Page 723: ... 701 Pr 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection page 5 291 Pr 286 Droop gain page 5 733 Pr 292 Automatic acceleration deceleration page 5 263 Pr 592 Traverse function selection page 5 517 Pr 690 Deceleration check time page 5 124 Pr 875 Fault definition page 5 313 Pr 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection page 5 723 ...

Page 724: ...ulses reach the specified start position of the DC injection brake 356 A531 Internal stop position command 0 0 to 16383 When 0 is set in Pr 350 the internal position command is activated and the setting value of Pr 356 becomes the stop position 357 A532 Orientation in position zone 5 0 to 255 Set the in position width at a stop of the orientation 358 A533 Servo torque selection 1 0 to 13 Operation...

Page 725: ...rt signal is turned OFF with the orientation command X22 ON after stopping the motor by orientation control the present position is checked again after the set time elapses and the orientation complete signal ORA or orientation fault signal ORM is output 9999 Not checked 369 C140 852 C241 Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of encoder pulses Set the number of pulses before it is...

Page 726: ...tor is selected the orientation control is disabled 862 C242 Encoder option selection 0 0 First motor plug in option that supports the vector control Second motor control terminal option that supports the vector control Machine end orientation invalid 1 First motor control terminal option that supports the vector control Second motor plug in option that supports the vector control Machine end orie...

Page 727: ...o page 2 77 A separate power supply of 5 V 12 V 15 V 24 V is necessary according to the encoder power specification Make the voltage of the external power supply same as the encoder output voltage and connect the external power supply between PG and SD When performing encoder feedback control and vector control together an encoder and power supply can be shared When a stop position command is inpu...

Page 728: ...ng I O signals Selecting stop position command Pr 350 Stop position command selection Select either to use the internal stop position command Pr 356 Internal stop position com mand or the external stop position command 16 bit data using the FR A8AX When the internal stop position command Pr 350 0 is selected the Pr 356 setting is used as the stop position Fig 5 248 Connection of the resistor I0028...

Page 729: ...he FR A8AX is the direct stop position command Example When the Pr 369 Number of encoder pulses setting is 1024 the stop position command from 0 to 4095 can be input using FR A8AX and the digital signal of 2048 H800 is input to stop the motor at a 180 position 2 to 127 Set the stop position command by dividing up to 128 stop positions If the external stop command input is greater than the setting ...

Page 730: ...nternal stop position command is given when no option is mounted or Pr 360 0 even if 1 external stop position command is set in Pr 350 Pr 350 Stop position command selection Pr 360 16 bit data selection Operation status Stop position command 16 bit data FR A8AX Speed command 0 internal 0 speed command Internal Pr 356 Speed command 16 bit data 1 2 to 127 position command Internal Pr 356 Invalid Ext...

Page 731: ...position pulse monitor is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor of the PU Displayed only when a vector control compatible option is mounted Orientation status When 22 is set in Pr 52 the orientation status is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor of the PU Displayed only when a vector control compatible option is mounted 0 Other than orientation operation or orientation speed i...

Page 732: ...in Pr 363 Pr 357 is initially set to 5 Pr 363 is initially set to 0 5 s If the orientation is not completed continuously in Pr 365 Orientation limit after passing the creep switchover position the orientation fault signal ORM is output After the orientation start if the motor is stopped by external force etc before reaching the in position width and therefore the ORA signal has not been output the...

Page 733: ... during running I001581E Fig 5 252 Action time chart for orientation from stop 0 Main spindle speed encoder Pr 351 Pr 352 Start signal STF STR Orientation command X22 Current position signal Origin signal DC injection brake Orientation completion signal ORA Orientation speed set with Pr 351 Creep speed set with Pr 352 Creep switchover position set with Pr 353 Position loop switchover set with Pr 3...

Page 734: ...ds as continuous operation of the DC injection brake will cause the motor to overheat leading to burnout Because the servo lock function is not available after orientation stop provide a holding mecha nism such as a mechanical brake or knock pin when secure holding of the main shaft is required To ensure correct positioning the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction and the A and B p...

Page 735: ...o torque function until output of the orientation complete signal ORA With servo torque function Without servo torque function Retry function With retry function Without retry function Output frequency compensation when the motor stops outside the in position zone With frequency compensation Without frequency compensation DC injection brake and servo torque when the motor exits the in position zon...

Page 736: ...ntation stop position The output frequency is gradually increased to the Pr 352 Creep speed This function cannot be used with the retry function DC injection brake and servo torque selection when the position pulse exits the in position zone after output of the ORA signal If the motor exits the in position width select the setting either to fix the shaft with the DC injection brake or by returning...

Page 737: ...ome position can be moved using Pr 361 Position shift Pr 393 setting Rotation direction Remarks 0 initial value Pre orientation Orientation is executed from the current rotation direction Motor end orientation 1 Forward rotation orientation Orientation is executed from the forward rotation direction If the motor is running in reverse orientation is executed from the forward rotation direction afte...

Page 738: ...running in the reverse rotation direction it will make an orientation stop with the same method as orientation from the current rotation direction If the motor is running in forward it will decelerate change to the reverse rotation direction and then orientation stop will be executed P WARNING IftheX22isturnedOFFwhilethestartsignalisinput themotorwillacceleratetowardthespeed of the current speed c...

Page 739: ...stopping position is exceeded NOTES Couple the encoder with the motor shaft that stops the shaft at the specified position Couple it with the speed ratio of 1 1 and without any mechanical looseness To ensure correct positioning the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction and the A and B phases must be connected correctly If the pulse signal from the encoder stops due to encoder signal...

Page 740: ...tting Increase the Pr 396 and Pr 397 settings The orientation time is long Increase the Pr 399 setting Increase the Pr 362 setting Hunting occurs during stopping Decrease the Pr 362 setting Decrease the Pr 396 setting and increase the Pr 397 setting Low servo rigidity during stopping Increase the Pr 396 setting and decrease the Pr 397 setting Increase the Pr 362 setting Tab 5 222 Adjustment of par...

Page 741: ...e orientation stop Notethat the orientation time will increase I001590E Fig 5 257 Orientation speed NOTE When 19 is set in Pr 52 Operation panel main monitor selection the position pulse monitor is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor on the PU Decelerate according to the deceleration ratio of Pr 399 Orientation command completion ON OFF ON Frequency Hz Pr 351 Orientation speed Orientat...

Page 742: ...eness between the motor and motor shaft Speed ratio must be 1 1 Earth ground the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P clip Refer to page 2 81 I002872E_G Fig 5 258 Machine end orientation connection example vector control R L1 S L2 T L3 DY U V W U V W E C X0 X1 X14 X15 R PA3 PAR3 PB3 PBR3 PZ3 PZR3 PG PG SD SD A N B P H K STF STR PC PC X22 ORM ORA SE FR A8AX FR A8TP ...

Page 743: ... power specifica tion When the encoder output is the differential line driver type only 5 V can be input If using the 24 V power supply of the FR A8TP 24 V power can be supplied from terminal PG24 Make the voltage of the external power supply same as the encoder output voltage and connect the external power supply between PG and SD The encoder and the power supply can be shared under orientation c...

Page 744: ...Pr 394 A C E Pr 395 B D F Exercise care so that the A C E and B D F settings do not exceed 32767 If either or both of them exceed that value make approximations A 15 C 43 E 60 B 10 D 28 F 55 Pr 394 15 43 60 38700 Pr 395 10 28 55 15400 Since Pr 394 setting exceeds 32767 at this time make approximations as follows Fig 5 259 Gear ratio I002873E NOTE The pulley ratio is the ratio of vector driven moto...

Page 745: ...shorter an integral time is set though hunting is more likely to occur 9999 Without integral control 131 A601 PID upper limit 9999 0 to 100 Sets the upper limit The FUP signal is output when the feedback value exceeds this setting The maximum input 20 mA 5 V 10 V of the measured value terminal 4 is equivalent to 100 9999 No function 132 A602 PID lower limit 9999 0 to 100 Set the lower limit The FD...

Page 746: ...ption 1 Integral continued at limited frequency integral cleared during output interruption 10 Integral stopped at limited frequency integral stopped during output interruption 11 Integral continued at limited frequency integral stopped during output interruption 753 A650 Second PID action selection 0 0 10 11 20 21 50 51 60 61 70 71 80 81 90 91 100 101 1000 1001 1010 1011 2000 2001 2010 2011 Refer...

Page 747: ...ID controller I001231E Fig 5 261 System configuration when Pr 128 20 or 21 set feedback value at the inverter Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description Kp 1 Td S 1 Ti S 앫 Set 0 to Pr 868 Terminal 1 function assignment When Pr 868 0 PID control is invalid Set point Deviation signal Kp Proportionality constant Ti Integral time S Operator Td Differential time Motor Manipulated variable Terminal...

Page 748: ...ies a manip ulated amount according to the speed of the deviation to improve excessive characteristics Fig 5 262 Operation example for stepped changes of measured value I002689E NOTE PI action is the result of P and I actions being added together Fig 5 263 Operation example for proportional changes of measured value I002687E NOTE PD action is the result of P and D actions being added together Devi...

Page 749: ...les control that incorporates the respec tive strengths of these actions Fig 5 264 Operation example for proportional changes of measured value I002688E NOTE PID action is the result of all P I and D actions being added together Time Time Time Time Deviation Set point P action Measured value I action PID action D action ...

Page 750: ...ed andwhenthedeviationisaplusvalue themanipulatedamountisdecreased Relationship between deviation and manipulated amount output frequency I002690E Fig 5 265 Heating I002691E Fig 5 266 Cooling PID action setting Deviation Plus Minus Reverse action Forward action Tab 5 223 Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable X 0 X 0 Increase Heating Cold Hot Decrease Deviation Set point Measured...

Page 751: ... signal need not be input I002692E_G Fig 5 267 Connection diagram in source logic MCCB 0 R L1 S L2 T L3 STF STR RT X14 PC 10 2 5 4 U V W FUP FU FDN OL SE M P PID SU RL IPF 1 COM OUT Reverse action Pr 128 20 Pr 183 14 Pr 191 47 Pr 192 16 Pr 193 14 Pr 194 15 Power supply Forward rotation Reverse rotation PID control selection Setting Potentiometer Set point setting Inverter Motor Pump 2 wire type 3 ...

Page 752: ...input Deviation input 0 Invalid PID invalid 10 Reverse action Terminal 1 11 Forward action 20 Reverse action Terminal 2 or Pr 133 Terminal 4 21 Forward action 40 to 43 Valid Dancer control For details on dancer control refer to page 5 571 50 Invalid Reverse action CC Link communication 51 Forward action 60 Reverse action CC Link communication CC Link communication 61 Forward action 70 Reverse acti...

Page 753: ...put perform bias calibration using C3 and C6 to prevent a minus voltage from being entered as the deviation input signal Input of a minus volt age might damage devices and the inverter Input terminal Inspect specification Relationship with analog input Calibration parameter Set point Result Deviation Terminal 2 0 to 5 V 0 V 0 5 V 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 Pr 125 C2 to C4 0 to 10 V 0 V 0 10 V...

Page 754: ...r limit FUP2 Second PID upper limit 201 301 FDN PID lower limit 14 114 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr 132 PID lower limit Pr 1144 Second PID lower limit FDN2 Second PID lower limit 200 300 RL PID forward reverse rotation output 16 116 Hi is output when the output display of the parameter unit is forward rotation FWD and Low is output when the display is reverse rotation REV and s...

Page 755: ...her to output the signals FUP FDN Y48 only or to activate the protective function to output the inverter shutoff The stop action when the inverter output is shut off by the SLEEP function can be selected When each of Pr 131 Pr 132 and Pr 553 corresponding to each of the FUP FDN and Y48 signals is set to 9999 function not activated signal output and protective function are disabled I001234E Fig 5 2...

Page 756: ...he PID output suspension function is released and PID control operation is automatically restarted Whether to allow motor to coast to a stop or perform a deceleration stop when SLEEP operation is started can be selected using Pr 554 While the PID output suspension function is activated the PID output interruption signal SLEEP is output During this time the inverter running signal RUN turns OFF and...

Page 757: ... limited to 100 during PID control The operation during output shutoff can be selected for the integral term using the PID output sus pension function SLEEP function I002694E Fig 5 270 Output interruption SLEEP function Pr 1015 setting Operation at limited frequency Operation during output interruption 0 initial value Integral stop Integral clear 1 Integral continuation Integral clear 10 Integral ...

Page 758: ...ured value 0 1 0 to 100 93 Second PID measured value 67 PIDmeasured value 2 0 1 0 to 100 Displays PID measured value even if PID control operating conditions are not satisfied while the PID control is enabled 0 is displayed at all times when PID control is based in deviation input 95 Second PID measured value 2 54 PID deviation 0 1 Setting not available 100 to 100 900 to 1100 or 100 to 100 Using P...

Page 759: ...a slightly shorter time When performing operation first set the proportional band Pr 129 toaslightlylargervalue theintegraltime Pr 130 toaslightlylonger time and the differential time Pr 134 to 9999 no function and while looking at the system operation decrease the proportional band Pr 129 and increase the integral time Pr 130 For slow response system where a deadband exists differential control P...

Page 760: ...ample 60 Hz to be output by the inverter when the deviation is 100 Using C4 Pr 903 set the voltage value at 100 Calibrating measured value input Apply the input for example 4 mA of measured value 0 across terminals 4 and 5 Perform calibration by C6 Pr 904 Apply the input for example 20 mA of measured value 100 across terminals 4 and 5 Perform calibration by C7 Pr 905 The figure below shows the res...

Page 761: ... is not applied to the frequency Pr 128 setting First PID setting Pr 753 setting Second PID setting Pr 155 setting RT signal PID setting applied to the output frequency 0 or not applied to the frequency 0 or not applied to the frequency Control other than PID control 0 or not applied to the frequency Applied to the frequency Second PID setting Applied to the frequency 0 or not applied to the frequ...

Page 762: ...econd output interruption detection time 576 Output interruption detection level 1148 Second output interruption detection level 577 Output interruption cancel level 1149 Second output interruption cancel level 609 PID set point deviation input selection 1140 Second PID set point deviation input selection 610 PID measured value input selection 1141 Second PID measured value input selection Tab 5 2...

Page 763: ...nal When PID control is selected the minimum frequency becomes the frequency of Pr 902 and the maximum frequency becomes the frequency of Pr 903 The Pr 1 Maximum frequency and Pr 2 Minimum frequency settings also are valid During PID operation the remote operation function is invalid When control is switched to PID control during normal operation the frequency during that oper ation is not carried...

Page 764: ...Pr 935 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 759 A600 PID unit selection 0 0 to 43 Change the PID control related display unit that is displayed on the LCD operation panel FR LU08 or the parameter unit FR PU07 9999 Without display unit switching C42 A630 934 PID display bias coefficient 9999 0 to 500 Set the coefficient of the bias side minimum of measured value input 9999 Displayed in C...

Page 765: ... positive value even though a positive negative deviation is given Pr 934 PID bias coefficient Pr 935 PID gain coefficient To perform a reverse action set Pr 128 PID action selection to forward action Alternatively to perform a forward action set Pr 128 to reverse action I002699E Fig 5 273 PID bias and gain NOTE Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage current input specification with...

Page 766: ...ff release at deviation of 40 or higher set Pr 577 960 Pr Name Pr Name 131 PID upper limit 1143 Second PID upper limit 132 PID lower limit 1144 Second PID lower limit 133 PID action set point 755 Second PID action set point 553 PID deviation limit 1145 Second PID deviation limit 577 Output interruption cancel level 1149 Second output interruption cancel level 761 Pre charge ending level 766 Second...

Page 767: ...uare Inch 27 lbM Pound per Minute 5 MPa Mega Pascal 28 lbS Pound per Second 6 kPa Kilo Pascal 29 iWC Inch Water Column 7 Pa Pascal 30 iWG Inch Water Gauge 8 bar Bar 31 fWG Feet of Water Gauge 9 mbr Millibar 32 mWG Meter of Water Gauge 10 GPH Gallon per Hour 33 iHg Inches of Mercury 11 GPM Gallon per Minute 34 mHg Millimeters of Mercury 12 GPS Gallon per Second 35 kgH Kilograms per Hour 13 L H Lite...

Page 768: ...put terminal function selection to assign the function Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 760 A616 Pre charge fault selection 0 0 Fault indication with output shutoff immediately after pre charge fault occurs 1 Fault indication with deceleration stop after pre charge fault occurs 761 A617 Pre charge ending level 9999 0 to 100 Set the measured amount to end the pre charge operation 999...

Page 769: ...999 Not assigned Result Time Assigned Result Time X77 Tab 5 238 Settings of the pre charge function NOTES During the pre charge operation it is regarded as integrated value estimated value The motor speed may drop shortly from the automatic switchover frequency depending on the parameter settings Parameter changes and switchover to the second PID control are applied immediately If PID con trol has...

Page 770: ...ontrol is performed When the signal is input to end the pre charge operation When the X77 signal turns ON the pre charge operation ends and the PID control starts If a start command is given while the X77 signal is ON the pre charge operation is not performed and PID control starts I002702E Fig 5 274 Pre charge ending level Pr 761 9999 I002703E Fig 5 275 Pre charge ending time Pr 762 9999 I002701E...

Page 771: ... function is released set the X77 signal to OFF after checking that the during pre charge oper ation signal Y49 is OFF When the PID output suspension SLEEP function is in use and PID control is to be performed immediately after this function is released leave the X77 signal ON until PID control ends When the pre charge operation is valid the pre charge operation is performed at the output shut off...

Page 772: ...e charge upper detection level 768 Second pre charge upper detection level 764 Pre charge time limit 769 Second pre charge time limit Tab 5 239 Parameters for setting multiple PID pre charge functions Classification First pre charge function parameters Second pre charge function parameters Signal Name Signal Name Input signal X77 Pre charge end command X78 Second pre charge end command Output sign...

Page 773: ...by slight changes in the measured value As a result response improves as the proportional band becomes narrower though stability worsens as shown by the occurrence of hunting Gain Kp 1 proportional band 9999 Without proportional band 130 A614 PID integral time 1s 0 1 to 3600 s With deviation step input this is the time Ti used for obtaining the same manipulated amount as proportional band P by onl...

Page 774: ... measured value from terminal 2 3 Input measured value from terminal 4 4 Input measured value via CC Link communication 5 Input measured value by PLC function 1134 A605 PID upper limit manipulated value 100 0 to 100 Set the upper limit of PID action 1135 A606 PID lower limit manipulated value 100 0 to 100 Set the lower limit of PID action I002706E Fig 5 279 Dancer control block diagram Pr Name Ini...

Page 775: ... dancer control NOTES Normally set Pr 7 Acceleration time and Pr 8 Deceleration time to 0 s When the Pr 7 and Pr 8 settings are large dancer control response becomes slow during acceleration deceleration The Pr 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency setting is enabled The larger setting value between Pr 7 and Pr 44 is used as the acceleration time during normal operation For the decelerati...

Page 776: ... 5 281 Example in source logic Pr 128 setting PID action Additive method Set point input Measured value input 0 PID invalid 40 Reverse action Fixed Set by Pr 133 or Input by terminal selected by Pr 609 Input by terminal selected by Pr 610 41 Forward action 42 Reverse action Ratio 43 Forward action Others Refer to page 5 543 Tab 5 241 PID control in dependence of parameter 128 MCCB R L1 S L2 T L3 S...

Page 777: ...tions of terminals 2 and 4 by Pr 73 Analog input selection or Pr 267 Terminal 4 input selection to match the specification of the input device When Pr 133 PID action set point 9999 Pr 133 is the set point When the set point is set at Pr 133 the setting frequency of Pr 902 is equivalent to 0 and the setting frequency of Pr 903 is equivalent to 100 When the same input method has been selected for th...

Page 778: ...nal 2 0 to 5 V 0 V 0 5 V 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 Pr 125 C2 to C4 0 to 10 V 0 V 0 10 V 100 0 V 0 10 V 100 0 to 20 mA 0 mA 0 20 mA 100 0 mA 0 20 mA 100 Terminal 1 0 to 5 V 5 V to 0 V 0 5 V 100 5 V to 0 V 0 5 V 100 When Pr 128 10 Pr 125 C2 to C4 When Pr 128 1000 C12 to C15 0 to 10V 10 V to 0 V 0 10 V 100 10 V to 0 V 0 10 V 100 Terminal 4 0 to 5 V 0 V to 1 V 0 5 V 100 0 V to 1 V 0 5 V 100 Pr 126 C5 to C7 0 ...

Page 779: ...e resulting from frequency conversion of Pr 1134 to the main speed The lower limit of the manipulated amount is the frequency obtained by subtracting the value resulting from frequency conversion of Pr 1135 from the main speed I002710E Fig 5 283 Upper and lower limits of the PID manipulated amount Output frequency Upper limit of PID manipulated amount Main speed Lower limit of PID manipulated amou...

Page 780: ...set by turning ON this signal Tab 5 244 Input signals and parameter setting Signal Function Pr 190 to Pr 196 setting Description Positive logic Negative logic FUP PID upper limit 15 115 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr 131 PID upper limit Pr 1143 Second PID upper limit FDN PID lower limit 14 114 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr 132 PID lower limit Pr 1144 Second PID...

Page 781: ... is specified as the measured value input or set point input the main speed is treated as 0 Polarity reversible operation of the main speed is not possible Adjustment procedure for dancer roll position detection signal When the input of terminal 4 is voltage input 0 V and 5 V 10 V are the lower limit position and upper limit position respectively When it is current input 4 mA and 20 mA are the low...

Page 782: ... 10 but the smaller value between Pr 13 and 0 5 Hz The set frequency monitor is the value main speed command PID control which is con stantly changing With the main speed setting frequency setting acceleration deceleration is performed for the acceleration deceleration time set at Pr 44 and Pr 45 and with the output frequency setting acceleration deceleration is performed for the acceleration dece...

Page 783: ...t no frequency search 12 Encoder detection frequency search at every start 13 Frequency search at every start reduced impact restart 299 A701 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 0 0 Without rotation direction 1 With rotation direction 9999 When Pr 78 0 with rotation direction When Pr 78 1 2 without rotation direction 57 A702 Restart coasting time 9999 0 Coasting time differs accor...

Page 784: ... are not activated Connection CS signal Restart is enabled at turn ON of the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start CS signal The inverter operation is disabled at turn OFF of the CS signal while Pr 57 Restart coasting time 9999 with restart NOTES To operate the inverter with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function ena bled check the following poi...

Page 785: ...terminal MRS in the initial setting For the X10 signal of separated converter types NC contact input specification is selected in the initial setting Set Pr 599 0 to change the input specification to NO contact Fig 5 287 Connecting the signals X10 X11 CS I002850E_G NOTES The CS signal is assigned to terminal CS in the initial setting By setting 6 to any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function ...

Page 786: ... offline auto tuning is required For details on offline auto tuning of Advanced magnetic flux vector control and Real sensorless vector control refer to page 5 72 and for details on offline auto tuning of V F control refer to page 5 594 Pr 162 setting Restart operation V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control Vector control PM sensorless vector control Witho...

Page 787: ...bled is set to Pr 78 operation decelerates by reverse rotation and then changes to forward rotation when the start command is forward rotation The inverter does not restart when the start command is reverse rotation When 3 13 is set to Pr 162 limit the wiring length to within 100 m V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Instantaneous power failure time Power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 Motor ...

Page 788: ...ut frequency that was active before the instantaneous power failure stored in memory If the instantaneous power failure time is 0 2 s or more the output fre quency can no longer be stored and held in memory so the restart is performed from Pr 13 Start ing frequency During Real sensorless vector control Pr 162 is set to 3 or 13 reduced impact restart I002715E Fig 5 290 Restart operation with encode...

Page 789: ...he table below according to the Pr 30 setting NOTES If 2 12 are set to Pr 162 when encoder feedback control is invalid the automatic restart is with a frequency search Pr 162 0 10 In vector control encoder detection frequency search is used regardless of the Pr 162 setting The Pr 58 and Pr 299 settings are invalid at this time For the encoder feedback control refer to page 5 730 Pr 30 setting Oper...

Page 790: ...equency before instantaneous power failure when Pr 162 1 or 11 Normally the motor runs at the initial value as it is However adjust to suit the moment of inertia J of the load or the size of the torque Pr 58 is invalid under Real sensorless vector control or vector control Pr 570 setting Pr 162 setting 200 V class FR A820 첸 00046 0 4K 00077 0 75K 00105 1 5K 00167 2 2K 00250 3 7K 00340 5 5K 00490 7...

Page 791: ...he SU and FU signals are not output during the restart These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is invalid when the load torque high speed frequency control Pr 270 2 3 13 is set E CAUTION Prov...

Page 792: ...al When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected motor driving is resumed at the power restoration after an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage E IPF and E UVT are not activated Connection CS signal Restart is enabled at turn ON of the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start CS signal The inverter operation is disabled at turn OF...

Page 793: ...t terminal solely setting Pr 57 will enable the restart operation at all times If the restart operation is selected instantaneous power failure protection E IPF is disabled while the fault output signal is output at an instantaneous power failure The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes Restart operation is also performe...

Page 794: ...nction Pr 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 1 to make startups stable If the overvoltage protective function E OV첸 still occurs with the regeneration avoidance function also use the retry function Pr 67 During PM sensorless vector control the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure func tion operates only when an MM CF IPM motor is connected When a built in brake or a rege...

Page 795: ...quency search 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA MM CF and so on 560 A712 Second frequency search gain 9999 0 to 32767 The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the frequency search of the second motor 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor SF PR SF JR SF HR SF JRCA SF HRCA MM CF and so on 96 C110 Auto tuning setting ...

Page 796: ... run slightly without actually turning during offline auto tuning Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 11 so either firmly secure the motor by the mechanical brake or check to see if turning the motor will cause any safety problems Attention is required for lifts in particular The motor turning slightly will not affect tuning performance Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surge vo...

Page 797: ...rning the start signal STF signal or STR signal OFF also ends tuning During offline auto tuning only the following I O signals are valid initial value Input terminals valid signals STP STOP OH MRS RT RES STF STR S1 and S2 Output terminals RUN OL IPF FM CA AM A1B1C1 and SO When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM CA and AM the progress status of offline auto tu...

Page 798: ...wing parameters Status Operation panel FR DU08 display LCD operation panel FR LU08 display Setting Tuning in progress Normal end Tab 5 252 Display during tuning monitor display Parameter Name 90 Motor constant R1 298 Frequency search gain 96 Auto tuning setting status Tab 5 253 Set parameters NOTE The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data ...

Page 799: ... Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again 91 The current limit stall prevention function is activated Set the acceleration deceleration time longer Set Pr 156 Stall prevention operation selection 1 92 The converter output voltage fell to 75 of the rated value Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation 93 Calculation error The motor is not connected Check the motor wiring a...

Page 800: ...RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal E CAUTION Note that the motor may start run...

Page 801: ...lerates from the output frequency Pr 262 264 A733 Power failure deceleration time 1 5 s 0 to 3600 s Set the slope applicable from the deceleration start to the Pr 266 set frequency 265 A734 Power failure deceleration time 2 9999 0 to 3600 s Set the slope applicable for the frequency range starting at Pr 266 and downward 9999 Same as Pr 264 266 A735 Power failure deceleration time switchover freque...

Page 802: ...f the converter unit in accordance with the inverter setting Refer to the Instruction Manual of the converter unit Outline of operation of deceleration stop at a power failure If an undervoltage or power failure occurs the output frequency is turned OFF only for the frequency set to Pr 262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start The motor decelerates for the time set to Pr 264 Power failure dec...

Page 803: ...rence of power failure Deceleration stop time Undervoltage avoidance function 0 Coasts to stop Coasts to stop 1 Deceleration stop Deceleration stop According to Pr 262 to Pr 266 setting Not used 2 Re acceleration Not used 11 Deceleration stop With 12 Re acceleration With 21 Deceleration stop Automatic adjustment of deceleration time Not used 22 Re acceleration Not used Tab 5 257 Setting of Pr 261 ...

Page 804: ...eration stop function is set enabled Pr 261 1 11 or 21 the power failure time deceleration stop function is disabled When the power failure time deceleration stop function is enabled Pr 261 1 11 21 the inverter will not start even if the power is turned ON or inverter reset is performed with the start signal STR STF ON Turn OFF the start signal once and then ON again to make a start Power supply O...

Page 805: ... occurrence of power failure Adjust the downward frequency slope and the response level using Pr 294 UV avoidance voltage gain Setting a large value improves the response to the bus voltage I002720E Fig 5 298 Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure NOTE The undervoltage avoidance function is invalid under torque control by Real sensorless vector control When 11 12 is set to Pr 261 op...

Page 806: ...f the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which X48 signal of the inverter is assigned In the initial setting X48 signal is used with the normally closed NC contact input specification Use Pr 606 Power failure stop external signal input selection to change the specification to the normally open NO contact input To use the X48 signal set 48 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Input terminal funct...

Page 807: ...deceleration stop function is selected undervoltage protection E UVT instantaneous power failure protection E IPF and input phase loss protection E ILF are not invalid When the load is high during PM sensorless vector control an undervoltage sometimes causes the inverter to coast to a stop To use the power failure time deceleration to stop function for the separated converter type use a converter ...

Page 808: ... When the pulse train is input from terminal JOG the number of sampled pulses can be converted The result of conversion is stored to SD1236 Number of sampled pulses input pulse value per count cycle pre scale setting value Pr 417 unit scale factor Pr 416 417 A803 Pre scale setting value 1 0 to 32767 Pre scale setting value 498 A804 PLC function flash memory clear 0 0 9696 0 to 9999 0 Clears the fl...

Page 809: ...function selection to assign the function to a terminal When 1 is set in Pr 415 Inverter operation lock mode setting the inverter can be operated only when the sequence program is running By changing the PLC program status from RUN to STOP during inverter operation the motor decelerates to stop To stop the inverter operation at the STOP status of the PLC program while performing auto operation usi...

Page 810: ... 2 68 for an outline of the USB communication function I002722E Fig 5 300 Copying the PLC function project data to USB memory Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Faults history mode USB memory mode Project data file number displays 1 to 99 unrelated to the number of files saved in the USB memory device Overwrite the inverter project data file onto the designated file in the USB memor...

Page 811: ...pported Supported DAT Project management information Supported Not available TXT Copy information Supported Not available Tab 5 258 Data that can be copied NOTE If the project data of the PLC function is locked with a password using FR Configurator2 copying to the USB memory device and verification are disabled Also if set to write disabled writing to the inverter is disabled For the details of th...

Page 812: ...g or digital trigger OR logic 4 Both analog and digital trigger AND logic 1026 A906 Number of sampling before trigger 90 0 to 100 Set the percentage of the pre trigger sampling time with respect to the overall sampling time 1027 A910 Analog source selection 1ch 201 1 to 3 5 to 14 17 to 20 22 to 24 32 to 36 40 to 42 46 52 to 54 61 62 64 67 71to74 87 to 98 201 to 213 222 to 227 230 to 232 235 to 238...

Page 813: ...gital source selection 4ch 4 1042 A934 Digital source selection 5ch 5 1043 A935 Digital source selection 6ch 6 1044 A936 Digital source selection 7ch 7 1045 A937 Digital source selection 8ch 8 1046 A938 Digital trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the digital channel to be the trigger 1047 A939 Digital trigger operation selection 0 0 Trace starts when the signal turns ON 1 Trace starts when the signal ...

Page 814: ... the inverter If automatic transfer is set the trace data in internal RAM is transferred to USB memory device when the trigger is being generated Data can be transferred to a USB memory device as long as data is held in internal RAM Trace data in internal RAM is cleared when the power supply is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset 1 Memory mode automatic transfer 2 Recorder mode In this mode t...

Page 815: ...uency high speed Pr 84 18 Motor excitation current 202 U Phase output current ND rated current 19 Position pulse 65535 203 V Phase output current ND rated current 20 Cumulative energization time 65535 204 W Phase output current ND rated current 22 Orientation status 65535 205 Converter output voltage 23 Actual operation time 65535 206 Output current all three phases ND rated current 24 Motor load ...

Page 816: ...d motor frequency 120 number of motor poles 64 PTC thermistor resistance Pr 561 232 Speed command 67 PID measured value 2 235 Torque command 100 71 Cumulative pulse 236 Motor torque 100 72 Cumulative pulse overflow times 237 Excitation current command 100 73 Cumulative pulse control terminal option 238 Torque current command 100 Setting value Monitored item Minus sign display Triggerlevel criterio...

Page 817: ...S 123 DO2 10 STP STOP 124 DO3 11 RES 125 DO4 12 CS 126 DO5 21 X0 For the details of the signals refer to the Instruction Manual of FR A8AX option 127 DO6 22 X1 128 RA1 For the details of the signals refer to the Instruction Manual of FR A8AR option 23 X2 129 RA2 24 X3 130 RA3 25 X4 26 X5 27 X6 28 X7 29 X8 30 X9 31 X10 32 X11 33 X12 34 X13 35 X14 36 X15 37 DY Tab 5 262 Digital source monitored item...

Page 818: ... transferred during sampling To automatically start sampling when the power supply is turned ON or at a recovery after an inverter reset set 1 to Pr 1024 Sampling auto start Pr 1036 setting Trigger generation conditions Trigger level setting 0 Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger exceeds the value specified at the trigger level Set the trigger level by Pr 1037 400 to 400 1...

Page 819: ...urningONandOFF respectively To input the TRG signal set 46 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection and to input the TRC signal set 47 to assign the function to a terminal I002724E Fig 5 302 Selection of the trace mode settings NOTE Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confi...

Page 820: ...he trace status Monitor value Trace status 1000s place 100s place 10s place 1s place 0 or no display No trace data in internal RAM USB memory not accessed Trigger not detected Trace stopped 1 Trace data in internal RAM USB memory being accessed Trigger detected Trace operation 2 USB memory transfer error 3 USB buffer overrun Tab 5 267 Trace status LED status Operating status OFF No USB connection ...

Page 821: ...N031 P N034 P N080 Pr 539 Pr 331 Pr 332 Pr 334 Pr 343 5 655 Communication operation through the CC Link IE Field Network FR A800 GF CC Link IE Field Network P N100 P N110 P N111 Pr 434 Pr 435 Pr 541 5 673 To communicate via Ethernet connector FR A800 E Initial setting of Ethernet communication P N600 to P N603 P N610 to P N613 P N630 to P N632 P N641 to P N644 P N650 P N651 P N660 to P N666 P N670...

Page 822: ...Name Description 1 SG Earth ground connected to terminal 5 2 Operation panel power supply 3 RDA Inverter receive 4 SDB Inverter send 5 SDA Inverter send 6 RDB Inverter receive 7 SG Earth ground connected to terminal 5 8 Operation panel power supply Tab 5 269 PU connector terminal description NOTES Pins No 2 and 8 provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit Do not use these pins during R...

Page 823: ...nector FR ADP option PU connector Inverter RJ 45 connector Communication cable RS 485 interface terminals RJ 45 connector Computer Station 0 Inverter PU connector RS 232C cable Maximum 15 m RS 232C connector Computer Station 0 Inverter PU connector RS 232C RS 485 converter RJ 45 connector Communication cable RJ 45 connector Communication cable SDB SDA RDB RDA FG SG CSB CSA RSB RSA RDB RDA SDB SDA ...

Page 824: ...anufacturer Refer to the following table when fabricating the cable on the user side Commercially available products as of February 2015 Do not use pins No 2 and 8 of the communication cable I002384E Fig 5 307 RS 485 terminals layout Model Manufacturer Interface embedded cable DAFXIH CAB D SUB25P for personal computer side DAFXIH CABV D SUB9P for personal computer side Connector conversion cable D...

Page 825: ...100 mA SG GND Earthing grounding connected to terminal SD Tab 5 270 RS 485 terminal description NOTES To avoid malfunction keep the RS 485 terminal wires away from the control circuit board When the FR A820 01250 22K or lower or the FR A840 00620 22K or lower is used with a plug in option lead the wires through the hole on the side face of the front cover for wiring of the RS 485 terminals When th...

Page 826: ...face terminals Twisted pair cable Converter Twisted pair cable Set the terminating resistor switch to the 100 position RS 485 terminals RS 485 interface terminals RS 232C cable Computer Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Station 0 Station 1 Station n Inverter Inverter Inverter RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals RS 485 terminals Inverter Inverter...

Page 827: ...ection to several inverter NOTE For branching connect the wires as shown below I002733E Fig 5 312 2 wire type connection NOTE A program should be created so that transmission is disabled receiving state when the computer is not sending and reception is disabled sending state during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA SG RSB CSA CSB FG SG SG SG SG SG 2 ...

Page 828: ...ion in any operation mode 1 Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode 500 N011 Communication error execution waiting time 0 s 0 to 999 8 s Set the time from when the communication line error occurs until the inverter starts the operation for the communication error when a communication option is used 501 N012 Communication error occurrence count display 0 0 Displays the c...

Page 829: ...3 or Pr 1432 Ethernet communication check time interval 9999 during Ethernet communication When a communication error is detected while communication with the RS 485 terminals is performed thealarm LF signalisoutputto anoutputterminaloftheinverter TousetheLFsignal set 98 positive logic or 198 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to the...

Page 830: ...tion Fault ALM signal Operating status Indication Fault ALM signal Communication line 0 initial value Coasts to stop E SER E EHR ON Stop status continues E SER E EHR ON 1 Deceleration stop E SER after stop E EHR after stop ON after stop 2 OFF Automatic restart function Normal display OFF 3 Operation continued at the set frequency of Pr 779 Normal display OFF Normal operation Normal display OFF 4 C...

Page 831: ...OFF OFF OFF Time Time Time Time Decelerates to stop Motor coasting Motor coasting Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault removal Fault removal Fault occurrence Fault occurrence Fault display E SER Fault output ALM Fault display E SER Fault output ALM Communication fault Pr 502 setting 2 Pr 502 setting 3 Communication fault Communication fault Fault display E SER Fault output ALM Display Display Faul...

Page 832: ...r and the faults history goes back to the previous status If Pr 502 0 the normal deceleration time setting settings like Pr 8 Pr 44 and Pr 45 is applied as the deceleration time Normal acceleration time setting settings like Pr 7 and Pr 44 is applied as the acceleration time for restart When Pr 502 2 3 or 4 the inverter operates with the start command and the speed command which were used before t...

Page 833: ...comes invalid For FR A800 E If the communication error setting is disabled with the settings of Pr 502 3 and Pr 1432 9999 the inverter does not continue its operation at the frequency set in Pr 779 when a communication error occurs If the communication error setting is disabled with Pr 502 3 or 4 Pr 335 9999 and Pr 539 9999 the inverter does not continue its operation with the frequency set by Pr ...

Page 834: ...and the operation continues Operation from the error occurrence until the Pr 500 setting time elapses When the communication returns to normal within the time period set in Pr 500 the communi cation option error E OP1 does not occur I002852E Fig 5 315 Recognition of a communication error depending on Pr 500 setting Error definition Pr 502 setting Operation Indication Fault output Communication lin...

Page 835: ...External operation mode or the PU operation mode use this parameter to disable an error reset command sent through the Ethernet network CC Link IE Field Network Basic or from a communication option I002853E Fig 5 316 Communication error count NOTE Communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory The error count is stored in EEPROM only once per hour If power reset or inverter rese...

Page 836: ...is valid when powering on or resetting the inverter Pr 340 can be changed with the operation panel independently of the operation mode When setting a value other than 0 in Pr 340 make sure that the communication settings of the inverter are correct Parameters referred to Pr 7 Acceleration time page 5 241 Pr 8 Deceleration time page 5 241 Pr 79 Operation mode selection page 5 271 Pr 335 RS 485 comm...

Page 837: ...d For example if 192 is set the communication speed is 19200 bps N022 PU communication data length 0 0 Data length 8 bits 1 Data length 7 bits N023 PU communication stop bit length 1 0 Stop bit length 1 bit 1 Stop bit length 2 bits 119 PU communication stop bit length data length 1 0 Stop bit length 1 bit Data length 8 bits 1 Stop bit length 2 bits 10 Stop bit length 1 bit Data length 7 bits 11 St...

Page 838: ...Pr 120 335 N035 RS 485 communication retry count 1 0 to 10 9999 Set the permissible number of retries for unsuccessful data reception Same specifications as Pr 121 336 N036 RS 485 communication check time interval 0 s 0 RS 485 communication is available but the inverter trips in the NET operation mode 0 1 to 999 8 s Set the interval of the communication check signal loss detection time Same specif...

Page 839: ...f is not sent subsequent communication is made properly Item Description Related parameter Communication protocol Mitsubishi protocol computer link Pr 551 Conforming standard EIA 485 RS 485 Connectable units 1 N maximum 32 units setting is 0 to 31 stations Pr 117 Pr 331 Communication Speed PU connector Selected among 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Pr 118 RS 485 terminals Selected among 300 600 1200 240...

Page 840: ...m the inverter to the inverter reset request can be selected Refer to page 5 648 At mode error and data range error C1 data contains an error code Refer to page 5 654 Except for those errors the error is returned with data format D Symbol Operation Operation command Operation frequency Multi command Parameter write Inverter reset Monitor Parameter read Communication request is sent to the inverter...

Page 841: ...arriage return and LF line feed are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers In this case settingmustbealsomadeontheinverteraccordingtothecomputer WhethertheCRandLFcodes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr 124 and Pr 341 CR LF selection Format Number of characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A ENQ Inverter station No Instruction code Data Su...

Page 842: ...carriage return and LF line feed are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers In this case settingmustbealsomadeontheinverteraccordingtothecomputer WhethertheCRandLFcodes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr 124 or Pr 341 CR LF selection Format Number of characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B ENQ Inverter stationNo Instruction code Sum check Format Number of characters ...

Page 843: ...the transmission of reply data Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer in the range of 0 to 150 ms in 10 ms increments For example 1 10 ms 2 20 ms Signal name ASCII Code Description STX H02 Start Of Text Start of data ETX H03 End Of Text End of data ENQ H05 Inquiry Communication request ACK H06 Acknowledge No data error detected LF H0A Line Feed CR H0D Carriage Re...

Page 844: ... from the initial setting H5 Overrun error New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data H6 H7 Character error The character received is invalid other than 0 to 9 A to F control code Does not accept the received data but the inverter does not trip H8 H9 HA Mode error Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation mode whe...

Page 845: ...ation specifications NOTES In addition to the above 1 start bit is necessary Minimum number of total bits 9 bits maximum number of total bits 12 bits Item Check time Various monitors operation command Frequency setting RAM 12 ms Parameter read write Frequency setting EEPROM 30 ms Parameter clear all clear 5 s Reset command No answer Tab 5 280 Data check time Error code Error item Error description...

Page 846: ...nal To use the LF signal set 98 positive logic or 198 negative logic in any of Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection to assign the function to an output terminal I002738E Fig 5 321 Data transmission error NOTE For the RS 485 terminal communication the operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the Pr 502 Stop mode selection at communication error setting Refer to page 5...

Page 847: ...hin the communication check time interval The inverter makes a communication check clearing of communication check counter regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master Communication check is started at the first communication in the operation mode having the operation source PU operation mode for PU connector communication in the initial setting or Network operation mo...

Page 848: ...anged communication information if bRet TRUE Set COM1 port timeout GetCommTimeouts hCom hTim Get current timeout values hTim WriteTotalTimeoutConstant 1000 Write timeout 1 second hTim ReadTotalTimeoutConstant 1000 Read timeout 1 second hTim ReadTotalTimeoutConstantSetCommTimeouts hCom hTim Setting of changed timeout values Setting of command for switching the station number 1 inverter to the Netwo...

Page 849: ... to signal cable breakage etc the inverter cannot be stopped When the communication check time interval has elapsed the inverter will trip E PUE E SER The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching ON the RES signals or by switching the power OFF If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage computer fault etc the inverter does not detect such a fault This should be fully noted Port ...

Page 850: ...wer Increment 0 1 A FR A820 03800 75K or higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher 4 digits B E D Output voltage Read H71 H0000 to HFFFF Output voltage hexadecimal in 0 1 V increments 4 digits B E D Special monitor Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF Monitor data selected in the instruction code HF3 4 digits B E D Special monitor selection No Read H73 Monitor selection data Refer to page 5 344 for details on selecti...

Page 851: ...communication parameters or not can be selected according to the data 앫 Parameter clear H9696 Communication parameters are cleared H5A5A Communication parameters are not cleared 앫 All parameter clear H9966 Communication parameters are cleared H55AA Communication parameters are not cleared For the details of whether or not to clear parameters refer to page A 5 When a clear is performed with H9696 o...

Page 852: ...in increments of 0 1kW and rounds down to 0 01kW increments H20 blank code is set for blank area Example 0 75K 7 H20 H20 H20 H20 H20 H37 6 digits B E2 D NOTES Set 65520 HFFF0 as a parameter value 8888 and 65535 HFFFF as 9999 For the instruction codes HFF HEC and HF3 their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or all clear is performed When a 32 bit parameter setti...

Page 853: ...ain signal 1F 9F 9 C6 904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1 C11 931 Current output gain current 1F 9F 9 126 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1 C38 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque 20 A0 9 C7 905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1 C39 932 Terminal 4 bias torque 20 A0 9 C12 917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed 11 91 9 C40 933 Terminal 4 gain command torque 21 A1 ...

Page 854: ...e Operation command HFA 8 bits b0 AU Terminal 4 input selection b1 Forward rotation command b2 Reverse rotation command b3 RL Low speed operation command b4 RM Middle speed operation command b5 RH High speed operation command b6 RT Second function selection b7 MRS Output stop Operation command extended HF9 16 bits b0 AU Terminal 4 input selection b1 Forward rotation command b2 Reverse rotation com...

Page 855: ...verload warning b5 IPF Instantaneous power failure undervoltage b6 FU Output frequency detection b7 ABC1 Fault Inverter status monitor extended H79 16 bits b0 RUN Inverter running b1 During forward rotation b2 During reverse rotation b3 SU Up to frequency b4 OL Overload warning b5 IPF iInstantaneous power failure undervoltage b6 FU Output frequency detection b7 ABC1 Fault b8 ABC2 b9 Safety monitor...

Page 856: ...rs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A2 ENQ Inverterstation No Instruction Code HF0 Wait ing time Send datatype Receive datatype Data1 Data2 Sum check CR LF Format Number of characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 C1 STX Inverterstation No Send datatype Receive datatype Error code1 Error code2 Data1 Data2 ETX Sum check CR LF Data type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks 0 Operat...

Page 857: ... 1 bit and 2 bits according to Pr 333 1 With parity check at odd numbers Stop bit length 1 bit 2 With parity check at even numbers Stop bit length 1 bit 343 N080 Communication error count 0 Displays the communication error count during Modbus RTU communication Read only 539 N002 Modbus RTU communication check time interval 9999 0 Modbus RTU communication but the inverter trips in the NET operation...

Page 858: ...tion Speed Selected among 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 115200 bps Pr 332 Control procedure Asynchronous system Communication method Half duplex system Communica tion specifica tions Character system Binary fixed at 8 bits Start bit 1 bit Stop bit length Select from the following three types No parity check stop bit length 2 bits Odd parity check stop bit length 1 bit Even pa...

Page 859: ...fromthemasterexecutetherequestedfunction Withthistypeofcommunication slaves do not return a response to the master Message frame protocol Communication method Basically the master sends a Query message question and slaves return the Response message response At normal communication the Device Address and Function Code are copied as they are and at erroneous communication illegal function code or d...

Page 860: ...as the request and the slave performs the requested operation Function code list summarizes the supported function codes An error response is generated when a function code other than Function code list is set At a response from the slave the function code set by the master is returned in the case of a normal response At an error response H80 the function code is returned Data field The format cha...

Page 861: ... H08 Functions are diagnosed communication check only A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return message subfunction code H00 function Subfunction code H00 Return Query Data Not available 5 662 Preset multiple registers Write H10 Data is written to consecutive multiple holding registers Data can be written to consecuti...

Page 862: ...2 is read No of points Set the number of holding registers to read Data can be read from up to 125 registers Tab 5 290 Description of the query message Message Description Byte count The setting range is H02 to HFA 2 to 250 Twice the number of reads specified by is set Data The amount of data specified by is set Read data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes and is arranged as follows dat...

Page 863: ...8 bits Message Description Slave address Set the address to send messages to Setting 0 enables broadcast communication Function Set H06 Register address Set the address from data is written to the holding register Register address holding register address decimal 40001 For example when register address 0001 is set data is written to holding register address 40002 Preset data Set the data to write ...

Page 864: ...ction Data CRC check 8 bits H08 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits Slave address Function Subfunction Data CRC check 8 bits H08 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits Message Description Slave address Set the address to send messages to Broadcast communication is not possible Invalid when 0 is set Function Set H08 Subfunction Set H0000 Data A...

Page 865: ...ata to the holding register Start address start register address decimal 40001 For example when start register address 0001 is set the data of holding register address 40002 is read No of points Set the number of holding registers to write to Data can be written to up to 125 registers Byte count The setting range is H02 to HFA 2 to 250 Set twice the value specified by d Data Set the amount of data...

Page 866: ...is not possible Invalid when 0 is set Function Set H46 Tab 5 295 Description of the query message Message Description Starting address The start address of the holding register that was successfully accessed is returned Start address start register address decimal 40001 For example when start address 0001 is returned the holding register address that was successfully accessed is 40002 No of points...

Page 867: ... No response is also returned in the case of broadcast communication Slave address Function Exception code CRC check 8 bits H80 Function 8 bits 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits Message Description Slave address Set the address received from the master Function The function code requested by the master H80 is set Exception code The codes in the following table are set Tab 5 297 Description of response data...

Page 868: ...e error The data length of the message frame is checked and an error is generated if the received data length is less than 4 bytes CRC check error An error is generated if the data in the message frame does not match the calculation result Tab 5 299 Error check items NOTE The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr 190 to Pr 196 output terminal function selection Changing the...

Page 869: ... Real time monitor Refer to page 5 344 for the register numbers and monitored items of the real time monitor Bit Definition Control input command Inverter status 0 Stop command RUN Inverter running 1 Forward rotation command During forward rotation 2 Reverse rotation command During reverse rotation 3 RH High speed operation command SU Up to frequency 4 RM Middle speed operation command OL Overload...

Page 870: ...ency setting gain analog value Read Write Analog value set to C7 905 43905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C12 917 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed Read Write C13 917 42107 Terminal 1 bias speed Read Write Analog value set to C13 917 43917 Terminal 1 bias speed terminal analog value Read Analog value of voltage...

Page 871: ... C10 931 41931 Current output gain signal Read Write C11 931 42121 Current output gain current Read Write Analog value set to C11 931 C38 932 41932 Terminal 4 bias command torque Read Write C39 932 42122 Terminal 4 bias torque Read Write Analog value set to C39 932 43932 Terminal 4 bias torque terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C40 933 41933 Terminal 4...

Page 872: ... Read 44003 Model Fifth and sixth characters Read 44004 Model Seventh and eighth characters Read 44005 Model Ninth and tenth characters Read 44006 Model Eleventh and twelfth characters Read 44007 Model Thirteenth and fourteenth characters Read 44008 Model Fifteenth and sixteenth characters Read 44009 Model Seventeenth and eighteenth characters Read 44010 Model Nineteenth and twentieth characters R...

Page 873: ...aster within the communication check time interval The inverter makes a communication check clearing of communication check counter regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master The communication check is made from the first communication in the Network operation mode can be changed by Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection The communication check time by que...

Page 874: ...RS 485 terminal communication Pr 539 0 1 to 999 8s Query communication Broadcast communication Operation mode External PLC master Inverter slave Inverter slave PLC master Pr 539 Communication check counter Response Message 1 Response Message 2 Query Message 2 Query Message 1 Data absence time 3 5 bytes or more Check start OFF ON Time Fault E SER Pr 539 PLC master Inverter slave Inverter slave PLC ...

Page 875: ...o the master station Use Pr 435 Station number CC Link IE to set station number of the inverter The setting range of Pr 435 is 0 to 255 but its active range is 1 to 120 The values out of the active range are invalid because such values cannot be transmitted to the master station Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 434 N110 Network number CC Link IE 0 0 to 255 Set the inverter network n...

Page 876: ...the sign with Pr 541 Start command Sign of the frequency command Actual run command Forward rotation Forward rotation Reverse rotation Reverse rotation Reverse rotation Forward rotation Tab 5 308 Influence of the sign on the rotation direction NOTE When Pr 541 1 with sign When EEPROM write is specified with the RY22 write mode error error code H01 will occur When both RY21 and RY22 are turned ON R...

Page 877: ... 4 0 0 to 255 1427 N630 Ethernet function selection 1 5001 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 45237 61450 Set the application protocol etc 1428 N631 Ethernet function selection 2 45237 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 45237 61450 1429 N632 Ethernet function selection 3 9999 502 5000 to 5002 5006 to 5008 5010 to 5013 9999 45237 61450 1426 N641 Link speed and duplex mode ...

Page 878: ...vices that send the operation or speed command through the Ethernet network Modbus TCP or CCLink IE Field Network Basic set the range of IP addresses of the devices When Pr 1449 to Pr 1452 0 initial value no IP address is specified for sending commands through the Ethernet network In this case operation through the Ethernet network Modbus TCP or CC Link IE Field Network Basic is not available When...

Page 879: ...uipment via a hub and if the communication between the other equipment and the hub is interrupted and resumed the communication between the inverter and the other equipment may not be established depending on the speci fications of the hub To re establish communication with the other equipment reset the inverter to forcefully close the connection Setting a shorter time in Pr 1455 Keepalive time is...

Page 880: ... inverter belongs in Pr 1438 to Pr 1441 Pr 1426 setting Communication speed Full duplex halfduplex system Remarks 0 initial value Automatic negotiation Automatic negotiation The communication speed and the communication mode half duplex full duplex are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting 1 100 Mbps Full duplex 2 100 Mbps Half duplex 3 10 Mbps Full duplex 4 10 Mbps Half duplex Ta...

Page 881: ... the other in Pr 1443 and Pr 1446 Pr 1444 and Pr 1447 and Pr 1445 and Pr 1448 m I003109E Fig 5 330 Process of Keepalive checking Example Setting example 1 In this case the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is 192 168 x 1 to 3 xxx 100 to 150 I003110A Fig 5 331 Ethernet IP filtering function setting example 1 Connected device Normal communication KeepAlive ACK first KeepA...

Page 882: ...rter and the system againstunauthorizedaccessbyexternalsystems takeadditionalsecuritymeasures Mitsubishi Electric Corporation will not take any responsibility for any problems in the inverter and the system incurred by unauthorized access The following are examples of measures to prevent unauthorized access Install a firewall Install a personal computer as a relay station and control the relaying ...

Page 883: ...than the other in Pr 1451 and Pr 1453 and Pr 1452 and Pr 1454 m When 9999 initial value is set in Pr 1453 and Pr 1454 the range is invalid Example Setting example 1 In this case the IP address range for command source selection via Ethernet communication is 192 168 x 1 to 3 xxx 100 to 150 I003112A Fig 5 333 Ethernet IP address for command source selection setting example 1 Example Setting example ...

Page 884: ...ork operation A signal loss detection is made when any of 0 1 s to 999 8 s is set in Pr 1432 In order to enable the signal loss detection data must be sent by connected devices at an interval equal to or less than the time set for the communication check The inverter makes a communication check clearing of communication check counter regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from t...

Page 885: ...the MELSOFT FA product connection for the application For how to set the application value refer to the Instruction Manual of the device connected via Ethernet Refer to page 5 677 Enter the Ethernet communication network number in Pr 1424 and the Ethernet communication station number in Pr 1425 Refer to page 5 683 Enable the PLC function Pr 414 PLC function operation selection 0 initial value to u...

Page 886: ...er specification 548 N041 USB communication check time interval 9999 0 USB communication is possible however the inverter will trip E USB when the mode changes to the PU operation mode 0 1 to 999 8 s Set the communication check time interval If a no communication state persists for longer than the permissible time the inverter will trip E USB 9999 No communication check Specification Description I...

Page 887: ... parameter setting When Pr 549 Protocol selection 1 Modbus RTU protocol the setting range is as shown in the parentheses When the set value is outside of the setting range the initial value is applied Automatic connection system configuration Parameters referred to Pr 551 PU mode operation command source selection page 5 282 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 117 N020 PU communication...

Page 888: ...c change parameter Setting value after change PU connector connection RS 485 terminal connection Communication speed Pr 118 Pr 332 Depending on the setting of the connected device on the GOT side Data length stop bit Pr 119 Pr 333 Parity Pr 120 Pr 334 Waiting time setting Pr 123 Pr 337 CR LF selection Pr 124 Pr 341 Number of communication retries Pr 121 Pr 335 9999 fixed Communication check time i...

Page 889: ... Pr 660 to Pr 662 5 727 To select the control method Control method selection P G200 P G300 Pr 800 Pr 451 5 61 To secure the low speed torque by compensating the slip of the motor Slip compensation P G203 to P G205 Pr 245 to Pr 247 5 729 To select the torque characteristic Constant output range torque characteristic selection P G210 Pr 803 5 90 5 138 To adjust the speed control gain Speed control ...

Page 890: ... 55K Initial value for the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher Starting torque adjustment Assuming Pr 19 Base frequency voltage is 100 set the output voltage at 0 Hz to Pr 0 Pr 46 Pr 112 in percentage Perform the adjustment of the parameter little by little approximately 0 5 and confirm the status of the motor each time The motor may overheat when the value is set too high ...

Page 891: ... 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Set a larger value when the distance between the inverter and the motor is long or when there is not enough motor torque in the low speed range It may cause overcurrent trip when it is set too large Setting for Pr 0 Pr 46 and Pr 112 becomes enabled only when the V F control is selected When the initial val...

Page 892: ... enabled when the RT signal turns ON and Pr 113 when the X9 signal turns ON To input the X9 signal set 9 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the function to a terminal Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description FM CA 3 G001 Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at the rated motor torque 50 Hz 60 Hz 19 G002 Base frequency voltage 9999 8888 ...

Page 893: ... 30kW or lower 160 V 33 33 Hz SF V5RU1 37kW 170 V SF V5RU3 22kW or lower 160 V SF V5RU3 30kW 170 V SF V5RU4 3 7kW and 7 5kW 150 V 16 67 Hz SF V5RU4 and motors other than described above 160 V SF VR 160 V 50 Hz SF VRH 320 V Tab 5 314 Setting of base frequency voltage NOTES When the operation becomes not possible due to failure in encoder etc at the time of vector control set Pr 80 Motor capacity or...

Page 894: ... scaling factor Pr 86 Reverse rotation excitation current low speed scaling factor Pr 617 13 Forward rotation excitation current low speed scaling factor Pr 617 Reverse rotation excitation current low speed scaling factor Pr 86 14 Forward rotation excitation current low speed scaling factor Pr 86 Reverse rotation excitation current low speed scaling factor Pr 617 X17 signal OFF Pr 86 X17 signal ON...

Page 895: ...et an excitation current break point when the RT signal is ON 9999 SF PR SF HR SF HRCA motor The predetermined frequency is applied Motor other than the above 10 Hz is applied 566 G302 Second motor excitation current low speed scaling factor 9999 0 to 300 Set an excitation current low speed scaling factor when the RT signal is ON 9999 SF PR SF HR SF HRCA motor The predetermined scaling factor is a...

Page 896: ... 3 for an elevated load that is in the driving mode during reverse rotation and in the regenerativeload modeduring forward rotationaccordingto the loadweight e g counterweight system Fig 5 342 Variable torque load I002751E I001547E Fig 5 343 Characteristic with manual torque boost NOTE When torque is continuously regenerated as vertical lift load it is effective to set the rated voltage in Pr 19 B...

Page 897: ...eak point The excitation current scaling factor at 0 Hz is set in Pr 86 Use Pr 565 Second motor excitation current break point and Pr 566 Second motor excitation current low speed scaling factor for the setting for using the second motor RT signal ON When Pr 14 14 or 15 and the X17 signal is turned ON the excitation current scaling factor is switched from the value set in Pr 617 to the value set i...

Page 898: ...33 20 130 30 160 30 140 10 130 5 5 10 150 10 130 30 130 30 140 30 140 20 140 7 5 10 150 30 118 30 130 30 140 30 140 30 150 11 10 150 20 140 10 130 30 140 10 130 30 130 15 10 150 30 130 30 130 20 140 10 130 30 130 18 5 10 150 30 130 20 130 30 150 30 140 30 140 22 30 130 10 130 10 130 30 150 30 140 20 140 30 10 150 20 130 10 130 30 150 20 150 10 130 37 20 140 10 140 20 130 20 160 20 150 10 130 45 10...

Page 899: ...nitial value Setting range Description 60 G030 Energy saving control selection 0 0 Normal operation 4 Energy saving operation 9 Optimum excitation control NOTES An energy saving effect is not expected with the energy saving operation mode for applications with high load torque or with the equipment with frequent acceleration and deceleration An energy saving effect is not expected with the Optimum...

Page 900: ... Setting range Description 71 C100 Applied motor 0 2 Standard motor such as SF JR Adjustable 5 points V F Others Refer to page 5 451 100 G040 V F1 first frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 Set each point of the V F pattern frequency voltage 9999 Do not set V F 101 G041 V F1 first frequency voltage 0 V 0 to 1000 V 102 G042 V F2 second frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz 9999 103 G043 V F2 second frequency volta...

Page 901: ...equency voltage within the range of Pr 3 Base frequency and Pr 19 Base frequency voltage When Pr 71 2 Pr 47 Second V F base frequency and Pr 113 Third V F base frequency will not function When Pr 71 2 electronic thermal O L relay will make calculations assuming a standard motor By simultaneously using Pr 60 Energy saving control selection and the adjustable 5 points V F further energy saving effec...

Page 902: ...nt adjustment gain to fine tune the rotations per minute To reduce the rotations per minute to increase the compensation frequency set a larger value in Pr 674 To increase the rotations per minute to reduce the compensation frequency set a smaller value in Pr 674 Lower rotations per minute reduce the power consumption and higher rotations per minute increase the power consumption Pr Name Initial v...

Page 903: ... 7 5K or lower InitialvaluesfortheFR A820 00630 11K toFR A820 03160 55K FR A840 00310 11K toFR A840 01800 55K Initial value for the FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 10 G100 DC injection brake operation frequency 3 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the operation frequency for the DC injection brake zero speed control and servo lock 9999 Op...

Page 904: ...ake operation frequency Press the STOP key on the operation panel Turning OFF of the STF STR signal 0 5 Hz or higher in Pr 10 Pr 10 setting Lower than 0 5 Hz in Pr 10 and 0 5 Hz or higher in Pr 13 0 5Hz Lower than 0 5 Hz in both Pr 10 and Pr 13 Pr 10 or Pr 13 setting whichever larger Set the frequency to 0 Hz Pr 13 setting or 0 5 Hz whichever larger Tab 5 318 DC injection brake operation frequency...

Page 905: ...l is turned ON DC injection brake will operate when the X13 signal is turned ON even while operating For the X13 signal input set 13 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 to assign the function Fig 5 347 When Pr 11 is set to 8888 I001559E NOTES Under Real sensorless vector control when the X13 signal turns ON while Pr 11 8888 the zero speed control is activated regardless of the Pr 850 Brake operation select...

Page 906: ...pplied motor setting Refer to page 5 455 However when an energy saving motor SF HR or SF HRCA is used change the Pr 12 setting as shown below Even if the setting value of Pr 12 is made larger braking torque will be limited so the output cur rent will be within the rated current of the inverter Inverter Pr 12 setting FR A820 00250 3 7K or lower FR A840 00126 3 7K or lower 4 FR A820 00340 5 5K FR A8...

Page 907: ...tartingfrequency setting whichever smaller during deceleration Inverter output voltage shutoff timing when Pr 850 2 Maximum time for the magnetic flux decay operation Regardless of the Pr 850 setting the magnetic flux decay output shutoff will operate immediately when the Magnetic flux decay output shutoff signal X74 is turned ON For the X74 signal set 74 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal ...

Page 908: ...ng the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure and online auto tuning during the start up When other output shutoff trigger inverter fault turning ON the MRS signal etc occurs during the magnetic flux decay operation the magnetic flux operation is terminated and the output is shut off immediately Unlike the MRS signal voltage is output during the magnetic flux decay output shutoff oper...

Page 909: ...nal position after the external force is removed To perform the position control this loop gain can be adjusted with Pr 422 Position control gain Pr 1298 Second position control gain Tab 5 320 Selection of pre excitation Control method Control mode Pr 802 Pr 1299 Pr 850 Deceleration stop LX ON X13 ON Pr 11 8888 V F control DC injection brake DC injection brake Advanced magnetic flux vector control...

Page 910: ... a start com mand input It must be confirmed that the motor running will not cause any safety problem before performing pre excitation Note that during the pre excitation operation a voltage is applied to the motor even with the FWD REV indicator OFF on the operation panel When offline auto tuning Pr 96 Auto tuning setting status 1 11 101 is executed at the time of pre excitation operation pre exc...

Page 911: ...less vector control at the start Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 522 G105 Output stop frequency 9999 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop output shutoff 9999 No function I002843E Fig 5 351 Example for inverter output shutoff NOTE When the output stop function is valid Pr 522 9999 the DC injection brake zero speed con trol servo lock becomes invalid and the moto...

Page 912: ...vation of the restart function is recommended especially for a PM motor The output stop frequency function is disabled during PID control JOG operation power failure stop traverse function operation offline auto tuning orientation control position control torque control stop on contact control or machine analyzer operation Output stop function does not operate during reverse rotation deceleration ...

Page 913: ...frequency page 5 259 page 5 261 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description Start signal STF STR Refer to page 5 447 Stop operation 250 G106 Stop selection 9999 0 to 100 s STF signal Forward rotation start STR signal Reverse rotation start It will coast to stop after set time when the start signal is turned OFF 1000 s to 1100 s STF signal Start signal STR signal Forward reverse rotation signal...

Page 914: ...th motor rotation When Pr 250 9999 or 8888 acceleration deceleration is performed in accordance to the fre quency command until the output is shutoff by turning OFF the start signal When the restart signal is turned ON during the motor coasting the operation is resumed from Pr 13 Starting frequency Even with the setting of coasting to stop when the LX signal is turned ON the motor does not coast b...

Page 915: ...upplied only to the control circuit the reset operation when the power is supplied to the main circuit can be selected The initial value or setting range for the standard model The initial value or setting range for the separated converter type The initial value or setting range for the IP55 compatible model Available only with the standard model Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 30 ...

Page 916: ...ther than above 0 without the built in brake resistor P N 10 110 R S T P N 20 120 high duty brake resistor FR ABR R S T 1 101 10 6 FR ABR can be used with FR A820 01250 22K or lower and FR A840 00620 22K or lower P N 11 111 R S T P N 21 121 High power factor converter FR HC2 Power regeneration common converter FR CV P N 2 102 0 initial value Tab 5 322 FR A820 03160 55K or lower FR A840 01800 55K o...

Page 917: ...lt in brake resistor When using high duty brake resistor FR ABR FR A820 01250 22K or lower FR A840 00620 22K or lower Set Pr 30 1 11 21 Set Pr 70 as follows FR A820 00490 7 5K or lower FR A840 00250 7 5K or lower 10 FR A820 00630 11K or higher FR A840 00310 11K or higher 6 When using brake unit FR BU2 FR A820 03800 75K or higher FR A840 02160 75K or higher To use FR BU2 in combination with MT BR5 ...

Page 918: ... X11 FR HC2 con nection FR CC2 connection During the operation using RS 485 communication with the remote output and analog remote output functions enabled the X11 signal is used to store the status when the inverter is set to store the status before an instantaneous power failure Input the IPF signal instantaneous power failure detection signal of the FR HC2 or FR CC2 For the terminal to be used ...

Page 919: ... compatible models RDY negative logic initial setting RDYB RDB X10 ON Inverter output shutoff NO contact 1 Initial value of separated converter types RDY positive logic RDYA RDA X10 OFF Inverter output shutoff NC contact Tab 5 325 Selecting NO NC contact for X10 signal NOTES If the X10 signal is unassigned while Pr 30 2 FR HC2 FR CV connection or 10 or 11 DC feed ing mode 1 the MRS signal can be u...

Page 920: ...0 100orhigher theinverterresetisnotperformedwhenthepowerissupplied R L1 S L2 T L3 input to the main circuit When a communication option etc is used communication interruption due to the inverter reset can be avoided I002756E Fig 5 356 Regenerative overload NOTES When Pr 30 0 initial value 10 or 20 for FR A820 00630 11K or higher and FR A840 00310 11K or higher the RB display are disabled When the ...

Page 921: ... supply such as batteries at the time of power failure Connect the AC power supply to the AC power supply connecting terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 and connect the DC power supply to the terminals P and N Also for the standard model remove the jumpers between terminal R L1 and R L11as well as between S L2 and S1 L21 and connect the terminals R1 L11 and S1 L21 to the terminals P and N respectively Op...

Page 922: ...top Pr 261 0 will occur and Y85 signal will turn OFF after stopping After turning ON the X71 signal operation is not possible even if the X70 signal is turned ON Set 71 to either of Pr 178 to Pr 189 Output Y85 DC feeding signal This will turn ON during power failure or undervoltage of the AC power supply It will turn OFF when the X71 signal turns ON or power restoration The Y85 signal will not tur...

Page 923: ... 5 360 Operation example 2 at power failure when DC power is restored Control power supply AC power supply Y85 MC X70 X71 STF STR Output frequency Hz Time AC power supply DC power supply ON ON ON ON ON ON Motor coasting Approx 200 ms Back up operation Control power supply AC power supply Y85 MC X70 X71 STF STR Output frequency Hz Time AC power supply DC ON ON ON ON ON Motor coasting Approx 200 ms ...

Page 924: ...ower supply is connected to the R L1 S L2 and T L3 terminals during the DC feed ing with Pr 30 2 10 11 DC feeding an option fault E OPT will occur When set to Pr 30 2 10 11 20 21 DC feeding and operated by DC feeding detection of undervoltage E UVT and instantaneous power failure E IPF is not performed When DC power is switched on a larger inrush current flows than in AC power The number of power ...

Page 925: ...o 800 V Set the bus voltage level to operate the regeneration avoidance operation When the bus voltage level is set low it will be harder to generate overvoltage error but actual deceleration time will be longer Set the setting value higher than power supply voltage 400V Class 760VDC 884 G122 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 0 0 Disables regeneration avoidance due to bu...

Page 926: ...of Pr 883 will not get under DC bus voltage level The frequency will rise with operation of the regeneration avoidance function even at the time of no regenera tive status The stall prevention overvoltage oL will only operate during deceleration stopping the lower ing of output frequency but on the other hand the regeneration avoidance function will con stantly operate Pr 882 1 or operate only at ...

Page 927: ...d During deceleration when the frequency increases due to the regeneration avoidance operation and exceeds the limit value the limit value will be retained until the output frequency is reduced to be the half the Pr 885 setting When the frequency that have increased by the regeneration avoidance operation exceeds Pr 1 Maximum frequency it will be limited to the maximum frequency By setting to Pr 8...

Page 928: ...generation avoidance operation The regeneration avoidance function cannot decrease the actual deceleration time for the motor to stop The actual deceleration time is determined by the regenerative power consumption per formance so to decrease the deceleration time consider using a regeneration unit FR BU2 BU FR BU FR CV FR HC2 or brake resistor FR ABR etc When using regeneration unit FR BU2 BU FR ...

Page 929: ...crease the deceleration time or lower the setting value of Pr 661 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration is enabled with V F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control speed control and vector control speed control Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 660 G130 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selection 0 0 Without increased magne...

Page 930: ...nt preventive function will be disabled when Pr 662 0 NOTE When set to Pr 662 Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level overcurrent preventive function will operate at the setting value of Pr 22 Operates at Pr 622 when Pr 22 0 Parameters referred to Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level page 5 325 Pr 30 Regenerative function selection page 5 713 Pr 60 Energy saving control selection page 5 697 Pr 16...

Page 931: ...rror will occur more frequently when the load inertia is larger 247 G205 Constant power range slip compensation selection 9999 0 Do not perform slip compensation at constant output range frequency range higher than the frequency set in Pr 3 9999 Perform the slip compensation of the constant output range Rated slip Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency rated rotation speed 100 Synchroniz...

Page 932: ...rol and the encoder feed control 285 H416 Overspeed detection frequency 9999 0 to 30 Hz When the difference between the detected frequency and the output frequency exceeds the set value at the time of encoder feedback control an inverter fault E MB1 is generated 9999 Overspeed detection disabled 359 C141 852 C241 Encoder rotation direction 1 0 Set when using a motor for which forward rotation enco...

Page 933: ...otor speed rated load If the setting is too large response becomes slow For example when the rated speed of a motor 4 poles is 1740 r min at 60 Hz Slip Nsp Synchronous speed Rated speed 1800 1740 60 r min Frequency equivalent to slip fsp Nsp Number of poles 120 60 4 120 2 Hz NOTES When the inverter is operated with Pr 144 0 10 12 110 112 it will cause E 1 to E 3 When set to Pr 144 102 104 106 108 ...

Page 934: ...coder feedback control is not performed during the acceleration and deceleration to prevent the unstable phenomenon such as hunting Encoder feedback control is performed after the output frequency has reached set frequency speed feedback range once When following status occurs at the time of encoder feedback control operation inverter will not stop with an alarm and operate with output frequency o...

Page 935: ...eleration With 0 limit Motor speed is the droop compensation reference 11 Constantly droop control during operation With 0 limit 994 G403 Droop break point gain 9999 0 1 to 100 Set the droop amount to be changed as value of the rated motor frequency 9999 No function 995 G404 Droop break point torque 100 0 1 to 100 Set the torque when the droop amount is to be changed 679 G420 Second droop gain 999...

Page 936: ...r control the lowest frequency among 400 Hz Pr 1 and maximum motor frequency becomes the upper limit droop compensation frequency When Pr 288 0 to 2 or Advanced magnetic flux control When Pr 288 10 11 I001627E Fig 5 365 Droop control Droop compensation frequency Current for torque after filtering Rated motor frequency droop gain Rated torque current 100 Droop compensation frequency Current for tor...

Page 937: ...on reference 0 initial value Without droop control during acceleration deceleration Limit with 0 Hz Limit with 0 5 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control Rated motor frequency 10 Motor speed 1 Constantlydroopcontrolduring operation Rated motor frequency 11 Motor speed 2 Constantlydroopcontrolduring operation Do not limit reverse At the time of vector control PM sensorless vector control Ra...

Page 938: ...RT signal also enables other second func tions The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status Set 3 in any of Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection to assign the RT signal to another terminal Changing the terminal assignment using Pr 178 to Pr 189 input terminal function selection may affect the other functions Set parameters after confirming the function of each t...

Page 939: ...quency of torque deviation speed deviation or converter output voltage deviation by the mechanical resonance with a measurement device etc set the frequency of 1 2 to 1 times the vibration frequency in Pr 654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency Setting vibrational frequency range can suppress the vibration better Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 653 G410 Speed smoothing control 0 0 to ...

Page 940: ...de The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number To perform a parameter clear turn to and to perform all parameter clear turn it to and press initial value appears Parameter clear Turn to change the set value to Press to enter the setting and flicker alternately after parameters are cleared 앫 Turn to read another parameter 앫 Press to show the setting again 앫 Press twi...

Page 941: ...e destination inverter is other than the FR A800 series or when parameter copy is attempted after the parameter copy reading was stopped model error appears Refer to the parameter list on page A 5 for the availability of parameter copy When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected etc during parameter copy writing write again or check the setting values by parameter verificati...

Page 942: ...5 334 Reading the parameter settings of the inverter to the operation panel NOTE appears Why Parameter read error Perform the operation from step again Operation Connect the operation panel to the destination inverter Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn to parameter copy and press appears...

Page 943: ... page 5 740 Move the operation panel to the inverter to be verified Turning ON the power of the inverter The monitor display turns ON Parameter setting mode Press to choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn to parameter copy Press appears Parameter verification Turn to change to setting value parameter copy verification mode...

Page 944: ...emory in the inverter The USB memory mode is displayed and USB memory opera tions are possible I002762E Fig 5 369 Changes in USB memory copy operation states Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Faults history mode USB memory mode Copy the parameter setting from the inverter to the USB memory device Overwrite the inverter parameter setting onto the designated file in the USB memory de...

Page 945: ...gurator2 During password lock parameter copy and parameter verification cannot be performed refer to page 5 215 Operation Insert the USB memory into the copy source inverter USB memory mode Press to change to the USB memory mode Displaying the file selection screen Press three times to display file selection screen and press To overwrite files on USB memory display the file selection screen turn t...

Page 946: ...0 75K or higher or FR A840 02160 75K or higher When CP and 0 00 flicker alternately set the Pr 989 Parameter copy alarm release as shown below initial value After setting Pr 989 perform setting of Pr 9 Pr 30 Pr 51 Pr 56 Pr 57 Pr 61 Pr 70 Pr 72 Pr 80 Pr 82 Pr 90 to Pr 94 Pr 453 Pr 455 Pr 458 to Pr 462 Pr 557 Pr 859 Pr 860 and Pr 893 again When the destination inverter is other than the FR A800 seri...

Page 947: ...ecting the file number Turn to select the file number to be verified and press Parameter verification Turn to display the setting parameter copy verification mode and press appears Press Verification of the parameter settings copied to the USB memory and the parameter settings of the verification destination inverter is started It takes about 15 seconds to verify all the settings During verificati...

Page 948: ...appear in order If is pressed with parameters that have been changed the parameter settings can be changed as they are Parameter numbers are no longer displayed in the list when they are returned to their initial values Other changed parameters appear by turning is returned to when the last changed parameter is displayed Tab 5 340 Initial value change list NOTES The calibration parameters C0 Pr 90...

Page 949: ...e used Data flow and link device assignment master and slave stations except for local stations One to one communication is possible between the master and slave stations The status information of the link devices RY and RWw of the master station is output to the external device of the slave station and the input status information from the external device of the slave sta tion is stored in the li...

Page 950: ...nd RWr of the slave station The status data of the link devices RX and RWr of the slave station are stored in the link devices RX and RWr of the master station by link scan The status data of the link devices RX and RWr of the master station are stored in the devices of the CPU module by link refresh Tab 5 341 Description of numbers in fig 5 370 NOTE Refer to the MELSEC iQ R MELSEC Q or MELSEC L C...

Page 951: ...eserved 5 752 RY n 2 0 Monitor command 5 752 RY n 2 1 Frequency setting command RAM 5 752 RY n 2 2 Frequency setting command RAM EEPROM 5 752 RY n 2 3 Torque command torque limit RAM 5 752 RY n 2 4 Torque command torque limit RAM EEPROM 5 752 RY n 2 5 Instruction code execution request 5 752 RY n 2 6 to RY n 3 9 Reserved 5 752 RY n 3 A Error reset request flag 5 752 RY n 3 B to RY n 3 F Reserved 5...

Page 952: ...C Monitor code 7 5 754 RWwn 2D Monitor code 8 5 754 RWwn 2E Monitor code 9 5 754 RWwn 2F Monitor code 10 5 754 RWwn 30 to RWwn 39 Reserved Tab 5 344 Remote registers write 1 RWwn 3A to RWwn 76 Reserved RWwn 77 to RWwn 7F Reserved Address Description Refer to page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits RWrn Reply code 5 756 RWrn 1 Reserved RWrn 2 Reply code 5 756 RWrn 3 Reserved RWrn 4 Reply code 5 756 RWrn 5 R...

Page 953: ...t position lower digits 5 756 RWrn 4D Current position upper digits 5 756 RWrn 4E Droop pulse lower digits 5 756 RWrn 4F Droop pulse upper digits 5 756 RWrn 50 Torque command 5 756 RWrn 51 Torque current command 5 756 RWrn 52 Motor output 5 756 RWrn 53 Feedback pulse 5 756 RWrn 54 Reserved Address Description Refer to page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Tab 5 345 Remote registers read 2 RWrn 55 Reserve...

Page 954: ...monitored data is always updated RY21 Frequency setting command RAM When 1 is set in the frequency setting command RY21 the set frequency RWw0 is written to RAM of the inverter While 1 is set the set frequency RWw0 is always applied After the writing completes 1 is set in the frequency setting completion RX21 RY22 Frequency setting command RAM EEPROM When 1 is set in the frequency setting command ...

Page 955: ... the inverter RAM 1 is set in this signal When 0 is set in the frequency setting command RY21 0 is set in this signal RX22 Frequency setting completion RAM EEPROM After 1 is set in the frequency setting command RY22 and the set frequency is written to the inverter RAM and EEPROM 1 is set in this signal When 0 is set in the frequency setting command RY22 0 is set in this signal RX23 Torque command ...

Page 956: ...ing Instruction code Set an instruction code refer to page 5 757 for an operation such as operation mode switching parameter read write alarm reference and alarm clear in the lower eight bits The instructions are executed in the following order by setting 1 in RY25 after completing the register setting RWw10 12 14 16 18 then 1A After completing the execution up to RWw1A 1 is set in RX25 Set HFFFF ...

Page 957: ... 68Hzto327 67Hz 327 68to327 67 0 01Hzincrements Refertopage5 673 When Pr 128 50 51 60 61 they are valid If the data outside the range is set the previous setting is retained Refer to page 5 543 Write data is in hexadecimal and only two digits are valid The upper two digits are ignored The value in RWw2 is used as the torque limit value during speed control or position control and as the torque com...

Page 958: ... the instruction code is set RWr20 Error status The setting value 0 is set during normal inverter operation and the data code of the corresponding error is set at an error For the data codes or details of fault records refer to page 6 5 RWr21 Fault record fault data The data code of faults history No specified by RWw21 is stored in the lower 8bits Lower 8 bits of RWw21 will be reverted back to the...

Page 959: ...tion number Read H73 H01 to HFF Selection of the monitored item monitor code If a monitor code out of the range is set a range error occurs The monitor codes are the same as those of the RS 485 communication dedicated monitor Refer to page 5 344 Write HF3 Fault record Read H74 to H77 H0000 to HFFFF Two latest fault records Refer to page 6 5 for details on fault record read data Set frequency RAM R...

Page 960: ...ear Write HF4 H9696 Clears the faults history as a batch Parameter clear All parameter clear Write HFC All parameters return to initial values Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected according to the data 앫 Parameter clear H9696 Communication parameters are cleared H5A5A Communication parameters are not cleared 앫 All parameter clear H9966 Communication parameters are clear...

Page 961: ...r 810 settings and the control mode Relationship between the Pr 804 setting the setting range and the actual torque command torque limit when setting is made from CC Link IE Field Network communication The torque limit setting is defined as an absolute value Torque command torque limit setting method Writing in RWw2 Set the torque command torque limit value in RWw2 Set 1 in RY23 or RY24 Writing in...

Page 962: ...rameter value Reading the value of Pr 7 Acceleration time 5 765 Writing a parameter value Setting 3 0 s in Pr 7 Acceleration time 5 766 Setting the running frequency running speed Setting to 50 00 Hz 5 767 Reading the fault records Reading the inverter faults 5 768 Inverter reset Perform inverter reset at an inverter alarm occurrence 5 768 I003079E Fig 5 371 CC Link IE Field network with one PLC a...

Page 963: ...RWw RWr setting Start 0000 0080 End 007F 00FF Reserved station error invalid station No setting No setting Tab 5 354 Network configuration Link side Master side Device name Start End Device name Start End SB 0000 01FF SB 0000 01FF SW 0000 01FF SW 0000 01FF RX 0000 007F X 1000 107F RY 0000 007F Y 1000 107F RWr 0000 00FF W 000000 0000FF RWw 0000 00FF W 000100 0001FF Tab 5 355 Refresh parameters star...

Page 964: ...ice station 2 W101 W17E W17F W180 W181 W1FE W1FF For writing For reading W000 W001 W07E W07F W080 W081 W0FE W0FF RWw0 RWw1 RWw7E RWw7F RWr0 RWr1 RWr7E RWr7F RWw0 RWw1 RWw7E RWw7F RWr0 RWr1 RWr7E RWr7F M0 Y30 END SB49 0 3 6 M0 X1002 SW0B0 0 Check the data link status of the station 1 Turn ON the signal Y00 of the output unit Inverter running RX02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 ...

Page 965: ...nstruction code execution is set in D2 Refer to page 5 756 for the reply code RWr10 I003084E Fig 5 375 Programming example 2 SET M301 PLS M300 M301 MOV W10 D2 MOV H0FB W110 SET Y1025 0 9 M0 X20 X1025 M300 RST M301 SET M302 M302 18 RST Y1025 RST M302 END 24 3 7 MOV H0 W111 SB49 X1025 SW0B0 0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1 Write the operation mode write code HFB to RWw10 and the set ...

Page 966: ... 5 376 Programming example 3 I003087E Fig 5 377 Programming example 4 SB49 M0 X20 0 3 7 Y1000 END Y1003 M0 SW0B0 0 Check the data link status of the station 1 Forward rotation command RY00 Middle speed operation command RY03 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 b 5 1 b b7 Station 1 RY3F to RY00 Y100F Y1000 Run command Middle speed b6 Second function selection RT b7 Terminal 4 input selection AU b8 Se...

Page 967: ...ample 5 NOTE For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher change the link parameter extended set ting set it to the one other than H00 Refer to page A 5 for the settings SET M301 PLS M300 M301 MOV W11 D1 MOV H7 W110 RST M301 0 3 7 9 16 24 M0 X20 X1025 X1025 SB49 M300 SET M302 SET Y1025 M302 MOV W10 D2 RST Y1025 RST M302 END M0 SW0B0 0 Check the data link status of the station 1 Read the ...

Page 968: ... I003089E Fig 5 379 Programming example 5 NOTES For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher change the link parameter extended set ting set it to the one other than H00 Refer to page A 5 for the settings For other functions refer to the instruction codes on page 5 757 SET M301 PLS M300 MOV W10 D2 MOV H87 W110 SET Y1025 0 3 7 9 18 24 M0 X20 X1025 M301 SB49 X1025 M300 SET M302 M302 RST Y1...

Page 969: ...eply code from the intelligent register is H0000 Then change the setting data for example W100 continuously To write the running frequency to the EEPROM change the following points in the program shown in fig 5 380 Frequency setting command Y1021 Y1022 Frequency setting completion X1021 X1022 SET M301 PLS M300 M301 MOV W0 D2 MOV K5000 W100 SET Y1021 0 3 7 9 16 22 RST M301 M0 X20 X1021 SB49 M302 X1...

Page 970: ... the instruction code execution request RY25 with the instruction code HFD and data H9696 to reset the inverter set a value other than 0 in Pr 340 Communication startup mode selection or change the operation mode to the Network operation mode Refer to pro gram example 2 on page 5 763 SET M301 PLS M300 MOV W11 D1 MOV H74 W110 SET Y1025 0 3 7 9 16 24 M0 X20 X1025 SB49 M302 X1025 M301 M300 RST M301 S...

Page 971: ...y The inverter protective function E OP1 is activated if data communication stops for more than the time set in Pr 500 Communication error execution waiting time due to a programmable controller fault an open Ethernet cable etc during CC Link IE Field Network operation If the programmable controller master station is reset during CC Link IE Field Network operation or if the programmable controller...

Page 972: ...orrectly set Check that their settings match with the program that the network number is set within the range that no overlapping stations exist and that the station number is set within the range Check that the inverter is in the External operation mode Check that the operation mode switching program is running Check that the operation mode switching program has been written correctly Inverter do...

Page 973: ...truction Manual of external devices Initial setting SLMP can be used when the PLC function is enabled Set a value other than 0 in Pr 414 PLC function operation selection To select SLMP for the application set any value from 5010 to 5013 in any of Pr 1427 to Pr 1429 Ethernet function selection 1 to 3 For how to set the application value refer to the Instruction Manual of the device connected via Et...

Page 974: ...essage Execution of the operation Receiving the response message Returning a response message Closing the connection Closing the connection The process is repeated as needed The inverter accepts the connection request from the external device Passive open Upon establishment of the connection the external device sends a request message to the inverter Accordingtotherequestmessagesentfromthe externa...

Page 975: ...ation with UDP IP External device Inverter Sending a request message Execution of the operation Receiving the response message Returning a response message End of the communication The process is repeated as needed Theexternal devicesendsarequestmessage to the inverter Accordingtotherequestmessagesentfromthe externaldevice theinverterexecutesareading writing or other operation The external device ...

Page 976: ...formation Item Size Endian Description Header Header for TCP IP or UDP IP The header is added by the external device before transmission Subheader QnA compatible 3E frame 2 bytes Big Request H5000 Response HD000 Subheader QnA compatible 4E frame 6 bytes Request H5400 Serial No H0000 Response HD400 Serial No H0000 Destination network No 1 byte Specify the network No of the access destination Use a ...

Page 977: ...ode of the access destination refer to page 5 785 is stored for failed completion Response data Variable Little When the command is completed normally data such as the read data corresponding to the command is stored Error information 9 bytes The network No responding station 1 byte station No responding station 1 byte destination unit I O No 2 bytes and destination multidrop station No 1 byte of ...

Page 978: ...The devices with non consecutive numbers can be specified The value is read from the bit devices in 16 bit or 32 bit units 5 781 H0000 The inverter reads the value in the devices with the specified numbers The devices with non consecutive numbers can be specified The value is read from the word devices in 1 word or 2 word units Write random In bit units H1402 H0001 The inverter writes the value to...

Page 979: ...amming Manual Special register SD Word HA9 Input X Bit H9C H0 to H7F hexadecimal Output Y Bit H9D H0 to H7F hexadecimal Internal relay M Bit H90 0 to 127 decimal Data register D Word HA8 0 to 255 decimal Timer T Contact TS Bit HC1 0 to 15 decimal Coil TC HC0 Current value TN Word HC2 Retentive timer ST Contact STS Bit HC7 0 Initial value Up to 16 retentive timers can be used by PLC parameter assig...

Page 980: ...number of devices is specified for reading writing data A two byte numerical value is sent from the lower byte to the upper byte Specification of the number of devices for bit access The number of devices is specified for reading writing data in bit units The number is used in the Write random command refer to page 5 783 Example Device No of Internal relay M63 Input X20 Internal relay M63 has a de...

Page 981: ...data each device is specified in one bit The data is stored from the lower byte bit 0 to bit 7 to the upper byte bit 8 to bit 15 Example ON OFF state of five devices starting from M10 Example ON OFF state of 32 devices starting from M16 H0A H00 H00 H90 H05 H00 H10 H10 H10 Head device Device code Number of devices Data 0 is shown when the number of points is an odd number M14 ON M13 OFF M12 ON M11 ...

Page 982: ...from the device is stored in hexadecimal Example Data stored in D50 D51 Sub command First device No Device code No of devices H01 H04 Item Description Subcommand Specify the unit bit word for reading First device No Specify the number of the first device Refer to page 5 778 Device code Specify the type of the target devices Refer to page 5 777 Number of devices Specify the number of target devices...

Page 983: ...on Subcommand Specify the unit bit word for reading Number of devices for word access Specify the number of devices for one word access bit device 16 bits word device one word Number of devices for double word access Specify the number of devices for two word access bit device 32 bits word device two words Word access Specify the devices according to the number set in the request data for word acc...

Page 984: ...2 Response data The value read from the device is stored in hexadecimal Word access Double word access Read data 1 Read data 2 Data in the devices specified for word access Data in the devices specified for double word access Read data 1 Read data 2 ...

Page 985: ... data for double word access It is not necessary to specify the devices when 0 is set Device No Specify the number of the devices Refer to page 5 778 Device code Specify the type of the target devices Refer to page 5 777 Set reset Specify the data to write ON OFF of the bit devices 앫 ON H01 앫 OFF H00 Either of the one byte numerical values is sent Tab 5 363 Request data description for random writ...

Page 986: ... Description Mode Forced execution of the remote RUN is not allowed H0100 Forced execution of the remote RUN is allowed H0300 Clear mode Devices are not cleared initialized H00 Devices are cleared H01 H02 Tab 5 364 Request data description for remote RUN instruction H02 H10 H00 H00 H01 H00 H01 H01 H00 H00 Model Model code Item Description Model The inverter model is stored Up to 16 characters can ...

Page 987: ...stination unit I O No is different from that of the target inverter HC059 The command or subcommand is specified incorrectly Or an unspecified command is received HC05B The inverter cannot read write data from to the specified device HC05C The request message has an error HC060 The requested operation has an error Example Data is specified incorrectly for the bit device HC061 The request data leng...

Page 988: ...g the address specified by the master Normal response After the query from the master is received the slave executes the request function and returns the corresponding normal response to the master Error response When an invalid function code address or data is received by the slave the error response is returned to the master This response is appended with an error code that indicates the reason ...

Page 989: ...data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function code 1 to 255 can be set in single byte lengths 8 bits for the function code The master sets the function to be sent to the slave as the request and the slave performs the reque...

Page 990: ...k only A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return message subfunction code H00 function Subfunction code H00 Return query data 5 792 Preset multiple registers Write H10 Data is written to consecutive multiple holding registers Data can be written to consecutive multiple Modbus registers to output instructions to the in...

Page 991: ...fier Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function Set H03 Starting address Set the holding register address from which to start reading of data Starting address start register address dec...

Page 992: ...fier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit identifier Func tion Starting address No of points H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H06 8 bits H11 8 bits H03 8 bits H03 8 bits HEB 8 bits H00 8 bits H03 8 bits A given value is set Transaction identifier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit identi fier Func tion Byte count Data H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H09 8 bits H11 8 bits H03 8 bits H06 8 bits...

Page 993: ...e master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the response from the slave Protocol Identifier Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function Set...

Page 994: ...ts H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits Transaction identifier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit identifier Function Subfunction Data H 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits 8 bits H08 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits Message Description Transaction identifier The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the respons...

Page 995: ...The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the response from the slave Protocol Identifier Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function S...

Page 996: ...bits H 8 bits L 8 bits H 8 bits L 8 bits Message Description Transaction identifier The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the response from the slave Protocol Identifier Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the u...

Page 997: ...on of normal response Example Read the successful register start address and number of successful accesses from slave address 25 H19 Query message Normal response Response message Two successful reads of start address 41007 Pr 7 are returned Transaction identifier Protocol Identifier Length field Unit identi fier Func tion H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H00 8 bits H02 8 bits H19 8 bits H46 8 bits A given v...

Page 998: ...master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control The same data is returned in the response from the slave Protocol identifier Fixed to 0 When the slave receives data other than 0 it does not send the response message 0 is returned in the response from the slave Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte Unit identifier Fixed to 255 Function The f...

Page 999: ...arameter clear Write Set H965A for the write value 40004 All parameter clear Write Set H99AA for the write value 40006 Parameter clear Write Set H5A96 for the write value 40007 All parameter clear Write Set HAA99 for the write value 40009 Inverter status control input command Read Write Refer to the following table tab 5 380 40010 Operation mode inverter setting Read Write Refer to the following t...

Page 1000: ...erter type Enable disable parameter writing by Pr 79 and Pr 340 settings For the details refer to page 5 280 Restrictions in each operation mode conform with the computer link specification Real time monitor Refer to the description of Pr 52 on page 5 344 for the register numbers and monitored items of the real time monitor Mode Read value Write value EXT H0000 H0010 PU H0001 H0011 EXT JOG H0002 P...

Page 1001: ...y setting gain analog value Read Write Analog value set to C7 905 43905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C12 917 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed Read Write C13 917 42107 Terminal 1 bias speed Read Write Analog value set to C13 917 43917 Terminal 1 bias speed terminal analog value Read Analog value of voltage ap...

Page 1002: ...931 Current output gain signal Read Write C11 931 42121 Current output gain current Read Write Analog value set to C11 931 C38 932 41932 Terminal 4 bias command torque Read Write C39 932 42122 Terminal 4 bias torque Read Write Analog value set to C39 932 43932 Terminal 4 bias torque terminal analog value Read Analog value of current voltage applied to terminal 4 C40 933 41933 Terminal 4 gain comma...

Page 1003: ...A840 E1 FM type H46 H52 H2D H41 H38 H34 H30 H2D H45 H31 H20 H20 44002 Model Third and fourth characters Read 44003 Model Fifth and sixth characters Read 44004 Model Seventh and eighth characters Read 44005 Model Ninth and tenth characters Read 44006 Model Eleventh and twelfth characters Read 44007 Model Thirteenth and fourteenth characters Read 44008 Model Fifteenth and sixteenth characters Read 4...

Page 1004: ...o page 5 681 Set the interval of the communication check signal loss detection time in Pr 1432 Ethernet communication check time interval for all devices with IP addresses in the range specified for Ethernet command source selection Pr 1449 to Pr 1454 Refer to page 5 682 Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 541 N100 Frequency command sign selection 0 0 Frequency command without sign 1 F...

Page 1005: ...he timeout period status bit of the cyclic transmission and command to stop the cyclic transmission refer to the Instruction Manual of the master controller which supports the CC Link IE Field Network Basic Pr 544 setting Description Refer to page 0 initial setting Compatible with CC Link Ver 1 5 805 1 Compatible with CC Link Ver 1 5 806 12 Compatible with the double setting of CC Link Ver 2 5 807...

Page 1006: ...87 Setting the sign with Pr 541 Start command Sign of the frequency command Actual run command Forward rotation Forward rotation Reverse rotation Reverse rotation Reverse rotation Forward rotation Tab 5 388 Influence of the sign on the rotation direction NOTES When Pr 541 1 with sign When EEPROM write is specified with the RYE write mode error error code H01 will occur When concurrent execution of...

Page 1007: ...nction 5 810 RYnA Start self holding selection terminal STOP function 5 810 RYnB Reset terminal RES function 5 810 RYnC Monitor command 5 810 RYnD Frequency setting command RAM 5 810 RYnE Frequency setting command RAM EEPROM 5 810 RYnF Instruction code execution request 5 810 RY n 1 0to RY n 1 7 Reserved RY n 1 8 Not used initial data process completion flag RY n 1 9 Not used initial data process ...

Page 1008: ...s RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 5 812 RWwn 1 Set frequency 0 01 Hz increments torque command 5 812 RWwn 2 H00 arbitrary Instruction code 5 812 RWwn 3 Write data 5 812 Tab 5 391 Remote registers write Address Description Refer to page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits RWrn First monitor value 5 814 RWrn 1 Second monitor value 5 814 RWrn 2 Reply code 5 814 RWrn 3 Read data 5 814 Tab 5 392 Remote regist...

Page 1009: ...r code 2 Monitor code 1 5 812 RWwn 1 Set frequency 0 01 Hz increments torque command 5 812 RWwn 2 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code 5 812 RWwn 3 Write data 5 812 RWwn 4 Monitor code 3 5 812 RWwn 5 Monitor code 4 5 812 RWwn 6 Monitor code 5 5 812 RWwn 7 Monitor code 6 5 812 Tab 5 395 Remote registers write Address Description Refer to page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits RWrn First monitor...

Page 1010: ... 0 01 increments 5 812 RWwn A PID measured value 0 01 increments 5 812 RWwn B PID deviation 0 01 increments 5 812 RWwn C Torque command or torque limit Torque command or torque limit 1st quadrant 5 812 RWwn D H00 Free Torque limit 2nd quadrant 5 812 RWwn E H00 Free Torque limit 3rd quadrant 5 812 RWwn F H00 Free Torque limit 4th quadrant 5 812 Tab 5 397 Remote registers write Address Description R...

Page 1011: ...er extended setting Instruction code 5 812 RWwn 11 Write data 5 812 RWwn 12 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code 5 812 RWwn 13 Write data 5 812 RWwn 14 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code 5 812 RWwn 15 Write data 5 812 RWwn 16 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code 5 812 RWwn 17 Write data 5 812 RWwn 18 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code 5 812 RWwn ...

Page 1012: ...C While 1 is set in the monitor command RYC the monitored data is always updated RYD Frequency setting command torque command RAM When 1 is set in the frequency setting command RYD the set frequency torque command RWw1 is written to RAM of the inverter While 1 is set the set frequency RWw1 is always applied After the writing completes 1 is set in the frequency setting torque command completion RXD...

Page 1013: ...mmand RYC 0 is set in this signal RXD Frequency setting completion torque command setting completion RAM After 1 is set in the frequency setting command torque command RYD and the frequency setting command torque command is written to the inverter RAM 1 is set in this signal When 0 is set in the frequency setting command torque command RYD 0 is set in this signal RXE Frequency setting completion t...

Page 1014: ...uction code when required Set 1 in RYF after setting RWw2 and this register Set 0 when the write code is not required RWw4 Monitor code 3 Set the monitor code to be monitored By setting 1 in RYC after setting the specified monitored data is stored in RWr4 to RWr7 RWw5 Monitor code 4 RWw6 Monitor code5 RWw7 Monitor code 6 RWw8 Faults history No Set the number of previous faults you want to be able ...

Page 1015: ...e target quadrant When a value within the setting range of Pr 805 or Pr 806 is entered in RWwC while Pr 804 3 or 5 the Pr 805 Pr 806 setting is updated If the data outside the range is set the previous setting is retained RWw10 RWw12 RWw14 RWw16 RWw18 Link parameter extended setting Instruction code Set an instruction code refer to page 5 816 for an operation such as operation mode switching param...

Page 1016: ...e 2 when Pr 544 0 Upper 8 bits of RWr2 When 1 is set in RYF the reply code corresponding to the instruction code RWw2 is set Refer to page 5 815 RWr3 Read data For a normal reply the reply data to the instruction specified by the instruction code is set RWr4 Third monitor value When 1 is set in RYC the monitored data specified by the monitor code RWw4 to 7 is saved RWr5 Fourth monitor value RWr6 F...

Page 1017: ... mode H0002 Parameter selection error Unregistered code number was set H0003 Setting range error Set data is outside the permissible data range Reply code 1 H00 Normal No error normal completion of instruction code execution Reply code to RWr2 when Pr 544 0 H01 Write mode error Parameter write was attempted during operation other than a stop in the network operation mode H03 Frequency command torq...

Page 1018: ...5 for details on fault record read data Set frequency RAM Read H6D Read the set frequency speed from the RAM or EEPROM H0000 to HE678 Set frequency in 0 01Hz increments The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr 37 Pr 144 and Pr 811 Refer to page 5 341 For the FR A800 E when Pr 544 0 1 or 12 and Pr 804 3 or 5 during torque control under Real sensorless vector control or vector...

Page 1019: ...istory as a batch Parameter clear All parameter clear Write HFC All parameters return to initial values Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected according to the data 앫 Parameter clear H9696 Communication parameters are cleared H5A5A Communication parameters are not cleared 앫 All parameter clear H9966 Communication parameters are cleared H55AA Communication parameters are n...

Page 1020: ...tionsofmonitorcodes3 RWw4 to6 RWw7 canbeselected Monitor code Second monitor description first 8 bits First third to sixth monitor description last 8 bits Increments H00 Output frequency No monitoring monitor value is 0 0 01 Hz H01 Output frequency 0 01 Hz H02 Output current 0 01 A 0 1 A H03 Output voltage 0 1 V Tab 5 407 Codes for selecting monitor items NOTES The monitor codes from H01 and up an...

Page 1021: ...o the terminal 1 1 Torque command torque limit using the CC Link IE Field Network Basic 앫 Torque command 400 to 400 by the parameter setting Pr 805 or Pr 806 2 Torque command by the pulse train input FR A8AL 3 Torque command torque limit using the CC Link IE Field Network Basic 앫 Torque command torque limit 400 to 400 by the parameter setting Pr 805 or Pr 806 앫 Setting is available using the remot...

Page 1022: ...d RAM Frequency setting torque limit command RAM Torque command RAM RYE Frequency setting command RAM EEPROM Frequency setting torque limit command RAM EEPROM Torque command RAM EEPROM RXD Frequency setting completion RAM Frequency setting torque limit completion RAM Torque command completion RAM RXE Frequency setting completion RAM EEPROM Frequency setting torque limit completion RAM EEPROM Torqu...

Page 1023: ...the link parameter extended setting HFF the instruction code H85 or H86 in RWwn 2 the torque command value in RWwn 3 and 1 in RYF write to Pr 805 or Pr 806 0 4 Torque command using the CC Link IE Field Network Basic is not available Tab 5 409 Torque command setting methods Pr 804 setting Pr 810 setting Pr 544 setting Torque limit setting method Any method below can be chosen 3 5 2 14 18 앫 Set the ...

Page 1024: ...nitoring function Monitoring the output frequency 5 826 Reading a parameter value Reading the value of Pr 7 Acceleration time 5 827 Writing a parameter value Setting 3 0 s in Pr 7 Acceleration time 5 828 Setting the running frequency running speed Setting to 50 00 Hz 5 829 Reading the fault records Reading the inverter faults 5 830 Inverter reset Perform inverter reset at an inverter alarm occurre...

Page 1025: ...ig 5 392 Remote registers Programmable controller CPU Remote device station 1 X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 RX0F to RX00 RY0F to RY00 Remote device station 2 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 RX1F to RX10 RY1F to RY10 RX0F to RX00 RX1F to RX10 RY0F to RY00 RY1F to RY10 Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 RWw0 W100 RWw1...

Page 1026: ... Fig 5 393 Programming example 1 Check the data link status of the station 1 Turn ON the signal Y00 of the output unit 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X1002 Y30 7 END 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b15 0 0 0 1 X F 0 0 1 X b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 RXF RX0 RX1F RX10 Station 1 to Remote input Inverter status Inverter status b0 During forward rotation b1 Reverse rotation b...

Page 1027: ...me of instruction code execution is set to D2 Refer to page 5 815 I003130E Fig 5 394 Programming example 2 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100F MOV H0FB W102 MOV H0 W103 SET Y100F RST M301 SET M302 19 M302 X100F MOV W2 D2 RST Y100F RST M302 25 END Check the data link status of the station 1 Write the operation mode write code HFB to RWw2 and the set data H0...

Page 1028: ...3E Fig 5 396 Programming example 4 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 Y1000 Y1003 8 END Check the data link status of the station 1 Forward rotation command RY00 Middle speed operation command RY03 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 b 5 1 b 0 0 0 1 Y F 0 0 1 Y b7 Station 1 RY0F to RY00 Run command Middle speed b6 Second function selection RT b7 Terminal 4 input selection AU b8 Selection of auto...

Page 1029: ... For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher change the link parameter extended set ting set it to other than H00 Refer to page A 5 for the settings 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100F MOV H7 W102 SET Y100F RST M301 SET M302 17 M302 X100F MOV W3 D1 MOV W2 D2 RST Y100F RST M302 25 END Check the data link status of the station 1 Readtheacceleratio...

Page 1030: ...ameter assigned the number of 100 or higher change the link parameter extended set ting set it to other than H00 Refer to page A 5 for the settings For other functions refer to the instruction codes on page 5 816 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100F MOV H87 W102 MOV K30 W103 SET Y100F RST M301 SET M302 19 M302 X100F MOV W2 D2 RST Y100F RST M302 25 END Check...

Page 1031: ...ogram shown in fig 5 399 Frequency setting command Y100D Y100E Frequency setting completion X100D X100E 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100D MOV K5000 W101 SET Y100D RST M301 SET M302 17 M302 X100D MOV W2 D2 RST Y100D RST M302 23 END Check the data link status of the station 1 Read the reply code RWr2 to output to D2 when the frequency setting completion RX...

Page 1032: ...F with the instruction code HFD and data H9696 to reset the inverter set a value other than 0 in Pr 340 Communication startup mode selection or change the operation mode to the Network operation mode Refer to program example 2 on page 5 825 Refer to page 5 633 for operation conditions of inverter reset 0 SM1536 SD1536 0 SD1540 0 M0 4 M0 X20 PLS M300 8 M300 SET M301 10 M301 X100F MOV H74 W102 SET Y...

Page 1033: ...the programmable controller When Pr 340 0 initial value any inverter whose main power is restored is reset to return to theExternaloperationmode ToresumetheNetworkoperation therefore settheoperationmode to the Network operation using the programmable controller program Set a value other than 0 in Pr 340 to start in the Network operation mode after inverter reset For the details of Pr 340 refer to ...

Page 1034: ...o 5 Set the station number for the inverter to inverter link function 9999 Inverter to inverter link function disabled 1125 N682 Number of inverters in inverter to inverter link system 2 2 to 6 Set the total number of inverters used for the inverter to inverter link function Item Description Transmission speed 100 Mbps Do not use the function at 10 Mbps Connectable units Master 1 Slave up to 5 Top...

Page 1035: ...tation number the communication cannot be performed properly Set consecutive numbers for the station numbers Do not skip any numbers like 1 2 then 4 When Pr 1124 is set to a value equal to or larger than the value set in Pr 1125 normal communica tion is not available Use the Inverter to inverter linkup LNK signal to check that the master slave communication is established For the details of the LN...

Page 1036: ...rter to inverter link input from slave 1 to master Y40 to Y4F Inverter to inverter link output from master to slave 1 X50 to X5F Inverter to inverter link input from slave 2 to master Y50 to Y5F Inverter to inverter link output from master to slave 2 X60 to X6F Inverter to inverter link input from slave 3 to master Y60 to Y6F Inverter to inverter link output from master to slave 3 X70 to X7F Inver...

Page 1037: ... to SD1501 Inverter to inverter link send data 1 to 8 slave 2 Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 2 SD1502 to SD1509 Inverter to inverter link receive data 1 to 8 slave 3 Data 1 to 8 received from slave 3 SD1510 to SD1517 Inverter to inverter link send data 1 to 8 slave 3 Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 3 SD1518 to SD1525 Inverter to inverter link receive data 1 to 8 slave 4 Data 1 to 8 received from slave 4 SD15...

Page 1038: ... are not consecutive Set Pr 1124 so that the station numbers are consecutive The specified number of inverters in the system is not correct Pr 1124 is set to a value equal to or larger than the value set in Pr 1125 Set Pr 1125 correctly The connection is half duplex Use full duplex connection When Pr 1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection 0 initial value check that the hub and the Ethernet cabl...

Page 1039: ... to be backed up and restored The following data can be backed up and restored Inverter parameters Parameters used for activating the PLC function Programs including SFCs used in the PLC function Global device comment information used in the PLC function Function block source information I003099E Fig 5 403 Backup restoration using a GOT2000 NOTES The backup restoration is enabled only when the inv...

Page 1040: ...unction read protection 앫 While PLC function project data is written to read from or verified against a USB memory device Restoration 앫 During an inverter reset 앫 During running 앫 During auto tuning 앫 While password protection is enabled or the password is locked Pr 297 9999 앫 While parameter write is disabled Pr 77 1 앫 During parameter copy using an operation panel or USB memory device 앫 During b...

Page 1041: ...at a fault occurrence shuts off the control power to the inverter therefore the fault output will not be retained Fault or alarm indication When a protective function activates the operation panel displays a fault indication Operation restart method While a protective function is activated the inverter output is kept shutoff Reset the inverter to restart the operation Tab 6 1 Behaviour when a prot...

Page 1042: ...lt occurs Refer to page 6 19 of the Instruction Manual for faults Switch the power OFF once then switch it ON again Turn ON the reset signal RES for 0 1 s or more If the RES signal is kept ON Err appears flickers to indicate that the inverter is in a reset status Fig 6 1 Resetting the inverter by using the operation panel I002451E Fig 6 2 Resetting the inverter by switching the power supply off an...

Page 1043: ...ed and accumulated again from 0 I002453E Fig 6 4 Displaying the alarm list and the status values for the time of the alarm Monitor mode Faults history mode Parameter setting mode Faults history 1 Operation for displaying faults history Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial The latest fault is ended by Output frequency Flickering Output current Flickering Flickering Faults histor...

Page 1044: ...choose the parameter setting mode The parameter number read previously appears Selecting the parameter number Turn until faults history clear appears Press to read the present set value initial value appears Faults history clear Turn to change the set value to Press to start clear and flicker alternately after parameters are cleared 앫 Turn to read another parameter 앫 Press to show the setting agai...

Page 1045: ...e HOLD Operation panel lock 6 10 LOCD Password locked 6 10 to Er1 to Er4 Er8 Parameter write error 6 10 to to rE1 to rE4 rE6 to rE8 Copy operation error 6 11 Err Error 6 13 Tab 6 4 Error message Operation panel indication Name Refer to page OL Stall prevention overcurrent 6 14 oL Stall prevention overvoltage 6 15 Rb Regenerative brake pre alarm 6 15 TH Electronic thermal relay function pre alarm 6...

Page 1046: ...current trip during constant speed 17 H11 6 20 E OC3 Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop 18 H12 6 21 E OV1 Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration 32 H20 6 21 E OV2 Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed 33 H21 6 22 E OV3 Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop 34 H22 6 22 E THT Inverter overload trip electronic thermal relay function 48 H30 6 23 E...

Page 1047: ...he PLC function 164 HA4 6 29 E 17 165 HA5 E 18 166 HA6 E 19 167 HA7 E 20 168 HA8 E PE Parameter storage device fault 176 HB0 6 29 E PUE PU disconnection 177 HB1 6 30 E RET Retry count excess 178 HB2 6 30 E PE2 Parameter storage device fault 179 HB3 6 30 E CPU CPU fault 192 HC0 6 30 E 5 245 HF5 E 6 246 HF6 E 7 247 HF7 E CTE Operation panel power supply short circuit RS 485 terminal power supply sho...

Page 1048: ... 35 E MB1 Brake sequence fault 213 HD5 6 35 E MB2 214 HD6 E MB3 215 HD7 E MB4 216 HD8 E MB5 217 HD9 E MB6 218 HDA E MB7 219 HDB E EP Encoder phase fault 220 HDC 6 35 E MP Magnetic pole position unknown 222 HDE 6 35 E IAH Abnormal internal temperature 225 HE1 6 36 E LCI 4 mA input fault 228 HE4 6 36 E PCH Pre charge fault 229 HE5 6 36 E PID PID signal fault 230 HE6 6 36 E EHR Ethernet communication...

Page 1049: ...tus of the inverter is displayed The inverter does not trip If faults other than the above appear contact your sales representative Operation panel indication Name Refer to page E Faults history 6 3 EV 24 V external power supply operation 6 39 RD Backup in progress WR Restoration in progress Tab 6 8 Other messages ...

Page 1050: ...rameter write selection is set to disable parameter write 앫 Overlapping range has been set for the frequency jump 앫 Overlapping range has been set for the adjustable 5 points V F 앫 The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication 앫 IPM parameter initialization was attempted while Pr 72 25 Check point 앫 Check the Pr 77 Parameter write selection setting Refer to page 5 211 앫 Check the settings o...

Page 1051: ...the USB memory device operation 앫 A copy operation writing was performed while the PLC function was in the RUN state 앫 A copy operation was attempted for a password locked project Check point 앫 Check if the USB memory device is operating 앫 Check if the PLC function is in the RUN state 앫 Check if the project data is locked with a password Corrective action 앫 Perform the operation after the USB memo...

Page 1052: ...r verification 앫 The data in the inverter are different from the data in the USB memory device or the personal computer FR Configurator2 Check point 앫 Check the parameter setting of the source inverter against the setting of the destination inverter Corrective action 앫 Continue the verification by pressing SET key Perform parameter verification again Refer to page 5 741 앫 The operation panel FR DU...

Page 1053: ...efer to page 5 742 Operation panel indication rE8 Name No PLC function project file Description The specified PLC function project file does not exist in the USB memory device Check point 앫 Check that the file exists in the USB memory device 앫 Check that the folder name and the file name in the USB memory device is correct Corrective action The data in the USB memory device may be damaged Operatio...

Page 1054: ...tput current output torque under Real sensorless vector control or vector control of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level Pr 22 Stall prevention operation level etc this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level thi...

Page 1055: ...urs Check point 앫 Check if the brake resistor duty is not too high 앫 Check that the Pr 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr 70 settings are correct Corrective action 앫 Set the deceleration time longer 앫 Check the Pr 30 and Pr 70 settings Refer to page 5 713 Operation panel indication TH FR LU 08 TH Name Electronic thermal relay function pre alarm Description Appears if the cumulative value of...

Page 1056: ...necessary Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr 989 Parameter copy alarm release Operation panel indication SA FR LU 08 Name Safety stop Description Appears when safety stop function is activated during output shutoff Refer to page 2 63 Check point 앫 Check if an emergency stop device is activated 앫 Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when not u...

Page 1057: ...nt flows into the USB A connector Check point Check if a USB device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector Corrective action 앫 If a device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector remove the device 앫 Setting Pr 1049 USB host reset 1 or inverter reset clears the UF indication Operation panel indication HP1 to HP3 to FR LU 08 HP1 to HP3 Name Home...

Page 1058: ...hat the Ethernet cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet connector Check that the Ethernet cable is not broken Operation panel indication FN FR LU 08 FN Name Fan alarm Description For the inverter that contains a cooling fan FN appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault low rotation speed or different operation from the setting of Pr 244 Cooling fan operation sel...

Page 1059: ...control 앫 Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity PM sensorless vector control 앫 Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting PM sensorless vector control Corrective action 앫 Set the acceleration time longer Shorten the downward acceleration time of the lift 앫 If E OC1 always appears at start disconnect the motor once and restart the invert...

Page 1060: ...capacity PM sensorless vector control 앫 Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting PM sensorless vector control Corrective action 앫 Keep the load stable 앫 Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur 앫 Lower the stall prevention operation level Activate the fast response current limit operation Refer to page 5 325 앫 Check RS 485 terminal...

Page 1061: ...r vector control 앫 Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward during torque control under Real sensorless vector control 앫 Choose inverter and motor capacities that match PM sensorless vector control 앫 Input a start command after the motor stops Alternatively use the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure flying start fun...

Page 1062: ...stall prevention operation 10 11 Refer to page 5 325 앫 Set the acceleration deceleration time longer Under vector control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control the output torque can be increased However sudden acceleration may cause an overshoot in speed resulting in an occurrence of overvoltage Operation panel indication E OV3 FR LU 08 OV During Dec Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during de...

Page 1063: ...l O L relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat which is caused by overload or reduced cooling capability during low speed operation When the cumulative heat value reaches 85 of the Pr 9 Electronic thermal O L relay setting pre alarm TH is output When the accumulated value reaches the specified value the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output Check point 앫 Check th...

Page 1064: ... Undervoltage Standard models and IP55 compatible models only Description If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases the control circuit will not perform normal functions In addition the motor torque will be insufficient and or heat generation will increase To prevent this if the power supply voltage decreases to about 150 V AC 300 V AC for the 400 V class or below this function shuts o...

Page 1065: ...tor step out Name Loss of synchronism detection Description The inverter trips when the motor operation is not synchronized This function is only available under PM sensorless vector control Check point 앫 Check that the PM motor is not driven overloaded 앫 Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the PM motor is coasting 앫 Check if a motor is connected under PM sensorless vector cont...

Page 1066: ...he load inertia 앫 Check that the brake duty is proper Corrective action Replace the inverter Operation panel indication E GF FR LU 08 Ground Fault Name Output side earth ground fault overcurrent Description The inverter trips if an earth ground fault overcurrent flows due to an earth ground fault that occurred on the inverter s output side load side Check point Check for an earth ground fault in t...

Page 1067: ...Pr 189 input terminal function selection Corrective action 앫 Reduce the load and operation duty 앫 Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically the inverter will not restart unless it is reset Operation panel indication E PTC FR LU 08 PTC thermistor oper Name PTC thermistor operation Description The inverter trips if resistance of the PTC thermistor connected between the terminal 2 and termin...

Page 1068: ...rter FR HC2 or power regeneration common converter FR CV is connected when Pr 30 2 앫 Check that the plug in option for torque command setting is connected 앫 Check that the plug in option FR A8AP or FR A8APR and the control terminal option FR A8TP are installed correctly Check that the settings of Pr 393 Orientation selection and Pr 862 Encoder option selection are correct 앫 Check for the password ...

Page 1069: ...n circuit board of the FR A800 GF securely 앫 Check the connection of communication cable 앫 Check the wiring of the resolver When the FR A8APR is used 앫 If the fault occurs again when the inverter is reset contact your sales representative Operation panel indication E 16 to E 20 to FR LU 08 Fault 16 to Fault 20 Name User definition error by the PLC function Description The protective function is ac...

Page 1070: ...eration panel or the parameter unit securely Operation panel indication E RET FR LU 08 Retry count excess Name Retry count excess Description The inverter trips if the operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set in Pr 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence Check point Find the cause of the fault occurrence Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding thi...

Page 1071: ...U 08 24 VDC power fault Name 24 V DC power fault Description When the 24 V DC power output from the PC terminal is shorted this function shuts off the power output At this time all external contact inputs switch OFF The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal To reset it use the operation panel or switch power OFF then ON again Check point 앫 Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal...

Page 1072: ...mmunication from the RS 485 terminals The inverter also trips if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr 336 RS 485 communication check time interval Check point Check the RS 485 terminal wiring Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS 485 terminals properly Operation panel indication E AIE FR LU 08 Analog input fault Name Analog input fault Description The inverter trips when a...

Page 1073: ...ease contact your sales representative Operation panel indication E OS FR LU 08 Overspeed occurrence Name Overspeed occurrence Description The inverter trips when the motor speed exceeds the Pr 374 Overspeed detection level under encoder feedback control Real sensorless vector control vector control and PM sensorless vector control This protective function is not available in the initial status Ch...

Page 1074: ...e power is not supplied to the encoder later than the inverter 앫 Check that the voltage of the power supplied to the encoder is the same as the encoder output voltage Corrective action 앫 Remedy the signal loss 앫 Use an encoder that meets the specifications 앫 Make connection securely 앫 Make a switch setting of a vector control compatible option correctly Refer to page 2 73 앫 Supply the power to the...

Page 1075: ...the fault occurrence Corrective action Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly Operation panel indication E EP FR LU 08 Encoder phase fault Name Encoder phase fault Description The inverter trips when the rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected from the encoder during offline auto tuning This protective function is not available in th...

Page 1076: ...ult Name Pre charge fault Description 앫 The inverter trips when the pre charge time exceeds Pr 764 Pre charge time limit 앫 The inverter trips when the measured value exceeds Pr 763 Pre charge upper detection level during pre charging 앫 This function is available when Pr 764 and Pr 763 are set This protective function is not available in the initial status Check point 앫 Check that the Pr 764 settin...

Page 1077: ...master controller which supports the CC Link IE Field Network Basic Check point 앫 Check that the Ethernet board is installed onto the connector securely 앫 Check for a break in the Ethernet cable 앫 Check that the Pr 1432 setting is not too short 앫 Check for excessive noise around the inverter 앫 When the CC Link IE Field Network Basic is used check that the timeout period set in the master is not sh...

Page 1078: ...e devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter If the situation does not improve after taking the above measure please contact your sales representative 앫 Connect the communication option to the connector 1 앫 Set the switch on the plug in option which is for manufacturer setting back to the initial setting Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option Operation panel indication ...

Page 1079: ...nal power supply Corrective action 앫 Turning ON the power supply main circuit of the inverter clears the indication 앫 If the indication is still displayed after turning ON of the power supply main circuit of the inverter the power supply voltage may be low or the jumper between the terminals P and P1 may be disconnected NOTES If protective functions with indication of Fault are activated when usin...

Page 1080: ...1 is disconnected A DC reactor FR HEL is not connected Securely fit a jumper across P and P1 When using a DC reactor FR HEL remove the jumper across P to P1 and then connect the DC reactor Connect the DC reactor securely when required according to the capacity 2 34 2 101 Input signal Start signal is not input Check the start command source and input a start signal PU operation mode FWD key REV key...

Page 1081: ...e boost setting is improper Increase the Pr 0 setting by 0 5 increments while observing the rotation of a motor If that makes no difference decrease the setting 5 688 Pr 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is set Check the Pr 78 setting Set Pr 78 when you want to limit the motor rotation to only one direction 5 291 Pr 79 Operation mode selection setting is incorrect Select the operation mode ...

Page 1082: ...function or power failure stop function has been activated Performing overload operation during input phase loss may cause voltage insufficiency and that may result in detection of power failure Set Pr 872 Input phase loss protection selection 1 input phase failure protection active Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function and power failure stop function Reduce the ...

Page 1083: ...is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped 5 323 Resonance occurs carrier frequency Change Pr 72 PWM frequency selection setting Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical system or a motor 5 227 Set a notch filter 5 127 Auto tuning...

Page 1084: ...eck the insulation of the motor 7 7 Parameter setting Pr 71 Applied motor setting is incorrect Check the Pr 71 Applied motor setting 5 451 Motor current is large Refer to 6 6 11 Motor current is too large 6 47 Check points Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to page Main circuit Phase sequence of output terminals U V and W is incorrect Connect phase sequence of the output cables terminal U V W to ...

Page 1085: ...p E OC첸 is likely to occur 2 44 5 325 Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor Check points Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to page Parameter setting Acceleration deceleration time is too short Increase the acceleration deceleration time 5 241 Torque boost Pr 0 Pr 46 Pr 112 setting is improper under V F control so the stall prevention function is activated Increase decrease the...

Page 1086: ...e encoder cable to the enclosure using a metal P clip or U clip 2 77 Parameter setting Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too large Under V F control change the Pr 19 Base frequency voltage setting approximately by 3 5 690 Pr 80 Motor capacity and Pr 81 Number of motor poles are not appropriate for the motor capacity under Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control ve...

Page 1087: ...ut the power 2 21 Control circuit Front cover Operation panel is not properly connected to the inverter Check if the inverter front cover is installed securely 2 7 Check points Possible cause Countermeasure Refer to page Parameter setting Torque boost Pr 0 Pr 46 Pr 112 setting is improper under V F control so the stall prevention function is activated Increase decrease the Pr 0 Torque boost settin...

Page 1088: ...s activated Increase decrease the Pr 0 Torque boost setting value by 0 5 increments so that stall prevention does not occur 5 688 V F pattern is improper when V F control is performed Pr 3 Pr 14 Pr 19 Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr 3 Base frequency Use Pr 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage for example rated motor voltage 5 690 Change Pr 14 Load pattern selection according to...

Page 1089: ...e selection setting Check the Pr 77 setting 5 211 Key lock mode is enabled by the Pr 161 Frequency setting key lock operation selection setting Check the Pr 161 setting 5 206 Operation mode and a writing device do not correspond Check Pr 79 Pr 338 Pr 339 Pr 550 and Pr 551 and select an operation mode suitable for the purpose 5 271 5 282 앫 Pr 72 PWM frequency selection was attempted to be set to 25...

Page 1090: ...Check first when you have a trouble Protective functions 6 50 ...

Page 1091: ...Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection Consult us for periodic inspection Check and clean the cooling system Clean the air filter etc Check the tightening and retighten The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration temperature changes etc Check and tighten them Tighten them according to the specified tighten ing torque Refer to ...

Page 1092: ...ground terminal 4 Contact the manufacturer 2 Check for loose screws and bolts 4 Retighten 3 Check for overheat traces on the parts 4 Contact the manufacturer 4 Check for stain 4 Clean Conductors cables 1 Check conductors for distortion 4 Contact the manufacturer 2 Check cable sheaths for breakage and deterioration crack discoloration etc 4 Contact the manufacturer Transformer reactor Check for unu...

Page 1093: ... development 4 Contact the manufacturer Aluminum electrolytic capacitor 1 Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and deformation trace 4 Contact the manufacturer 2 Visual check and judge by the life check of the control circuit capacitor Refer to page 7 6 4 Cooling system Cooling fan 1 Check for unusual vibration and noise 4 Replace the fan 2 Check for loose screws and bolts 4 Fix with the fan co...

Page 1094: ... not indicate At the time of electric continuity the measured value is several Ω to several tens of Ω If all measured values are almost the same although these values are not constant depending on the module type and tester type the modules are without fault Fig 7 1 Module device numbers and terminals to be checked I001305E Tester polarity Result Tester polarity Result Converter module D1 R L1 P D...

Page 1095: ...er gentlywipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol NOTES Do not use solvent such as acetone benzene toluene and alcohol as these will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off The display etc of the operation panel and the parameter unit are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol Therefore avoid using them for cleaning ...

Page 1096: ...tic warning is output when the life span of each part is near its end It gives an indi cation of replacement time The life warning output can be used as a guideline for life judgment Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity refer to page 5 233 for details Part name Estimated lifespan Description Cooling fan 10 years Replace as required Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years Repl...

Page 1097: ...ush the hooks from above and remove the fan cover Disconnect the fan connectors Remove the fan I001306E Fig 7 2 Removal of the fan cover I002454E Fig 7 3 Removal of the fan FR A820 00105 1 5K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00083 2 2K 00126 3 7K FR A820 00340 5 5K to 01540 30K FR A840 00170 5 5K to 00770 30K FR A820 01870 37K or higher FR A840 00930 37K to 03610 132K The number of cooling fans differs accor...

Page 1098: ...the fan connectors Fig 7 4 Orientation of the fan I002456E I002455E Fig 7 5 Connection of the fan AIRFLOW FR A820 00105 1 5K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00083 2 2K 00126 3 7K FR A820 00340 5 5K to 00770 15K FR A840 00170 5 5K to 00380 15K FR A820 01540 30K FR A840 00770 30K FR A820 00930 18 5K 01250 22K FR A840 00470 18 5K 00620 22K FR A820 01870 37K 02330 45K FR A840 00930 37K to 01800 55K FR A820 0316...

Page 1099: ...I002457E I002458E I002459E Fig 7 6 Reinstall the fan cover I002809E Fig 7 7 Removal of the fan FR A840 04320 160K or higher FR A820 01870 37K or higher FR A840 00930 37K to 03610 132K FR A820 00340 5 5K to 01540 30K FR A840 00170 5 5K to 00770 30K FR A820 00105 1 5K to 00250 3 7K FR A840 00083 2 2K 00126 3 7K Insert hooks into holes Insert hooks until you hear a click sound The number of cooling f...

Page 1100: ...crack Check for external crack discoloration liquid leakage etc Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80 of the rating Relays To prevent a contact fault etc relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times switching life Main circuit fuse inside the inverter FR A840 04320 160K or higher A fuse is used...

Page 1101: ...s cannot be removed Slide down the control circuit terminal block to remove it Be careful not to bend the pins of the inverter s control circuit connector reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws I002460E Fig 7 9 Removal of the terminal block I002461E Fig 7 10 Reinstallation of the terminal block NOTE Before starting inverter replacement switch power OFF wai...

Page 1102: ... the inverter output side When the inverter to motor wiring length is large especially in the 400 V class small capacity models the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line to line leakage current Therefore choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating To measure and display the output voltage and output current of the inverter it is recommended to use the terminal AM ...

Page 1103: ...e phases is 10 or lower of the inverter rated current Output side power P2 U V W and across U and V V and W Digital power meter for inverter or electrodynamic type single phase wattmeter P2 W21 W22 2 wattmeter method or 3 wattmeter method Output side power factor Pf2 Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor Converter output Across P and N Moving coil type such as tester Invert...

Page 1104: ...rts insidethe instrument leading to burnout In this case use an approximate effective value type When the setting of Pr 195 ABC1 terminal function selection is the positive logic A digital power meter designed for inverter can also be used to measure Fault signal Across A1 and C1 Across B1 and C1 Moving coil type such as tester Continuity check Normal Fault Across A1 and C1 Discontinuity Continuit...

Page 1105: ...ntmeasuring sideorwhenthe metercontains aPTonthe voltage measurementside anerrorwill alsobeproduced due to the frequency characteristics of the CT and PT I001301E I001302E Fig 7 12 Differences when measuring power with different instruments Example of measuring inverter input power Example of measuring inverter output power 3 wattmeter method Electro dynamometer type 2 wattmeter method Electro dyn...

Page 1106: ...lt meter A needle type tester cannot be used to measure the output side voltage as it indicates a value much greater than the actual value A moving iron type meter indicates an effective value which includes harmonics and therefore the value is larger than that of the fundamental wave Thevaluemonitoredontheoperationpanelistheinverter controlledvoltageitself Hence thatvalue is accurate and it is re...

Page 1107: ...er is used always use an effective value detection type A mean value detection type produces a large error and may indicate an extremely smaller value than the actual value The value monitored on the operation panel is accurate if the output frequency varies and it is rec ommended to monitor values provide analog output using the operation panel Examples of measured value differences produced by d...

Page 1108: ...r during deceleration for example the converter output voltage rises to nearly 400 V DC to 450 V DC 800 V DC to 900 V DC for the 400 V class maximum 7 2 7 Measurement of inverter output frequency In the initial setting of the FM type inverter a pulse train proportional to the output frequency is out put across the pulse train output terminals FM and SD of the inverter This pulse train output can b...

Page 1109: ...500 V DC megger 7 2 9 Pressure test Do not conduct a pressure test Deterioration may occur I002463E Fig 7 14 Insulation resistance test NOTES Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter For the continuity test of the control circuit use a tester high resista...

Page 1110: ...Measurement of main circuit voltages currents and powers Precautions for maintenance and inspection 7 20 ...

Page 1111: ...haracteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C ND initial setting 150 60 s 200 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C HD 200 60 s 250 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C Rated voltage Three phase 200 to 240 V Regenerative braking Brake transistor Built in FR BU2 Option Maximumbraketorque 150 torque 3 ED 100 torque 3 ED 100 torque 2...

Page 1112: ...rounding air temperature 50 C ND initial setting 150 60 s 200 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C HD 200 60 s 250 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C Rated voltage Three phase 380 to 500 V Regenerative braking Brake transistor Built in FR BU2 Option Maximum brake torque 100 torque 2 ED 20 torque continuous 10 torque continuous FR AB...

Page 1113: ...erature 50 C ND initial setting 150 60 s 200 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C HD 200 60 s 250 3 s inverse time characteristics at surrounding air temperature 50 C Rated voltage Three phase 380 to 500 V Regenerative braking Brake transistor FR BU2 Option Maximum brake torque 10 torque continuous FR ABR when the option is used Power supply Rated input AC voltage f...

Page 1114: ...be changed within the setting range However the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about 2 Value by the built in brake resistor Value for the ND rating The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage The impedance at the power supply side including those of the input reactor and cables affects the rated in...

Page 1115: ...0M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S InertiamomentJ 10 4 kg m2 67 5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850 Noise 75 dB 80 dB 85 dB Cooling fan with thermal protector Voltage Single phase 200 V 50 Hz Single phase 200 V to 230 V 60 Hz Three phase 200 V 50 Hz Three phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Input 36 55 W 0 26 0 32 A 22 28 W 0 11 0 13 A 55 71 W 0 39 0 39 A 100 156 W 0 47 0 53 A 85 130W 0 46 0 52A...

Page 1116: ...o an increased workload but the cooling fan can be used as it is When preparing a thermal relay at the user side use the recommended thermal setting Motor type SF V5RUH첸K 1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55 Applicable inverter model FR A840 첸K ND rating 2 2 2 2 3 7 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Rated output kW 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 Rated current A 4 2 5 8 8 8 14 5 18 5 27 ...

Page 1117: ...0 dB 95 dB Cool ing fan Voltage Three phase 200 V 50 Hz 200 V 60 Hz 220 V 60 Hz 400 V class cooling fan is available upon order Input W 50 Hz 750 400 400 400 400 400 750 750 60 Hz 750 750 750 750 750 1500 1500 Approx mass kg 610 610 660 870 890 920 1170 1630 Common specifications Surrounding air temperature humidity 10 to 40 C non freezing 90 RH or less non condensing Structure Totally enclosed fo...

Page 1118: ... 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 Continuous characteristics Rated output kW 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 3 5 5 0 7 0 Rated torque Nm 2 39 4 78 7 16 9 55 16 70 23 86 33 41 Rated speed r min 2000 Max speed r min 3000 Instantaneouspermissiblespeed r min 3450 Maximum torque Nm 4 78 9 56 14 32 19 09 33 41 47 73 66 82 Inertia moment J 10 4 kg m2 6 6 7 0 13 7 14 9 20 0 21 2 45 5 48 9 85 6 89 0 120 0 160 0 Recommended ratio of load in...

Page 1119: ...468E Tab 8 9 Torque characteristics during current synchronization operation 2000 100 150 200 100 120 3000 Torque Instantaneous 3 s Shortduration 60s Continuous Speed r min 2000 150 200 100 3000 Torque Speed r min Instantaneous 3 s Shortduration 60s Continuous 2000 100 150 200 100 120 3000 Torque Speed r min Instantaneous 3 s Shortduration 60s Continuous 2000 100 150 200 100 3000 Torque Speed r mi...

Page 1120: ...the operation panel or parameter unit Four digit BCD or 16 bit binary when used with option FR A8AX Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self holding input 3 wire input can be selected Input signals twelve terminals Low speed operation command Middle speed operation command High speed operation command Second function selection Terminal 4 input selection Jog operatio...

Page 1121: ... power failure Undervoltage Input phase loss Stall prevention stop Loss of synchronism detection Brake transistor alarm detection Output side earth ground fault overcurrent Output short circuit Output phase loss External thermal relay operation PTC thermistor operation Option fault Communication option fault PU disconnection Retry count excess Parameter storage device fault CPU fault Operation pow...

Page 1122: ... dimensions of the frequency inverter models are valid for all types except otherwise stated I002469E Fig 8 1 Dimensions FR A820 00046 0 4K FR A820 00077 0 75K 6 95 110 7 5 245 7 5 260 1 5 7 5 5 D1 D Inverter model D D1 FR A820 00046 0 4K 110 20 FR A820 00077 0 75K 125 35 Unit mm 2 6 hole The LED display cover attached to the FR A800 GF in this position has an additional 2 1 mm depth ...

Page 1123: ...02470E Fig 8 2 Dimensions FR A820 00105 1 5K 00167 2 2K 00250 3 7K FR A840 00023 0 4K 00038 0 75K 00052 1 5K 00083 2 2K 00126 3 7K 150 5 140 1 5 245 7 5 260 45 5 7 5 6 12 5 125 FR A840 00023 0 4K to 00052 1 5K are not provided with a cooling fan The LED display cover attached to the FR A800 GF in this position has an additional 2 1 mm depth Unit mm 2 6 hole FAN ...

Page 1124: ... 5K 00630 11K FR A840 00170 5 5K 00250 7 5K 00310 11K 00380 15K 6 195 220 7 5 H1 7 5 H2 H 2 3 D1 12 5 D Unit mm Inverter model H H1 H2 D D1 FR A820 00340 5 5K 00490 7 5K FR A840 00170 5 5K 00250 7 5K 260 245 1 5 170 84 FR A820 00630 11K FR A840 00310 11K 00380 15K 300 285 3 190 101 5 2 6 hole FAN The LED display cover attached to the FR A800 GF in this position has an additional 2 1 mm depth ...

Page 1125: ... 22K FR A840 00470 18 5K 00620 22K I002472E Fig 8 4 Dimensions FR A820 00770 15K 00930 18 5K 01250 22K FR A840 00470 18 5K 00620 22K 250 230 10 10 1 5 380 10 400 2 3 190 93 3 10 Unit mm 2 10 hole The LED display cover attached to the FR A800 GF in this position has an additional 2 1 mm depth ...

Page 1126: ...FR A840 00770 30K I002473E_D Fig 8 5 Dimensions FR A820 01540 30K FR A840 00770 30K 10 325 270 10 550 10 530 3 2 15 520 15 195 17 Unit mm 2 10 hole 4 20 hole for hanging The LED display cover attached to the FR A800 GF in this position has an additional 2 1 mm depth ...

Page 1127: ...it mm 2 12 hole 4 d hole FAN Inverter model W W1 H H1 H2 d D D1 FR A820 01870 37K 02330 45K FR A840 00930 37K 01160 45K 01800 55K 435 380 550 525 514 25 250 24 FR A820 03160 55K 465 410 700 675 664 25 250 22 FR A820 03800 75K 04750 90K 465 400 740 715 704 24 360 22 FR A840 02160 75K 02600 90K 465 400 620 595 584 24 300 22 FR A840 03250 110K 03610 132K 465 400 740 715 704 25 360 22 When using a mot...

Page 1128: ...8 7 Dimensions FR A840 04320 160K 04810 185K 12 200 498 10 985 15 1010 3 2 380 13 984 13 22 200 Unit mm 3 12 hole 4 16 hole FAN Always connect a DC reactor FR HEL which is available as an option The LED display cover attached to the FR A800 GF in this position has an additional 2 1 mm depth ...

Page 1129: ...Fig 8 8 Dimensions FR A840 05470 220K 06100 250K 06830 280K 300 680 12 300 13 984 13 1010 3 2 380 13 984 13 22 Unit mm 3 12 hole 4 16 hole FAN Always connect a DC reactor FR HEL which is available as an option The LED display cover attached to the FR A800 GF in this position has an additional 2 1 mm depth ...

Page 1130: ...22 20 Outline drawing Panel cutting dimension drawing Unit mm 3 2 2 M3 screw Panel 120 Operation panel connection cable FR CB2첸 option Operation panel connection connector FR ADP option Denotes the space required to connect an optional parameter unit connection cable FR CB2첸 When using another cable leave the space required for the cable specification Air bleeding hole ...

Page 1131: ...KG D KL XB F F N QK KA Q B A R L A A Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Sliding distance Frame leg viewed from above Section AA Direction of cooling fan wind Mark for earthing grounding Earth ground terminal M5 A B G2 G1 U V W For cooling fan A B For motor U V W Earthing grounding terminal M4 For thermal protector G1 G2 φ56 KG XB F F N 90 KA 110 B A R L 50 E E M D KL 8 C H I A A T...

Page 1132: ... 78 93 117 117 115 115 139 139 487 533 KL KP 220 210 231 242 256 256 330 330 352 352 546 592 L 425 477 478 542 580 735 779 790 828 909 932 M 175 200 230 256 256 310 310 335 335 390 428 ML 212 242 268 268 N 150 180 180 180 218 254 298 285 323 361 342 XB 56 63 70 89 89 108 108 121 121 133 149 Q 60 60 80 80 QK 45 45 63 63 R 168 5 193 200 239 258 323 345 351 5 370 5 425 5 432 S 24j6 28j6 28j6 38k6 38k...

Page 1133: ...r cooling fan Main terminal box V U B2 B1 W G1 G2 C B A Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan For brake B1 B2 For motor U V W For thermal protector G1 G2 For cooling fan A B Earthing grounding terminal M4 Earthing grounding terminal M4 5 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening 5 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manu...

Page 1134: ...212 242 268 268 N 150 180 180 180 218 254 298 285 323 361 342 X 15 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XB 56 63 70 89 89 108 108 121 121 133 149 Z 9 12 12 12 12 14 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 18 5 18 5 Shaft end Q 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 110 110 140 140 QK 40 45 45 63 63 90 90 90 90 110 110 R 168 5 193 200 239 258 323 345 351 5 370 5 425 5 432 S 24j6 28j6 28j6 38k6 38k6 42k6 42k6 48k6 55m6 60m6 65m6 T 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 10 11 1...

Page 1135: ...round terminal M5 Mark for earthing grounding W U T S LN LZ KD KL IE A A LA LL KB LR LG LE QK Q LC LB B B D Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Direction of cooling fan wind Earth ground terminal M5 Mark for earthing grounding Section BB Section AA A B G2 G1 U V W For cooling fan A B For motor U V W Earthing grounding terminal M4 For thermal protector G1 G2 W S T U A A LN LZ L A IE...

Page 1136: ...2 LL 402 432 448 484 522 625 669 690 728 823 5 LN 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 LZ 12 14 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 18 5 18 5 18 5 18 5 18 5 Shaft end LR 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 110 110 140 Q 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 110 110 140 QK 40 45 45 63 63 90 90 90 90 110 S 24j6 28j6 28j6 38k6 38k6 42k6 42k6 48k6 55m6 60m6 T 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 10 11 U 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 7 W 8 8 8 10 10 12 12 14 16 18 Terminal screw size U V W M6 M6...

Page 1137: ... D KB A LN LZ A 1 2 LA KD KL φ22 KP Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Direction of cooling fan wind Terminal box for cooling fan Main termi nal box Earth ground terminal M5 Mark for earthing grounding Section BB 5 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening Section AA V U B2 B1 W G1 G2 C B A Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan For b...

Page 1138: ... Shaft end LR 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 Q 50 60 60 80 80 110 110 QK 40 45 45 63 63 90 90 S 24j6 28j6 28j6 38k6 38k6 42k6 42k6 T 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 U 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 W 8 8 8 10 10 12 12 Terminal screwsize U V W M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 A B C M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 B1 B2 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 G1 G2 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 Tab 8 14 Dimensions table Unit mm NOTES Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft h...

Page 1139: ...rawings 1500 r min series L A R B KA Q QK K2 K2 K1 F F XB N K J E E S W M H KG C T U G Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Directionof cooling fan wind Terminal box for cooling fan 4 Z hole This hole is not used PF4 Class B screw L A R B K2 K1 K K2 XB F F N KA Q QK S W T U H KG G C 1 0 J E E M 0 Connector for encoder MS3102A20 29P Suction Exhaust Directionof cooling fan wind Termin...

Page 1140: ...0 K 130 130 130 130 130 160 175 K1 168 168 181 181 181 160 428 K2 50 50 40 40 40 75 80 L 1471 1471 1619 1619 1619 1799 2084 M 486 486 560 560 560 560 636 N 449 449 449 449 499 607 870 R 482 5 482 5 569 5 569 5 569 5 588 5 741 Z 24 24 24 24 24 24 28 XB 168 168 190 190 190 190 216 KA 157 5 157 5 210 5 210 5 210 5 214 5 306 KG 635 635 705 705 705 745 825 Shaft end size Q 140 140 170 170 170 170 170 Q...

Page 1141: ... CF 300 Hz 400 Hz PID control Turn the X14 signal ON to enable PID control The X14 signal does not need to be assigned PID control is available by the Pr 128 setting The PID pre charge function and dancer control are added Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Turn the CS signal ON to enable restart CS signal assignment not required Restart is enabled with the Pr 57 setting only Numb...

Page 1142: ...s can be easily copied to the FR A800 series by using the setup software FR Configurator2 Not supported by the setup software FR SW3 SETUP or older PU 앫 FR DU07 4 digit LED 앫 FR PU07 앫 FR DU08 5 digit LED 앫 FR LU08 LCD operation panel 앫 FR PU07 Some functions such as parameter copy are unavailable 앫 FR DU07 is not supported Plug in option Dedicated plug in options not interchangeable Communication...

Page 1143: ...acities To use the same mounting holes of the FR A540 11K or 15K for the A800 series the optional installation interchange attachment FR AAT is necessary The panel through attachment is not interchangeable The enclosure cut dimensions of the FR A520 3 7K or lower FR A520 30K FR A520 55K or higher FR A540 3 7K or lower FR A540 11K and 15K and FR A540 75K or higher are not compatible NOTE For the in...

Page 1144: ...6 kHz FR A820 03800 75K or higher and FR A840 02160 75K or higher Current synchronization operation 2 kHz Pr 72 0 to 5 6 kHz Pr 72 6 to 9 10 kHz Pr 72 10 to 13 14 kHz Pr 72 14 or 15 6 kHz in a low speed range of 10 kHz or higher Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure No startup waiting time Using the regeneration avoidance function or retry function together is recommended Startup wai...

Page 1145: ...communication refer to page 5 635 When a communication option is installed parameter clear lock release during password lock Pr 297 9999 can be performed only from the communication option Available when the IPM motor MM CF series is used and the low speed range high torque char acteristic is enabled Pr 788 9999 initial value Reading and writing via the PU connector are available Symbols in the ta...

Page 1146: ...ting speed 5 19 99 0 Δ Δ 26 Multi speed setting speed 6 1A 9A 0 Δ Δ 27 Multi speed setting speed 7 1B 9B 0 Δ Δ 28 Multi speed input compensation selection 1C 9C 0 x x 29 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection 1D 9D 0 x x 30 Regenerative function selection 1E 9E 0 31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0 x x 32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0 x x 33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0 x x 34 Frequency jump 2B 22 A2 0 x x...

Page 1147: ...ference value at acceleration 3E BE 0 x x x x x x 63 Reference value at deceleration 3F BF 0 x x x x x x 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 40 C0 0 x x x x x x x x 65 Retry selection 41 C1 0 x x 66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 42 C2 0 x x x x x x x 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence 43 C3 0 x x 68 Retry waiting time 44 C4 0 x x 69 Retry count display erase 45 ...

Page 1148: ... F1 first frequency 00 80 1 x x x x x x x x 101 V F1 first frequency voltage 01 81 1 x x x x x x x x 102 V F2 second frequency 02 82 1 x x x x x x x x 103 V F2 second frequency voltage 03 83 1 x x x x x x x x 104 V F3 third frequency 04 84 1 x x x x x x x x 105 V F3 third frequency voltage 05 85 1 x x x x x x x x 106 V F4 fourth frequency 06 86 1 x x x x x x x x 107 V F4 fourth frequency voltage 0...

Page 1149: ...tegral time 1E 9E 1 x x x x 131 PID upper limit 1F 9F 1 x x x x 132 PID lower limit 20 A0 1 x x x x 133 PID action set point 21 A1 1 x x x x 134 PID differential time 22 A2 1 x x x x 135 Electronic bypass sequence selection 23 A3 1 x x x x x x 136 MC switchover interlock time 24 A4 1 x x x x x x 137 Start waiting time 25 A5 1 x x x x x x 138 Bypass selection at a fault 26 A6 1 x x x x x x 139 Auto...

Page 1150: ...ation 3B BB 1 x x x x x x 160 User group read selection 00 80 2 161 Frequency setting key lock operation selection 01 81 2 x 162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection 02 82 2 x x 163 First cushion time for restart 03 83 2 x x x x x x x 164 First cushion voltage for restart 04 84 2 x x x x x x x 165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 05 85 2 x x x x x x x 166 Outpu...

Page 1151: ...erminal function selection 20 A0 2 x 193 OL terminal function selection 21 A1 2 x 194 FU terminal function selection 22 A2 2 x 195 ABC1 terminal function selection 23 A3 2 x 196 ABC2 terminal function selection 24 A4 2 x 232 Multi speed setting speed 8 28 A8 2 Δ Δ 233 Multi speed setting speed 9 29 A9 2 Δ Δ 234 Multi speed setting speed 10 2A AA 2 Δ Δ 235 Multi speed setting speed 11 2B AB 2 Δ Δ 2...

Page 1152: ...257 Control circuit capacitor life display 41 C1 2 x x x 258 Main circuit capacitor life display 42 C2 2 x x x 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 43 C3 2 260 PWM frequency automatic switchover 44 C4 2 261 Power failure stop selection 45 C5 2 x x 262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 46 C6 2 x x 263 Subtraction starting frequency 47 C7 2 x x 264 Power failure deceleration time 1 48 ...

Page 1153: ... 286 Droop gain 5E DE 2 x x x x x x 287 Droop filter time constant 5F DF 2 x x x x x x x 288 Droop function activation selection 60 E0 2 289 Inverter output terminal filter 61 E1 2 x 290 Monitor negative output selection 62 E2 2 291 Pulse train I O selection 63 E3 2 x x x 292 Automatic acceleration deceleration 64 E4 2 x x x x x x 293 Acceleration deceleration separate selection 65 E5 2 x x x x x ...

Page 1154: ...selection 0D 8D 3 x 314 DO1 output selection 0E 8E 3 x 315 DO2 output selection 0F 8F 3 x 316 DO3 output selection 10 90 3 x 317 DO4 output selection 11 91 3 x 318 DO5 output selection 12 92 3 x 319 DO6 output selection 13 93 3 x 320 RA1 output selection 14 94 3 x 321 RA2 output selection 15 95 3 x 322 RA3 output selection 16 96 3 x 323 AM0 0V adjustment 17 97 3 x 324 AM1 0mA adjustment 18 98 3 x ...

Page 1155: ...on error count 2B AB 3 x x x 345 DeviceNet address 2D AD 3 346 DeviceNet ControlNet baud rate 2E AE 3 349 Communication reset selection 31 B1 3 350 Stop position command selection 32 B2 3 x x x x x x 351 Orientation speed 33 B3 3 x x x x x x 352 Creep speed 34 B4 3 x x x x x x 353 Creep switchover position 35 B5 3 x x x x x x 354 Position loop switchover position 36 B6 3 x x x x x x 355 DC injecti...

Page 1156: ...x x x x x 380 Acceleration S pattern 1 50 D0 3 x x 381 Deceleration S pattern 1 51 D1 3 x x 382 Acceleration S pattern 2 52 D2 3 x x 383 Deceleration S pattern 2 53 D3 3 x x 384 Input pulse division scaling factor 54 D4 3 x x 385 Frequency for zero input pulse 55 D5 3 x x 386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 56 D6 3 x x 393 Orientation selection 5D DD 3 x x x x x x x x 394 Number of machine side ...

Page 1157: ...n feed forward gain 17 97 4 x x x x x x x 424 Position command acceleration deceleration time constant 18 98 4 x x x x x x x 425 Position feed forward command filter 19 99 4 x x x x x x x 426 In position width 1A 9A 4 x x x x x x x 427 Excessive level error 1B 9B 4 x x x x x x x 428 Command pulse selection 1C 9C 4 x x x x x x x 429 Clear signal selection 1D 9D 4 x x x x x x x 430 Pulse monitor sel...

Page 1158: ...igits 43 C3 4 x x x x x x x 468 Second target position upper 4 digits 44 C4 4 x x x x x x x 469 Third target position lower 4 digits 45 C5 4 x x x x x x x 470 Third target position upper 4 digits 46 C6 4 x x x x x x x 471 Fourth target position lower 4 digits 47 C7 4 x x x x x x x 472 Fourth target position upper 4 digits 48 C8 4 x x x x x x x 473 Fifth target position lower 4 digits 49 C9 4 x x x...

Page 1159: ... digits 5B DB 4 x x x x x x x 492 Fourteenth target position upper 4 digits 5C DC 4 x x x x x x x 493 Fifteenth target position lower 4 digits 5D DD 4 x x x x x x x 494 Fifteenth target position upper 4 digits 5E DE 4 x x x x x x x 495 Remote output selection 5F DF 4 496 Remote output data 1 60 E0 4 x x x 497 Remote output data 2 61 E1 4 x x x 498 PLC function flash memory clear 62 E2 4 x x x x 50...

Page 1160: ...requency jump range 34 B4 5 x x 553 PID deviation limit 35 B5 5 x x x x 554 PID signal operation selection 36 B6 5 x x x x 555 Current average time 37 B7 5 556 Data output mask time 38 B8 5 557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current 39 B9 5 560 Second frequency search gain 3C BC 5 x x x x x x 561 PTC thermistor protection level 3D BD 5 x 563 Energization time carrying over t...

Page 1161: ...de deceleration time 61 E1 5 x x x x x 598 Undervoltage level 62 E2 5 x x x 599 X10 terminal input selection 63 E3 5 600 First free thermal reduction frequency 1 00 80 6 601 First free thermal reduction ratio 1 01 81 6 602 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 02 82 6 603 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 03 83 6 604 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 04 84 6 606 Power failure stop ext...

Page 1162: ...ke operation frequency 2E AE 6 x x x x 647 Second brake operation time at stop 2F AF 6 x x x x 648 Second deceleration detection function selection 30 B0 6 x x x x x 650 Second brake opening current selection 32 B2 6 x x x x x 651 Second brake operation frequency selection 33 B3 6 x x x x x x 653 Speed smoothing control 35 B5 6 x x x x x x x 654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency 36 B6 6 x x x x x x...

Page 1163: ... Tuning data unit switchover 54 D4 6 x x 686 Maintenance timer 2 56 D6 6 x x x 687 Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time 57 D7 6 x 688 Maintenance timer 3 58 D8 6 x x x 689 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 59 D9 6 x 690 Deceleration check time 5A DA 6 x x x x x 692 Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 5C DC 6 693 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 5D DD 6 694 Second free t...

Page 1164: ...x x x x x x x 743 Second motor maximum frequency 2B AB 7 x x x x x x x x 744 Second motor inertia integer 2C AC 7 x x x x x x x x 745 Second motor inertia exponent 2D AD 7 x x x x x x x x 746 Second motor protection current level 2E AE 7 x x x x x x x x 747 Second motor low speed range torque characteristic selection 2F AF 7 x x x x x x x x 750 Motor temperature detection level 32 B2 7 751 Referen...

Page 1165: ...ge torque characteristic selection 58 D8 7 x x x x x x x x 791 Acceleration time in low speed range 5B DB 7 x x x x x x x x 792 Deceleration time in low speed range 5C DC 7 x x x x x x x x 799 Pulse increment setting for output power 63 E3 7 800 Control method selection 00 80 8 x 802 Pre excitation selection 02 82 8 x x x x x x x x 803 Constant output range torque characteristic selection 03 83 8 ...

Page 1166: ...ion filter 1 17 97 8 x x x x x 824 Torque control P gain 1 current loop proportional gain 18 98 8 x x 825 Torque control integral time 1 current loop integral time 19 99 8 x x 826 Torque setting filter 1 1A 9A 8 x x x 827 Torque detection filter 1 1B 9B 8 x x 828 Model speed control gain 1C 9C 8 x x x x 830 Speed control P gain 2 1E 9E 8 x x x x 831 Speed control integral time 2 1F 9F 8 x x x x 83...

Page 1167: ... encoder pulses 33 B3 8 x x x x x x x x 852 Control terminal option Encoder rotation direction 34 B4 8 x x x x x x x x 853 Speed deviation time 35 B5 8 x x x x x x x x 854 Excitation ratio 36 B6 8 x x x x x 855 Control terminal option Signal loss detection enable disable selection 37 B7 8 x x x x x x x x 857 DA1 0V adjustment 39 B9 8 x x 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 3A BA 8 x x 859 Torque cu...

Page 1168: ...ration avoidance operation level 53 D3 8 x x x x 884 Regeneration avoidance at decelerationdetectionsensitivity 54 D4 8 x x x x 885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value 55 D5 8 x x x x 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 56 D6 8 x x x x 888 Free parameter 1 58 D8 8 x x 889 Free parameter 2 59 D9 8 x x 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 5B DB 8 892 Load factor...

Page 1169: ...ting gain 61 E1 1 x C12 917 Terminal 1 bias frequency speed 11 91 9 x x x x C13 917 Terminal 1 bias speed 11 91 9 x x x x C14 918 Terminal 1 gain frequency speed 12 92 9 x x x x C15 918 Terminal 1 gain speed 12 92 9 x x x x C16 919 Terminal 1 bias command torque 13 93 9 x x x x C17 919 Terminal 1 bias torque 13 93 9 x x x x C18 920 Terminal 1 gain command torque 14 94 9 x x x x C19 920 Terminal 1 ...

Page 1170: ...rent output gain current 1F 9F 9 C38 932 Terminal 4 bias command torque 20 A0 9 x x x x C39 932 Terminal 4 bias torque 20 A0 9 x x x x C40 933 Terminal 4 gain command torque 21 A1 9 x x x x C41 933 Terminal 4 gain torque 21 A1 9 x x x x C42 934 PID display bias coefficient 22 A2 9 x x x x x C43 934 PID display bias analog value 22 A2 9 x x x x x C44 935 PID display gain coefficient 23 A3 9 x x x x...

Page 1171: ...6 A x x x 1007 Clock month day 07 87 A x x x 1008 Clock hour minute 08 88 A x x x 1015 Integral stop selection at limited frequency 0F 8F A x x x x 1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time 10 90 A x 1018 Monitor with sign selection 12 92 A 1019 Analog meter voltage negative output selection 13 93 A 1020 Trace operation selection 14 94 A 1021 Trace mode selection 15 95 A 1022 Sampling cycle 16...

Page 1172: ...trigger channel 2E AE A 1047 Digital trigger operation selection 2F AF A 1048 Display off waiting time 30 B0 A 1049 USB host reset 31 B1 A x x x 1072 DC brake judgment time for anti sway control operation 48 C8 A x x x x 1073 Anti sway control operation selection 49 C9 A x x x x 1074 Anti sway control frequency 4A CA A x x x x 1075 Anti sway control depth 4B CB A x x x x 1076 Anti sway control wid...

Page 1173: ...1134 PID upper limit manipulated value 22 A2 B x x x x 1135 PID lower limit manipulated value 23 A3 B x x x x 1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 24 A4 B x x x x x 1137 Second PID display bias analog value 25 A5 B x x x x x 1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 26 A6 B x x x x x 1139 Second PID display gain analog value 27 A7 B x x x x x 1140 Second PID set point deviation input selection ...

Page 1174: ...rs 9 3A BA B x 1159 User parameters 10 3B BB B x 1160 User parameters 11 3C BC B x 1161 User parameters 12 3D BD B x 1162 User parameters 13 3E BE B x 1163 User parameters 14 3F BF B x 1164 User parameters 15 40 C0 B x 1165 User parameters 16 41 C1 B x 1166 User parameters 17 42 C2 B x 1167 User parameters 18 43 C3 B x 1168 User parameters 19 44 C4 B x 1169 User parameters 20 45 C5 B x 1170 User p...

Page 1175: ...x 1186 User parameters 37 56 D6 B x 1187 User parameters 38 57 D7 B x 1188 User parameters 39 58 D8 B x 1189 User parameters 40 59 D9 B x 1190 User parameters 41 5A DA B x 1191 User parameters 42 5B DB B x 1192 User parameters 43 5C DC B x 1193 User parameters 44 5D DD B x 1194 User parameters 45 5E DE B x 1195 User parameters 46 5F DF B x 1196 User parameters 47 60 E0 B x 1197 User parameters 48 ...

Page 1176: ...x x 1232 Third positioning dwell time 20 A0 C x x x x x x x 1233 Third positioning sub function 21 A1 C x x x x x x x 1234 Fourth positioning acceleration time 22 A2 C x x x x x x x 1235 Fourth positioning deceleration time 23 A3 C x x x x x x x 1236 Fourth positioning dwell time 24 A4 C x x x x x x x 1237 Fourth positioning sub function 25 A5 C x x x x x x x 1238 Fifth positioning acceleration ti...

Page 1177: ... B9 C x x x x x x x 1258 Tenth positioning acceleration time 3A BA C x x x x x x x 1259 Tenth positioning deceleration time 3B BB C x x x x x x x 1260 Tenth positioning dwell time 3C BC C x x x x x x x 1261 Tenth positioning sub function 3D BD C x x x x x x x 1262 Eleventh positioning acceleration time 3E BE C x x x x x x x 1263 Eleventh positioning deceleration time 3F BF C x x x x x x x 1264 Ele...

Page 1178: ...osition return speed 53 D3 C x x x x x x x 1284 Home position return creep speed 54 D4 C x x x x x x x 1285 Home position shift amount lower 4 digits 55 D5 C x x x x x x x 1286 Home position shift amount upper 4 digits 56 D6 C x x x x x x x 1287 Travel distance after proximity dog ON lower 4 digits 57 D7 C x x x x x x x 1288 Travel distance after proximity dog ON upper 4 digits 58 D8 C x x x x x x...

Page 1179: ...ference 2 52 D2 E 1483 Load characteristics load reference 3 53 D3 E 1484 Load characteristics load reference 4 54 D4 E 1485 Load characteristics load reference 5 55 D5 E 1486 Load characteristics maximum frequency 56 D6 E 1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency 57 D7 E 1488 Upper limit warning detection width 58 D8 E 1489 Lower limit warning detection width 59 D9 E 1490 Upper limit fault dete...

Page 1180: ... to page 5 802 for the details of the CC Link IE Field Network Basic Position control is enabled when an MM CF IPM motor is used with the low speed range high torque characteristic enabled Pr 788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection 9999 initial value Pr Name Instruction code Control method Parameter Read Write Extended Copy Clear All clear Spped control Torque control Position control ...

Page 1181: ... 1449 Ethernet command source selection IP address 1 31 B1 E 1450 Ethernet command source selection IP address 2 32 B2 E 1451 Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 33 B3 E 1452 Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 34 B4 E 1453 Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 range specification 35 B5 E 1454 Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 range specification 36 B6 E...

Page 1182: ...put power 0 01kW 0 1kW unsigned R H000F Input terminal status R H0010 Output terminal status R H0011 Load meter 0 1 unsigned R H0012 Motor excitation current 0 01A 0 1A unsigned R H0013 Position pulse 1 unsigned R W H0014 Cumulative energization time 1h unsigned R H0015 reserved H0016 Orientation status 1 unsigned R H0017 Actual operation time 1h unsigned R H0018 Motor load factor 0 1 unsigned R H...

Page 1183: ...0044 2nd PID set point 0 1 unsigned R W H0045 2nd PID measured value 0 1 unsigned R W H0046 2nd PID deviation 0 1 unsigned R W H0047 Cumulative pulse 1 signed R H0048 Cumulative pulse carrying over times 1 signed R H0049 Cumulative pulse control terminal option 1 signed R H004A Cumulative pulse carrying over times control terminal option 1 signed R H004B to H004F reserved H0050 Integrated power on...

Page 1184: ... signed R H0206 Motor rotation 16 31bit H0207 Load meter 0 15bit 0 1 signed R H0208 Load meter 16 31bit H0209 Current position 2 lower 16 bits 1 signed R W H020A Current position 2 upper 16 bits H020B Watt hour meter 1kWh step 0 15bit 1kWh unsigned R H020C Watt hour meter 1kWh step 16 31bit H020D Watt hour meter 0 1 0 01kWh step 0 15bit 0 1 0 01kWh unsigned R H020E Watt hour meter 0 1 0 01kWh step...

Page 1185: ...ion The dwell time is invalid To perform positioning operation in the direct command mode specify the point table RH recommended and turn ON the start signal When no point table is specified home position return operation is performed Pr Name Initial value Setting range Description 1220 B100 Target position speed selection 0 0 Target position and maximum speed Point table 1 Target position Direct ...

Page 1186: ...d speed Accelerationtime of point table 1 Target position Servo ON LX STF RH RM RL Direct command sent Time Maximum speed of point table 1 OFF OFF ON ON ON 0 0 ON ON OFF OFF ON Deceleration time of Pr 8 Time Maximum speed of direct command Accelerationtime of Pr 7 Position command speed Target position of direct command Servo ON LX STF RM RL Direct command sent Target position RH ...

Page 1187: ...FR A800 A 47 A 6 Plug in option compatibility A 6 1 FR A8NF When the plug in option FR A8NF is installed FL remote communication is supported A 6 2 FR A8NS When the plug in option FR A8NS is installed SSCNET III H communication is supported ...

Page 1188: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 48 A 7 EC Declarations of Conformity A 7 1 FR A820 FR A840 FR A842 series ...

Page 1189: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 49 ...

Page 1190: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 50 ...

Page 1191: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 51 ...

Page 1192: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 52 ...

Page 1193: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 53 ...

Page 1194: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 54 ...

Page 1195: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 55 ...

Page 1196: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 56 ...

Page 1197: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 57 ...

Page 1198: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 58 ...

Page 1199: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 59 ...

Page 1200: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 60 ...

Page 1201: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 61 ...

Page 1202: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 62 ...

Page 1203: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 63 ...

Page 1204: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 64 ...

Page 1205: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 65 ...

Page 1206: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 66 ...

Page 1207: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 67 ...

Page 1208: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 68 ...

Page 1209: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 69 ...

Page 1210: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 70 ...

Page 1211: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 71 ...

Page 1212: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 72 A 7 2 FR A846 series ...

Page 1213: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 73 ...

Page 1214: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 74 ...

Page 1215: ...Appendix EC Declarations of Conformity FR A800 A 75 ...

Page 1216: ...EC Declarations of Conformity Appendix A 76 A 7 3 Frequency inverters with option unit FR A8NP ...

Page 1217: ......

Page 1218: ...000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8116 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 AKHNATON BULGARIA 4 Andrei Ljapchev Blvd PO Box 21 BG 1756 Sofia Phone 359 0 2 817 6000 Fax 359 0 2 97 44 06 1 INEA CR CROATIA Losinjska 4 a HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Fax 385 0 1 36 940 03 AutoCont C S S R O CZECH REPUBLIC Kafkova 1853 3 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 595 691 150 Fax 420 595 691 199 HANS FØLSGAARD A S DEN...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for FR-A820-00046 (0.4K)

Idis FM1400 Installation Manual preview
FM1400
Brand: Idis Pages: 2
WarmPool DC55 Installation & Operation Manual preview
DC55
Brand: WarmPool Pages: 18
YEAZ TWEAK-X Instruction Manual preview
TWEAK-X
Brand: YEAZ Pages: 60
VEAP SHIELD UNITED FT Series Mounting Instruction preview
FT Series
Brand: VEAP SHIELD UNITED Pages: 3
easymaxx 04271 Instructions Manual preview
04271
Brand: easymaxx Pages: 8
Falltech 7275 User'S Instruction Manual For The Installation preview
7275
Brand: Falltech Pages: 13
FALK IBEX Quick Start Manual preview
IBEX
Brand: FALK Pages: 41
Yakima K1188 Instructions Manual preview
K1188
Brand: Yakima Pages: 12
JEHNERT SOUND DESIGN 65400 Assembly Instruction Manual preview
65400
Brand: JEHNERT SOUND DESIGN Pages: 8
Rainbow Experience Series Installation Manual preview
Experience Series
Brand: Rainbow Pages: 19
Yakima K1006 Instructions Manual preview
K1006
Brand: Yakima Pages: 12
Panasonic CS-E9DKEW Operating Instructions Manual preview
CS-E9DKEW
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 8
Panasonic CS-E9CKP Service Manual preview
CS-E9CKP
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 94
Panasonic CS-E9BKP Service Manual preview
CS-E9BKP
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 89
Öhlins RXF36 m.2 Workshop Manual preview
RXF36 m.2
Brand: Öhlins Pages: 10
+GF+ MSA 2 CF Instruction Manual preview
MSA 2 CF
Brand: +GF+ Pages: 36
Westin 23-3130 Instructions preview
23-3130
Brand: Westin Pages: 3
Prorack K383 Fitting Instructions Manual preview
K383
Brand: Prorack Pages: 14

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands